Kenwood Stereo Receiver Ts 2000 Users Manual 2000_2000X_B2000

TS-2000 to the manual f36a08b1-386c-4fa0-b38f-e83128ed087d

2015-01-23

: Kenwood Kenwood-Kenwood-Stereo-Receiver-Ts-2000-Users-Manual-264260 kenwood-kenwood-stereo-receiver-ts-2000-users-manual-264260 kenwood pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 152 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

09 08 07 06 05

ALL MODE MULTI-BAND TRANSCEIVER

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

NOTIFICATION

This equipment complies with the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC.

The use of the warning symbol means the equipment is subject to restrictions of

use in certain countries.

This equipment requires a licence and is intended for use in the countries as

below.

TAEBKDIFRFEDRGSIEITIIL

ULLNONTPSEESHCBGYCZCEE

UHVLTLTMLPKSISGBOR

6613OSI

THANK YOU

Thank you for choosing this KENWOOD TS-2000(X)/

TS-B2000 transceiver. It has been developed by a

team of engineers determined to continue the

tradition of excellence and innovation in KENWOOD

transceivers.

This transceiver features dual Digital Signal

Processing (DSP) units to process IF and AF signals.

By taking maximum advantage of DSP technology,

the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 gives you enhanced

interference reduction capabilities and improves the

quality of audio that you transmit without installing

additional analog filters. You will notice the

differences when you fight QRM and QRN. As you

learn how to use this transceiver, you will also find

that KENWOOD is pursuing “user friendliness”. For

example, each time you change the Menu No. in

Menu mode, you will see scrolling messages on the

display that tell you what you are selecting.

Though user friendly, this transceiver is technically

sophisticated and some features may be new to you.

Consider this manual to be a personal tutorial from

the designers. Allow the manual to guide you through

the learning process now, then act as a reference in

the coming years.

FEATURES

• All mode operation from HF to 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/

TS-B2000 Optional) amateur radio band with DSP

functions.

• Dual high speed Digital Signal Processing (DSP)

units.

• Adjustable DSP filter frequencies.

• High speed Digital Automatic Gain Control (AGC).

• A second independent sub-receiver for the 144 MHz

and 430 (440) MHz bands (FM and AM mode only).

• A built-in Antenna Tuner for HF/ 50 MHz band.

• A built-in 9600/ 1200 bps TNC for DX Packet

Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) and Sky Command II+

operations.

• DX Packet Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) for DX hunting.

• Instant Satellite communication key.

• A razor sharp DSP filter up to 50 Hz for CW

operation.

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

After carefully unpacking the transceiver, identify the

items listed in the table. We recommend you keep

the box and packing material below in case you need

to repack the transceiver in the future.

enohporciMXX-2530-19T11

elbacrewopCDXX-7513-03E11

gulpNIDnip-7XX-1570-70E11

gulpNIDnip-8XX-1580-70E11

gulpNIDnip-31XX-1531-70E11

(25 A)esuFXX-1352-50F11

(4 A)esuFXX-7204-60F11

teSwercSXX-4202-99N11

034-BMrofrecapSXX-8962-11G44

retlifeniL

XX-8041-97L11

dnaBgniniateR

XX-7030-16J11

MOR-DCXX-3210-39T–1

launaMnoitcurtsnIXX-1221-26B11

kcolB/citamehcS smargaiD

XX-4160-25B XX-6160-25B

XX-8160-25B XX-7160-25B 11

dracytnarraW

XX-9640-64B )epyt-K( XX-0130-64B )sepyt-EllA(

Accessory Part Number Quantity

TS-2000

TS-2000X TS-B2000

1E and E2-type only

WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED

The writing conventions described below have been

followed to simplify instructions and avoid

unnecessary repetition.

noitcurtsnI oDottahW

sserP ]YEK[]YEK[ ]YEK[ ]YEK[]YEK[ .esaelerdnasserP YEKYEK YEK YEKYEK .

sserP ]2YEK[+]1YEK[]2YEK[+]1YEK[ ]2YEK[+]1YEK[ ]2YEK[+]1YEK[]2YEK[+]1YEK[ .

dlohdnasserP 1YEK1YEK 1YEK 1YEK1YEK ,nwod

sserpneht 2YEK2YEK 2YEK 2YEK2YEK eraerehtfI. dnasserp,syekowtnahterom litnunrutniyekhcaenwoddloh .desserpneebsahyeklanifeht

sserP ]1YEK[]1YEK[ ]1YEK[ ]1YEK[]1YEK[ ,]2YEK[]2YEK[ ]2YEK[ ]2YEK[]2YEK[ .sserP 1YEK1YEK 1YEK 1YEK1YEK ,yliratnemom

esaeler 1YEK1YEK 1YEK 1YEK1YEK sserpneht, 2YEK2YEK 2YEK 2YEK2YEK .

sserP ][+]YEK[][+]YEK[ ][+]YEK[ ][+]YEK[][+]YEK[ .

,FFOrewopreviecsnartehthtiW dlohdnasserp YEKYEK YEK YEKYEK hctiwsneht, ybrewopreviecsnartehtNO gnisserp ][][][ ][][.)REWOP(

MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL

The models listed below are covered by this manual.

TS-2000: HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band

Transceiver

TS-2000X: HF/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz All-mode

Multi-band Transceiver

TS-B2000: HF/ VHF/ UHF All-mode Multi-band

Transceiver

As for TS-B2000, refer to the on-line help for

information on how to operate and control the

transceiver. Refer to pages 2, 3, and 13 for the

installation and information on the connectors.

MARKET CODES

K-type: The Americas

E-type: Europe

E2-type: Spain

The market code is shown on the carton box.

Refer to the specifications {page 105} for the

information on available operating frequencies.

NOTICE TO THE USER

One or more of the following statements may be

applicable for this equipment.

FCC WARNING

This equipment generates or uses radio frequency energy.

Changes or modifications to this equipment may cause harmful

interference unless the modifications are expressly approved in

the instruction manual. The user could lose the authority to

operate this equipment if an unauthorized change or

modification is made.

INFORMATION TO THE DIGITAL DEVICE USER REQUIRED

BY THE FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference in a residential

installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can generate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no guarantee that the

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct

the interference by one or more of the following measures:

•

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

•

Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

•

Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from

that to which the receiver is connected.

•

Consult the dealer for technical assistance.

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium

Battery which contains Perchlorate Material –

special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

iii

PRECAUTIONS

Please observe the following precautions to prevent

fire, personal injury, and transceiver damage:

• Connect the transceiver only to a power source

described in this manual or as marked on the

transceiver itself.

• Route all power cables safely. Ensure the power

cables can neither be stepped upon nor pinched

by items placed near or against the cables. Pay

particular attention to locations near AC

receptacles, AC outlet strips, and points of entry to

the transceiver.

• Take care not to drop objects or spill liquid into the

transceiver through enclosure openings. Metal

objects, such as hairpins or needles, inserted into

the transceiver may contact voltages resulting in

serious electrical shocks. Never permit children to

insert any objects into the transceiver.

• Do not attempt to defeat methods used for

grounding and electrical polarization in the

transceiver, particularly involving the power input

cable.

• Adequately ground all outdoor antennas for this

transceiver using approved methods. Grounding

helps protect against voltage surges caused by

lightning. It also reduces the chance of a build-up

of static charge.

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

GROUND

CLAMP

ELECTRIC SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

GROUNDING

CONDUCTORS

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE

GROUNDING ELECTRODE

SYSTEM

• Minimum recommended distance for an outdoor

antenna from power lines is one and one-half

times the vertical height of the associated antenna

support structure. This distance allows adequate

clearance from the power lines if the support

structure fails for any reason.

• Locate the transceiver so as not to interfere with

its ventilation. Do not place books or other

equipment on the transceiver that may impede the

free movement of air. Allow a minimum of

4 inches (10 cm) between the rear of the

transceiver and the wall or operating desk shelf.

• Do not use the transceiver near water or sources

of moisture. For example, avoid use near a

bathtub, sink, swimming pool, or in a damp

basement or attic.

• The presence of an unusual odor or smoke is

often a sign of trouble. Immediately turn the

power OFF and remove the power cable. Contact

a KENWOOD service station or your dealer for

advice.

• Locate the transceiver away from heat sources

such as a radiator, stove, amplifier or other

devices that produce substantial amounts of heat.

• Do not use volatile solvents such as alcohol, paint

thinner, gasoline or benzene to clean the cabinet

of the transceiver. Use a clean cloth with warm

water or a mild detergent.

• Disconnect the input power cable from the power

source when the transceiver is not used for long

periods of time.

• Remove the transceiver’s enclosure only to do

accessory installations described in this manual or

accessory manuals. Follow provided instructions

carefully, to avoid electrical shocks. If unfamiliar

with this type of work, seek assistance from an

experienced individual, or have a professional

technician do the task.

• Enlist the services of qualified personnel in the

following cases:

a) The power supply or plug is damaged.

b) Objects have fallen or liquid has spilled into the

transceiver.

c) The transceiver has been exposed to rain.

d) The transceiver is operating abnormally or

performance has seriously degraded.

e) The transceiver has been dropped or the

enclosure damaged.

CONTENTS

QUICK MENU ........................................................ 21

PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU ............... 21

USING THE QUICK MENU ............................... 21

MENU CONFIGURATION ..................................... 22

ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST......................... 26

CHAPTER 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

SSB TRANSMISSION ........................................... 28

FM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 28

AM TRANSMISSION ............................................. 29

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM ......................... 29

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM ......................... 29

CW TRANSMISSION ............................................ 30

AUTO ZERO-BEAT ........................................... 30

TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY ......... 30

CHAPTER 8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION ........................ 31

TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET) .......... 31

FM REPEATER OPERATION ................................ 32

PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET .......................... 32

Selecting an Offset Direction ......................... 32

Selecting an Offset Frequency ...................... 32

TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 33

Activating the Tone Function ......................... 33

Selecting a Tone Frequency .......................... 33

Selecting Continuous or Burst ....................... 33

Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone ........................ 33

AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET ................... 34

REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 34

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 34

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 34

FM CTCSS OPERATION ....................................... 35

CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN ................................... 35

FM DCS OPERATION ............................................. 36

DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 36

CHAPTER 9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

RECEIVING ........................................................... 37

SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY .................... 37

Direct Frequency Entry ................................. 37

Using 1 MHz Steps ....................................... 37

Quick QSY.................................................... 37

Fine Tuning................................................... 38

Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B) .............. 38

RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING) .......... 38

AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL) ............... 38

TRANSMITTING .................................................... 39

VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT) ............. 39

Microphone Input Level................................. 39

Delay Time ................................................... 39

SPEECH PROCESSOR .................................... 40

XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING) ....... 40

CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL

CHARACTERISTICS ......................................... 41

TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/AM) ...................... 41

TX Equalizer (SSB/FM/AM) .......................... 41

TRANSMIT INHIBIT ........................................... 41

CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE

TRANSMITTING................................................ 41

THANK YOU............................................................. i

FEATURES............................................................... i

SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES ..................................... i

WRITING CONVENTIONS FOLLOWED .................. i

MODELS COVERED BY THIS MANUAL ................. ii

MARKET CODES .................................................... ii

NOTICE TO USER .................................................. ii

PRECAUTIONS....................................................... iii

CONTENTS ............................................................ iv

CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION

ANTENNA CONNECTION ....................................... 1

GROUND CONNECTION ........................................ 1

LIGHTNING PROTECTION ..................................... 1

DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION ...................... 2

UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000 (X) ONLY) .............. 2

REPLACING FUSES ............................................... 2

ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS ............................... 3

FRONT PANEL .................................................... 3

Headphones (PHONES) ................................. 3

Microphone (MIC) ........................................... 3

REAR PANEL ...................................................... 3

External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2) ......... 3

Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY) ................... 3

CHAPTER 2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50MHz band)

RECEIVING ............................................................. 4

TRANSMITTING ...................................................... 5

CHAPTER 3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)

RECEIVING ............................................................. 6

TRANSMITTING ...................................................... 7

CHAPTER 4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

FRONT PANEL ........................................................ 8

REAR PANEL ........................................................ 13

DISPLAY ............................................................... 14

MICROPHONE ...................................................... 17

CHAPTER 5 OPERATING BASICS

SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF ............................. 18

ADJUSTING VOLUME .......................................... 18

AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN....................... 18

RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN ...................... 18

SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B ............................. 18

SELECTING A BAND ............................................ 18

SELECTING A MODE ............................................ 19

ADJUSTING SQUELCH ........................................ 19

SELECTING A FREQUENCY ................................ 19

FRONT PANEL METER ......................................... 19

TRANSMITTING .................................................... 20

SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER ..................... 20

MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 20

CHAPTER 6 MENU SETUP

WHAT IS A MENU?................................................ 21

MENU A/ MENU B ................................................. 21

MENU ACCESS .................................................... 21

CONTENTS

RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY) .................... 51

AMTOR/PacTOR/CLOVER/G-TOR/PSK31 ........... 52

SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE ............................... 52

DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE............................... 53

SATELLITE OPERATION ...................................... 53

BASIC OPERATION .......................................... 53

STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS .. 54

RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY

CHANNEL ......................................................... 54

SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME ........................... 54

QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE ........... 54

CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY........... 54

USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE .............. 54

CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND ............. 54

CHAPTER 12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

DSP FILTERS ........................................................ 55

CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER

BANDWIDTH ..................................................... 55

SSB/ FM/ AM Modes .................................... 55

CW/ FSK Modes........................................... 55

NOTCH FILTER (SSB) ...................................... 56

BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM) ................................. 56

MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (ALL MODES) ........... 56

NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 56

Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment .............. 56

Settign the N.R. 2 Time Constant .................. 56

NOISE BLANKER .................................................. 57

PRE-AMPLIFIER ................................................... 57

ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 57

CHAPTER 13 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY CHANNELS .......................................... 58

STORING DATA IN MEMORY ........................... 58

Simplex Channels ......................................... 58

Split-Frequency Channels ............................. 59

MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL .................... 59

Memory Recall.............................................. 59

Memory Scroll............................................... 60

Temporary Frequency Changes .................... 60

MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION .................. 60

MEMORY TRANSFER ...................................... 61

Memory ➡ VFO Transfer .............................. 61

Channel ➡ Channel Transfer ........................ 61

STORING FREQUENCY RANGES ................... 62

Confirming Start/End Frequencies ................ 62

Programmable VFO...................................... 62

Memory Channel Lockout ............................. 62

ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS ..................... 62

MEMORY CHANNEL NAME ............................. 63

MEMORY GROUP ............................................ 64

Memory Group Select ................................... 64

QUICK MEMORY .................................................. 64

STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY .................... 64

RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS ..... 65

TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES .......... 65

QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER .............. 65

CW BREAK-IN....................................................... 42

USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR

FULL BREAK-IN ................................................ 42

ELECTRONIC KEYER .......................................... 42

CHANGING KEYING SPEED ............................ 42

AUTO WEIGHTING ........................................... 42

Reverse Keying Weight Ratio ....................... 42

BUG KEY FUNCTION ....................................... 43

CW MESSAGE MEMORY ................................. 43

Storing CW Messages .................................. 43

Checking CW Messages without

Transmitting .................................................. 43

Transmitting CW Messages .......................... 43

Changing the Inter-message Interval Time .... 44

Changing the Sidetone Volume ..................... 44

Inset Keying .................................................. 44

FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW ............ 44

CW REVERSE (RECEIVE)................................ 44

AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE ............................ 44

CHAPTER 10 SUB-RECEIVER

SUB-RECEIVER .................................................... 45

TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND .......................... 45

TX BAND ........................................................... 45

CONTROL BAND .............................................. 45

RECEIVING ........................................................... 45

ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER .................. 45

CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER ............. 45

SELECTING A BAND ........................................ 45

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF)

GAIN ................................................................. 46

ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH ............................ 46

SELECTING A FREQUENCY ............................ 46

SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER ...................... 46

SELECTING A MODE FOR

THE SUB-RECEIVER........................................ 46

FM CTCSS OPERATION................................... 46

FM DCS OPERATION ....................................... 46

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN ..................................... 46

DCS CODE ID SCAN ........................................ 46

ATTENUATOR................................................... 47

PRE-AMPLIFIER ............................................... 47

DUAL WATCH ................................................... 47

SCAN ................................................................ 47

NOISE REDUCTION ......................................... 47

TRANSMITTING .................................................... 47

SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER .................. 47

MICROPHONE GAIN ........................................ 47

FM REPEATER OPERATION ............................ 47

REVERSE FUNCTION ...................................... 47

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC) .............. 48

TRANSMITTING A TONE .................................. 48

MEMORY .............................................................. 48

CHAPTER 11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PACKET RADIO .................................................... 49

BUILT-IN TNC ........................................................ 49

PREPARATION ..................................................... 50

DCD SENSE.......................................................... 50

CONTENTS

TNC ....................................................................... 79

TRANSVERTER .................................................... 79

TX MONITOR ........................................................ 79

TX POWER ........................................................... 79

QUICK DATA TRANSFER ..................................... 80

SETTING UP ..................................................... 80

Equipment Needed ....................................... 80

Connections ................................................. 80

USING QUICK TRANSFER ............................... 80

Transferring Data .......................................... 80

Receiving Data ............................................. 80

COMPUTER CONTROL........................................ 81

SETTING UP ..................................................... 81

Equipment Needed ....................................... 81

Connections ................................................. 81

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS ....................... 81

REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER ............. 81

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL (K-type ONLY) .. 82

PREPARATION ................................................. 82

CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 82

SKY COMMAND II+ (K-type ONLY) ....................... 83

PREPARATION ................................................. 83

CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 84

USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER ................. 85

CONTROL OPERATION ................................... 85

USING ANOTHER TS-2000

AS A COMMANDER .......................................... 87

USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER ............. 88

REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)................. 88

LOCK-BAND REPEATER .................................. 88

CROSS-BAND REPEATER ............................... 88

HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION ....... 88

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT

(OPTIONAL) .......................................................... 89

RECORDING MESSAGES ................................ 89

MESSAGE PLAYBACK ..................................... 89

Checking Messages ..................................... 89

Sending Messages ....................................... 90

Erasing a Recorded Message ....................... 90

Changing Inter-message Interval Time .......... 90

Changing Playback Volume .......................... 90

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL) ............ 91

MICROPROCESSOR RESET ............................... 92

INITIAL SETTINGS ............................................ 92

PARTIAL RESET ............................................... 92

FULL RESET ..................................................... 92

CHAPTER 16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

COMPUTER .......................................................... 93

COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER .............................. 93

RTTY EQUIPMENT ............................................... 94

HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER ........................................ 94

ANTENNA TUNER ................................................ 94

MCP AND TNC ...................................................... 95

TYPICAL MCP/ TNC SETUP ................................. 96

LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430

(440) MHz and 1.2 GHz) ........................................ 96

CHAPTER 14 SCAN

NORMAL SCAN .................................................... 66

VFO SCAN ........................................................ 66

PROGRAM SCAN ............................................. 67

PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED.......... 67

SCAN HOLD ..................................................... 68

MHz SCAN ........................................................ 68

MEMORY SCAN.................................................... 68

SCAN RESUME METHOD ................................ 68

ALL-CHANNEL SCAN ....................................... 68

GROUP SCAN .................................................. 69

CALL SCAN....................................................... 69

VISUAL SCAN ................................................... 70

Using Visual Scan (VFO) .............................. 70

Changing the Number of Channels to Scan .. 70

Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel) ........... 70

CHAPTER 15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) .......................................... 72

ANTENNAS ........................................................... 72

HF/ 50 MHz BAND............................................. 72

VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHZ BAND ................................ 72

APO (Auto Power OFF) ......................................... 72

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER ........................... 72

Presetting .......................................................... 73

ATTENUATOR ....................................................... 73

AUTO MODE ......................................................... 73

BEEP FUNCTION.................................................. 74

CALL CHANNEL .................................................... 75

DISPLAY ............................................................... 75

BRIGHTNESS ................................................... 75

CONTRAST....................................................... 75

KEY ILLUMINATION .......................................... 75

DTMF .................................................................... 75

MANUAL DTMF DIALING .................................. 75

DTMF MEMORY ............................................... 75

Entering DTMF tones .................................... 75

Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data ... 76

DTMF Tone Time Length .............................. 76

DTMF Pause Period ..................................... 76

HF RX ANTENNA .................................................. 76

LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL ............................ 76

LOCK FUNCTIONS ............................................... 77

FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION ...................... 77

LOCK ALL FUNCTION ...................................... 77

MICROPHONE PF KEYS ...................................... 77

MONITOR ............................................................. 77

PF KEY.................................................................. 77

RISE TIME OF CW ................................................ 77

RX DSP EQUALIZER ............................................ 78

EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO

(SSB/ FM/ AM) ................................................... 78

SEPARATE SPEAKER OUTPUT ........................... 78

S-METER SQUELCH ............................................ 78

SQUELCH HANG TIME..................................... 78

TIME-OUT TIMER ................................................. 78

vii

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 17 INSTALLING OPTIONS

REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE ........................ 97

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT ................... 97

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT........................ 97

MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET .................................. 98

RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL .................................... 98

CHAPTER 18 TROUBLESHOOTING

GENERAL INFORMATION .................................... 99

SERVICE........................................................... 99

SERVICE NOTE ................................................ 99

CLEANING ........................................................ 99

LITHIUM BATTERY ............................................... 99

DEMONSTRATION MODE .................................... 99

TROUBLESHOOTING ......................................... 100

OPERATION NOTICES ....................................... 103

DC POWER SUPPLY ...................................... 103

TX SIGNAL HARMONICS ............................... 103

INTERNAL BEATS .......................................... 103

VISUAL SCAN ................................................. 103

SENSITIVITY (K-type ONLY) ........................... 103

AGC ................................................................ 103

SUB-RECEIVER.............................................. 103

CHAPTER 19 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES ................................ 104

CHAPTER 20 SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS ............................................... 105

CHAPTER 21 APPENDIX

TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL ................................... 109

BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST .......................... 110

COM CONNECTOR ............................................ 113

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION ........................... 113

CONTROL OPERATION ................................. 113

COMPUTER CONTROL.................................. 114

Alphabetical Commands ............................. 114

Parameters ................................................. 114

Terminator .................................................. 114

Error Messages .......................................... 114

PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES ................... 115

CHAPTER 22 INDEX

INDEX ................................................................. 142

INSTALLATION

ANTENNA CONNECTION

An antenna system consists of an antenna, feed line,

and ground. The transceiver can give excellent

results if the antenna system and its installation are

given careful attention. Use a properly adjusted 50Ω

antenna of good quality, a high-quality 50Ω coaxial

cable, and first-quality connectors. All connections

must be clean and tight.

After making the connections, match the impedance

of the coaxial cable and antenna so that the SWR is

1.5:1 or less. High SWR will cause the transmit

output to drop and may lead to radio frequency

interference to consumer products such as stereo

receivers and televisions. You may even interfere

with your own transceiver. Reports that your signal is

distorted could indicate that your antenna system is

not efficiently radiating the transceiver’s power.

Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna feed line

to ANT 1 on the rear of the transceiver. If you are

using two HF/ 50 MHz antennas, connect the

secondary antenna to ANT 2. Connect VHF

(144 MHz), UHF (430/ 440 MHz), and 1.2 GHz

(TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional) antennas to their

respective antenna connectors on the rear of the

transceiver. Refer to page 13 for the location of the

antenna connectors.

◆

Transmitting without connecting an antenna or other

matched load may damage the transceiver. Always

connect the antenna to the transceiver before transmitting.

◆

All fixed stations should be equipped with a lightning

arrester to reduce the risk of fire, electric shock, and

transceiver damage.

Note: The transceiver’s protection circuit will activate when the SWR

is greater than 2.5:1; however, do not rely on protection to

compensate for a poorly functioning antenna system.

Connect all accessories to the transceiver {pages 3, 94}.

Accessories include the following:

• Microphone

• Antenna Tuner

• CW Key

• Computer

• TNC/ Multimode

Communications Processor

Install and connect an antenna system

{page 1}.

Install a ground system that satisfies DC

and RF grounding requirements {page 1}.

Install lightning protection to protect the

antenna system, your personal safety,

and your property {page 1}.

Install and connect a DC power supply {page 2}.

• Headphones

• External Speaker

• RTTY Equipment

• Linear Amplifier

• Remote Panel

GROUND CONNECTION

At the minimum, a good DC ground is required to

prevent such dangers as electric shock. For superior

communications results, a good RF ground is

required, against which the antenna system can

operate. Both of these conditions can be met by

providing a good earth ground for your station. Bury

one or more ground rods or a large copper plate

under the ground, then connect this to the transceiver

GND terminal. Use heavy gauge wire or a copper

strap, cut as short as possible, for this connection.

Do not use a gas pipe, an electrical conduit, or a

plastic water pipe as a ground.

LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Even in areas where lightning storms are less

common, there are usually a limited number of

storms each year. Consider carefully how to protect

your equipment and home from lightning. The

installation of a lightning arrestor is a start, but there

is more that you can do. For example, terminate your

antenna system transmission lines at an entry panel

that you install outside your home. Ground this entry

panel to a good outside ground, then connect the

appropriate feed lines between the entry panel and

your transceiver. When a lightning storm occurs,

disconnecting the feed lines from your transceiver will

ensure added protection.

1 INSTALLATION

DC POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION

In order to use this transceiver, you need a separate

13.8 V DC power supply that must be purchased

separately. Do not directly connect the transceiver to

an AC outlet. Use the supplied DC power cable to

connect the transceiver to a regulated power supply.

Do not substitute a cable with smaller gauge wires.

The current capacity of the power supply must be

20.5 A peak or more.

TS-2000/ TS-2000X

TS-B2000

First, connect the DC power cable to the regulated

DC power supply; the red lead to the positive terminal

and the black lead to the negative terminal. Next,

connect the DC power cable to the transceiver’s DC

power connector. Press the connectors firmly

together until the locking tab clicks.

Note:

◆

Before connecting the DC power supply to the transceiver, be

sure to switch OFF the DC power supply and transceiver.

◆

Do not plug the DC power supply into an AC outlet until you

make all connections.

UTILIZING THE BAIL (TS-2000(X) ONLY)

This transceiver is equipped with a bail so that you

can angle the transceiver. The bail is located on the

bottom of the transceiver. Pull the bail forward to the

limit as shown.

REPLACING FUSES

If a fuse blows, determine the cause then correct the

problem. Only after the problem has been resolved,

replace the blown fuse with a new one with the

specified ratings. If newly installed fuses continue to

blow, disconnect the power plug and contact a

KENWOOD service station or your dealer for

assistance.

noitacoLesuF gnitaRtnerruCesuF

/)X(0002-ST 0002B-ST A4

)renutannetnalanretxenaroF(

rewopCDdeilppuS elbac A52

Fuse holders

(Fuse 25 A)

DC 13.8 V

RedBlack

Pull the bail

Fuse (4 A)

1 INSTALLATION

ACCESSORY CONNECTIONS

FRONT PANEL

■Headphones (PHONES)

Connect monaural or stereo headphones having a

4 to 32Ω impedance. This jack accepts a

6.3 mm (1/4") diameter, 2-conductor (mono) or

3-conductor (stereo) plug. After connecting the

headphones, you will hear no sound from the

internal (or optional external) speaker.

■Microphone (MIC)

Connect a microphone having an impedance

between 250 and 600Ω. Fully insert the

connector, then screw the retaining ring clockwise

until secure. Compatible microphones include the

MC-43S, MC-47, MC-52DM, MC-60A, MC-80,

MC-85, and MC-90. Do not use the MC-44,

MC-44DM, MC-45, MC-45E, MC-45DM,

MC-45DME, or MC-53DM microphones.

REAR PANEL

■External Speakers (EXT.SP1/ EXT.SP2)

This transceiver has 2 independent receivers.

Thus, it can output 2 separate audio signals. As a

default, the transceiver mixes both audio signals

internally and outputs them from the internal

speaker. On the rear panel of the transceiver,

there are 2 external speaker jacks. If an external

speaker is connected to EXP.SP1, the internal

speaker will mute. If the speaker is connected to

EXT.SP2, both the external speaker and the

internal speaker will function. Use only external

speakers with an impedance of 4 to 8Ω (8Ω

nominal). These jacks accept only 3.5 mm (1/8")

diameter, 2-conductor (mono) plugs.

Do not connect headphones to this jack. The high audio output

of this jack could damage your hearing.

■Keys for CW (PADDLE and KEY)

For CW operation using the internal electronic

keyer, connect a keyer paddle to the PADDLE

jack. For CW operation without using the internal

electronic keyer, connect a straight key,

semi-automatic key (bug), electronic keyer, or the

CW keyed output from a Multimode

Communications Processor (MCP) to the KEY

jack. The PADDLE and KEY jacks mate with a

6.3 mm (1/4") 3-conductor plug and a 3.5 mm

(1/8") 2-conductor plug respectively. External

electronic keyers or MCPs must use positive

keying to be compatible with this transceiver. Use

a shielded cable between the key and the

transceiver.

Note: Due to the functionality of the internal electronic keyer, you

may find it unnecessary to connect both a paddle and another

type of keyer unless you want to use a PC-based keyer for CW.

Read the “ELECTRONIC KEYER” section {page 42} to become

familiar with the internal keyer.

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

• Straight key • Paddle

• Bug key

• Electronic keyer

• MCP CW output

GND GND dash dot

Microphone

Headphone

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-B2000

MIC connector (Front view)

GND (STBY)

GND (MIC)

8 V (10 mA max)

MIC

PTT

DOWN

External speaker

YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)

Are you ready to give your TS-2000(X) a quick try? Reading these two pages should get your voice on the air

in your first QSO on the HF/ 50 MHz band shortly. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide.

If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t understand, read the detailed explanations given

later in this manual.

RECEIVING

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

18 5 3 1 7 1 4

Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to

briefly try the transceiver.

qSet the following as specified:

•MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise

•MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise

•MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise

wSwitch ON the DC power supply, then press

and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the

transceiver.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver

will be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed

by the selected frequency and other

indicators.

eConfirm that VFO A has been selected for

communications; “tA” should be visible on

the display. If it has not, press [A/B] to select

VFO A.

rTurn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise

until you hear a suitable level of background

noise.

tPress [+]/ [–] to select an HF/ 50 MHz Amateur

radio band.

yPress [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to

select an operating mode.

• To select the second mode on each key,

press the same key again. For example,

each press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] switches

between LSB and USB modes.

uIf you have selected FM, turn the MAIN SQL

control clockwise until the background noise is

just eliminated; the MAIN band LED (above the

[MIC/ CAR] key) turns off.

• With LSB or USB selected, skip this step.

iTurn the Tuning control to tune in a station.

• If you do not hear any stations, you may

have the wrong antenna connector selected.

Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to switch

between the antenna 1 and 2 connectors.

2 YOUR FIRST QSO (HF/ 50 MHz band)

TRANSMITTING

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

4 9

qTurn the Tuning control to tune in a desired

station or to select an unused frequency.

wPress [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.

•“AT” appears.

ePress and hold [AT/ ANT1/2] to activate the built-

in antenna tuner.

•“AT” starts blinking and the MAIN band LED

above the [MIC/ CAR] key turns red.

• Tuning should be completed in under

20 seconds, then “AT ” stops blinking.

• If tuning is not completed within 20 seconds,

error beeps sound. Press [AT/ ANT1/2] to stop

the error beeps and quit tuning. Check your

antenna system before continuing. If you do

not press [AT/ ANT1/2], tuning will continue for

approximately 60 seconds.

Note: You will hear a lot of clicking sounds coming from the

transceiver while the antenna tuner is trying to tune the antenna.

This is simply the relay switches turning ON and OFF.

rWith LSB, USB, or AM selected, press

[MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

• “MIC GAIN 50” appears.

• With FM selected, skip this step.

tPress [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED turns red.

yBegin speaking into the microphone in your

normal tone of voice.

uLSB/ USB: While speaking into the microphone,

adjust the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC

meter reflects according to your voice level.

AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust

the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated

power meter slightly reflects to your voice level.

FM: Skip this step.

iWhen you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return

to receive mode.

oPress [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjustment.

Note: If desired, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} to try the

Microphone Gain Adjust for FM.

This completes your introduction to the

TS-2000(X), but there is a great deal more to know.

“OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and the following

chapters explain all the functions of this transceiver,

starting with the most basic, commonly-used

functions.

YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)

If your primary operating band is VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz), the TS-2000(X) can also serve you

as a powerful All-mode VHF/ UHF transceiver. The instructions below are intended only for a quick guide to

get you up on the air on the VHF/ UHF band. If you encounter problems or there is something you don’t

understand, read the detailed explanations given later in this manual.

RECEIVING

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

18 5 3 1 7 1 4

Note: This section explains only keys and controls required to

briefly try the transceiver.

qSet the following as specified:

•MAIN AF: Fully counterclockwise

•MAIN RF GAIN: Fully clockwise

•MAIN SQL: Fully counterclockwise

wSwitch ON the DC power supply, then press

and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly on the

transceiver.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver

will be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed

by the selected frequency and other

indicators.

ePress [MAIN], then confirm that VFO A has

been selected for communications; “tA”

should be visible on the display. If it has not,

press [A/B] to select VFO A.

rTurn the MAIN AF control slowly clockwise

until you hear a suitable level of background

noise.

tPress [+]/ [–] to move up to the VHF

(144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440 MHz) Amateur

radio band.

yConfirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is

not, press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM.

uTurn the SQL control clockwise until the

background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN

band LED turns off.

iTurn the Tuning control to tune in a station.

• You can use the MULTI/ CH control to

change the frequency faster. If you do not

hear any stations, the antenna may not be

installed or connected properly. Check

the antenna connector on the rear panel

{page 13}.

3 YOUR FIRST QSO (VHF/ UHF band)

TRANSMITTING

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C.T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

1 23 5

qConfirm that the operating mode is FM. If it is not,

press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to change the operating

mode to FM.

wTurn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control

to tune in a desired station or to select an unused

frequency.

ePress [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED turns red.

rBegin speaking into the microphone in your

normal tone of voice.

tWhen you finish speaking, press [SEND] to return

to receive mode.

This completes your introduction on how to receive

and transmit using the TS-2000(X) on a VHF/ UHF

band. Refer to “OPERATING BASICS” {page 18} and

the following chapters for explanations on all the

functions of this transceiver.

GETTING ACQUAINTED

FRONT PANEL

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C.T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

qPF key

You can assign a function to this Programmable

Function key. The default function is Voice 1

{page 77}.

w[ ] (POWER) switch

Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power

ON. Press again to switch the power OFF.

eATT/ F LOCK key

Press to switch the receiver attenuator ON or OFF

{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to switch

the Frequency Lock function ON or OFF {page 77}.

rPRE/ LOCK A key

Press to switch the receiver pre-amplifier ON or OFF

{page 57}. Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to lock all

the transceiver keys {page 77}.

tVOX/ LEVEL key

In voice mode, press to switch the Voice-Operated

Transmit function ON or OFF {page 39}. In CW

mode, press to switch the Break-in function ON or

OFF {page 42}. Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL] to

adjust the microphone input level for VOX operation.

The VOX LED lights orange when the VOX function is

active.

yPROC/ LEVEL key

Press to switch the Speech Processor for transmitting

ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],

[PROC/ LEVEL] to adjust the Speech Processor

input level. The PROC LED lights orange when the

Speech Processor function is actived.

uSEND key

Press to switch the transceiver between receive

mode and transmit mode {pages 5, 7}.

iAT/ ANT1/2 key

Press to activate the internal antenna tuner {page 72}

or an external antenna tuner. Press [FUNC],

[AT/ ANT1/2] to select either Antenna 1 or Antenna 2

for the HF/ 50 MHz band {page 72}.

oPHONES jack

Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a

plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from

the speaker {pages 3, 78}.

!0 MIC connector

Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,

then securely screw down the connector locking ring

{page 3}.

!1 N.R./ LEVEL key

Press to switch the DSP Noise Reduction function

ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL] to adjust

the Noise Reduction level. Press [FUNC],

[N.R./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment

{page 56}.

!2 A.N./ LEVEL key

Press to switch the DSP Auto Notch function ON or

OFF. Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to adjust the

DSP Auto Notch reduction level. Press [FUNC],

[A.N./ LEVEL] again to finish the adjustment

{page 56}.

!3 B.C./ MANUAL key

Press to switch the DSP Auto Beat Cancel function

ON or OFF. Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] to

adjust the beat cancel frequency manually. Press

[FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL] again to finish the manual

adjustment {page 56}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

!4 Multi-purpose keypad

Consists of 10 keys that are used to enter numeric

data. Also used for the following functions:

•1/ CH1/REC, 2/ CH2/REC, and 3/ CH3/REC keys

Press to play back or record the CW or voice

messages that are associated with the DRU-3A

Digital Recording Unit {page 89} and the internal

electronic keyer {page 43}.

•4/ TONE/SEL key

Press to activate the sub-audible Tone function to

access repeaters for FM mode. To select the Tone

frequency, press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL], then

select your desired tone frequency using the

MULTI/ CH control {page 33}.

•5/ METER key

Press to select the meter scales {page 19}.

•6/ CTCSS/SEL key

Press to activate the Continuous Tone Coded

Squelch System (CTCSS) function for FM mode.

To select the CTCSS tone frequency, press

[FUNC], [5/ CTCSS/SEL], then select your

desired CTCSS tone frequency using the

MULTI/ CH control {page 35}.

•7/ NB/LEVEL key

Press to switch the Noise Blanker ON or OFF.

Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/LEVEL] to adjust the Noise

Blanker level {page 57}.

•8/ AGC/OFF key

Press to adjust the response time of the Automatic

Gain Control. To switch the AGC OFF, press

[FUNC], [8/ AGC/OFF] {page 38}.

•9/ FINE/STEP key

Press to activate the Fine tuning function to allow

more precise tuning {page 38}.

••/ DCS/SEL key

Press to activate the Digital Coded Squelch

function for FM mode. To select the DCS code,

press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL], then select your

desired code using the MULTI/ CH control

{page 36}.

•0/ SHIFT/OFFSET key

Press to switch the Shift function for FM mode ON

or OFF when accessing the repeaters. The Shift

frequency can be manually adjusted by pressing

[FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET], then adjusting the

shift frequency value using the MULTI/ CH control

{page 32}.

•ENT key

Press to enter your desired frequency using the

keypad {page 37}.

!5 FUNC key

Press to access the secondary functions that are

assigned to the keys. While FUNC is active, the

FUNC LED lights orange.

!6 MIC/ CAR key

Press to adjust the microphone gain {page 20}.

While the Speech Processor function is ON, it

becomes the Speech Processor output level

adjustment key {page 40}.

Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to adjust the carrier level

for CW, FSK and AM mode {page 20}.

!7 PWR/ TX MONI key

Press to adjust the output power {page 20}. Press

[FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor your

transmission signal {page 79}.

!8 KEY/ DELAY key

Press to adjust the internal electronic keyer speed.

Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to adjust the VOX

delay time or break-in time (Full break-in/ Semi

break-in time) for CW mode {page 42}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C.T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

27 28 33

20 29

21 2223 24 26 30 32 31

!9 LSB/ USB/ AUTO key

Press to select lower sideband (LSB) or upper

sideband (USB) mode for voice or digital operation.

Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the auto

mode selection {page 73}.

@0 CW/ FSK/ REV key

Press to select CW or FSK (Frequency Shift Keying)

mode {pages 30, 51}. Press [FUNC],

[CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse the sideband pitch.

@1 FM/ AM/ NAR key

Press to select FM or AM mode {pages 28, 29}.

Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select narrow

bandwidth transmission mode {page 29}.

@2 CLR key

Press to exit from, abort, or reset various functions.

Also used to erase memory channels {page 62} or

locking out memory channels from the scan list

{page 62}.

@3 DISP key

Press to toggle the normal operating mode and DSP

filter setting display mode {page 55}. Press and hold

to start the Visual Scan function {page 70}.

@4 1MHz/ SEL key

Press to switch the MHz Up/ Down function ON or

OFF using the MULTI/ CH control. Press [FUNC],

[1MHz/ SEL] to change the increment/ decrement

step value {page 37}. Press and hold to start the

MHz Scan function {page 68}.

@5 Tuning control

Turn to select the desired frequency {page 37}. Use

the convenient finger-tip cavity for continuous tuning.

The lever behind this control adjusts the control

torque level; turn fully clockwise for light torque or

fully counterclockwise for heavy torque.

@6 CTRL key

Press to toggle the operating controls between the

main transceiver and the sub-receiver. The

transmission band is not affected by this key.

@7 MENU key

Press to select or cancel the Menu mode that is used

for activating and configuring functions {page 21}.

@8 TF-SET key

While operating split-frequency, press to monitor or

change your transmit frequency {page 31}.

@9 +/ – (Up/ Down) keys

Press to step through all the Amateur radio bands

consecutively {page 18}. Also used to make

selections from the Menu {page 21}, and to check the

Start and End frequencies of the Scan function

{page 62}.

#0 MAIN key

Press to transfer the operating controls to the MAIN

transceiver. Also moves the transmission band to the

main transceiver frequency.

#1 SUB key

Press to transfer the operating controls to the sub-

receiver. Also moves the transmission band to the

sub-receiver frequency.

#2 SCAN/ SG.SEL key

Press to start or stop the Scan function {page 66}.

Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to select a scan

group {page 69}.

#3 CALL/ C.IN key

Press to recall a call channel for the selected operating

band (HF/ 50 MHz/ 144 MHz/ 430 (440) MHz/ 1.2 GHz

(TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional)). Press [FUNC],

[CALL/ C.IN] to write a new Call Channel to the

memory {page 75}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

36 35

4041

4234 4339

37 38

#4 QUICK MEMO keys

Controls the Quick Memory function {page 64}.

•MR key

Press to recall data from the Quick Memory

{page 65}.

•M.IN key

Press to write data into the Quick Memory

{page 64}.

#5 SATL key

Press to activate Satellite communication mode

{page 53}.

#6 Frequency control keys

These keys control functions related to selecting a

frequency, a VFO, or a memory channel.

•A/B / M/S key

Press to select either VFO A or VFO B {page 18}.

In Satellite mode, press to swap the MAIN and

SUB frequencies so that you can change the

frequencies with a Tuning control {page 54}.

•SPLIT/ REV key

Press to use split-frequency operation which

allows you to use different transmit and receive

frequencies {page 31}. In Satellite mode, press to

toggle the Trace Reverse function ON and OFF

{page 54}.

•VFO/M / VFO/CH key

Press to select either Memory or VFO mode

{page 59}. In Satellite mode, press to toggle the

VFO and memory channel operations {page 54}.

•A=B/ TRACE key

Press to copy the data in the currently selected

VFO to the other VFO {page 31}. In Satellite

mode, press to toggle the TRACE function ON and

OFF {page 54}.

#7 Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL key

Press to transfer data from a memory channel to a

VFO {page 61}. Press [FUNC], [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL]

to enter Memory Group Select mode {page 64}.

#8 M.IN key

Writes data into a memory channel {page 58} or

selects Memory Scroll mode {page 60}.

#9 RIT/ CW TUNE key

Press to switch the Receive Incremental Tuning

function ON or OFF {page 38}. Press [FUNC],

[RIT/ CW TUNE] to activate the automatic zero-beat

function for CW mode {page 30}.

$0 XIT/ ALT key

Press to switch the Transmit Incremental Tuning

function ON or OFF {page 40}. Press [FUNC],

[XIT/ ALT] to switch the Auto Lock Tuning mode for

the 1.2 GHz band (FM) ON or OFF {page 72}.

$1 CLEAR key

Press to reset the RIT/XIT frequency offset to zero

{pages 38, 40}.

$2 SET/ P.C.T. key

Press to set received DX Packet Cluster frequency

data to the main transceiver when the Packet Cluster

Tune mode is activated. Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.]

to switch the Packet Cluster Tune mode ON or OFF

{page 53}.

$3 TNC Status Indicators

• 9.6k LED

Lights when the internal TNC is operating at

9600 bps. The default operating mode is

1200 bps {page 50}.

• STA LED

Lights when the internal TNC holds the data in the

buffer to transmit.

• CON LED

Lights when the internal TNC is connected to

another TNC.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CALL

C.IN

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

SUB

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BC MAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN M VFO M.IN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C .T

HF/VHF/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SATL

A/B

VFO/M

SPLIT

A=B

474654 55 4445

5352 51504948

$4 RIT/SUB control

After switching the RIT or XIT function ON, turn this

control to select the desired frequency offset

{pages 38, 40}.

Turn to adjust the sub-receiver frequency when the

RIT and XIT functions are switched OFF and the sub-

receiver is switched ON {page 45}.

$5 MANUAL BC control

Turn to adjust the audio notch frequency while the

DSP beat cancel function is set to the manual

frequency adjustment mode {page 56}.

$6 MAIN RF GAIN control

Turn to adjust the radio frequency gain for the main

transceiver {page 18}.

$7 MULTI/ CH control

In VFO mode, rotate to step the operating frequency

up or down {page 37}. In memory channel mode,

rotate to select a memory channel {page 58}. Also

used for selecting Menu numbers when accessing the

Menu mode {page 21} and as a selector to choose

settings for various functions activated by front panel

buttons. The MULTI/ CH LED lights when the

setting(s) can be changed using the MULTI/ CH

control.

$8 MAIN SQL control

Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, the head

phones and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN

connector) when no receive signal is present on the

main transceiver {page 19}.

$9 MAIN AF control

Turn to adjust the volume on the main transceiver

{page 19}.

%0 SUB SQL control

Used for muting (“squelching”) the speaker, head

phone and AF output on ACC2 (13-pin DIN

connector) when no receive signal is present on the

sub-receiver {page 46}.

%1 SUB AF control

Press to switch the sub-receiver ON or OFF. When it

is ON, the SUB-receiver LED lights orange.

Turn to adjust the volume for the sub-receiver.

%2 LO/ WIDTH control

Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/

decrease the value for the low cut-off DSP filter

frequency or the filter bandwidth (CW/ FSK). The

selected value appears on the main dot-matrix

display {page 55}.

%3 HI/ SHIFT control

Turn clockwise/ counterclockwise to increase/

decrease the value for the high cut-off DSP filter

frequency or the Shift frequency. The selected value

appears on the sub dot-matrix display {page 55}.

%4 MAIN band LED

Lights green while the main transceiver’s squelch is

open. Lights red while transmitting on the main

transceiver’s VFO band.

%5 SUB band LED

Lights green while the sub-receiver’s squelch is open.

Lights red while transmitting on the sub-receiver’s

VFO band.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

REAR PANEL

EXT. SP2

8Ω

PANELCOM

ANT 2 ANT 1

ANT

144

AT ANT 1.2G

13.8V

ANT

430

EXT. SP1

8ΩACC2

EXT. CONT

REMOTE

RX ANT

PADDLE

KEY

GND

2 1

10 12 13 14 1511

32 4 5 86

qANT 1 and ANT 2 connectors

Connect your primary HF/ 50 MHz antenna to ANT 1. If

you are using 2 antennas for the HF/ 50 MHz band,

connect the secondary antenna to the ANT 2 connector.

wGND post

Connect a heavy gauge wire or copper strap between

the ground post and the nearest earth ground {page 1}.

eKEY and PADDLE jacks

The PADDLE jack mates with a 6.3 mm (1/4")

3-conductor plug for connecting a keyer paddle to the

internal electronic keyer. The KEY jack mates with a

3.5 mm (1/8") 2-conductor plug for connecting an

external key for CW operation. Read “Keys for CW

(PANEL and KEY)” {page 3} before using these jacks.

rAT connector

Mates with the connector on the cable supplied with

the external antenna tuner. Refer to the instruction

manual supplied with the tuner for more information.

tANT 144

Connect your 144 MHz band antenna to this connector.

yANT 430

Connect your 430/ 440 MHz band antenna to this

connector.

uANT 1.2G (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional)

Connect your 1.2 GHz band antenna to this connector.

iDC 13.8V power input connector

Connect a 13.8 V DC power source to this connector

{page 2}. Use the cable supplied with the regulated

DC power supply.

oCOM connector

Mates with a 9-pin female RS-232C connector for

connecting a computer via one of its serial

communication ports {page 93}. Also used with the

Quick Data Transfer function {page 93}.

!0 PANEL connector

Connect a cable from the optional separate remote

panel (RC-2000) to this connector.

!1 EXT.SP1 and EXT.SP2 jacks

Mate with a 3.5 mm (1/8"), 2-conductor (mono) plugs

for connecting external speakers {pages 3, 78}.

!2 EXT.CONT connector

Connect your 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz or

1.2 GHz linear amplifier control cable to this

connector {page 76}.

!3 ACC2 connector

Mates with a 13-pin male DIN connector for

connecting various accessory equipment, such as an

external TNC/ MCP or a RTTY terminal {page 94}.

!4 REMOTE connector

Mates with a 7-pin male DIN connector for connecting

an HF linear amplifier {page 76}. Do not connect

50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2 GHz linear

amplifier controls to this connector; use the

EXT.CONT connector instead.

!5 HF RX ANT connector

Connect a separate receive-only antenna for HF low

bands to this jack (RCA connector) {page 76}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

DISPLAY

2 4

93 5

11 13 15

12 14 16

qMETER

While receiving, serves as an S-meter to measure

and display the received signal strength. It also

displays the filter width. While transmitting, serves as

a power meter plus an ALC meter, an SWR meter, or

a Speech Processor compression meter. The Peak

Hold function holds each reading for approximately

half a second.

Note: SWR meter works only for the HF and 50 MHz bands.

Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or

an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz

band reception.

eAT

Appears while the internal antenna tuner {page 72} or

an external antenna tuner is in-line for the HF/ 50 MHz

band transmission.

Appears while HF RX ANT {page 76} connector is

enabled to receive HF band signals. You cannot

transmit the signals though this connector.

Either “ ” or “ ” appears, depending on

whether the Antenna 1 connector or the Antenna 2

connector is selected for the HF/ 50 MHz band

{page 72}.

yMHz

Appears when the MHz Up/ Down mode using the

MULTI/ CH control is switched ON {page 37}.

uALT

Appears when ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) is activated for

the 1.2 GHz (FM) band {page 72}.

Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is

being used {page 59}.

Shows the memory channel number for the main

transceiver. If you select a channel over 99, a

leading digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number

ranges from 00 to 299). It also shows the Quick

Memory number location (the Quick Memory number

ranges from “0_” to “9_”).

!0 AUTO

Appears when Auto mode selection is activated

{page 73}.

Appears when the main transceiver is selected for the

transmission band.

Appears when the main transceiver’s functions can

be controlled using the front panel keys.

!3 ATT

Appears when the main transceiver’s receiver

attenuator (approx. 12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.

!4 TNC

Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the

main transceiver {page 49}.

!5 PRE

Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the main

transceiver is ON {page 57}.

!6 + =

“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is

selected for the main transceiver. “=” appears when

the –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz)

offset is selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

3331 3234

2117 19 23 25 282726 29

302218 2420

!7 DCS

Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the

main transceiver is ON {page 36}.

!8 [R]

“R” appears when the Reverse function of the main

transceiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC

(Automatic Simplex Check) of the main transceiver is

activated {page 34}.

!9 C T

“T” appears when the Tone function of the main

transceiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of

the main transceiver is ON {page 35}.

@0 AGC

Appears when the AGC (Automatic Gain Control) of

the main transceiver is ON {page 38}. Disappears

when the AGC is OFF.

@1 M.B.C.

“B.C.” appears when the automatic Beat Canceller is

ON. “M.B.C.” appears when the single Beat Cancel

frequency is manually controlled {page 56}.

@2 NB

Appears when the Noise Blanker is ON {page 57}.

@3 FINE

Appears when the Fine function for the main Tuning

control is ON {page 38}.

@4 A.NOTCH

Appears when the DSP Auto Notch function of the

main transceiver is ON {page 56}.

“” or “ ” appears, depending on whether

DSP Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced method) or

Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC method) of the main

transceiver is selected {page 56}.

“” appears when the TX Equalizer function is ON.

“” appears when the RX Equalizer function of

the main transceiver is ON {pages 41, 78}.

Appears when the Quick Menu function of the

transceiver is ON {page 21}. It also appears when

the frequency point of Program Scan Partially Slowed

is selected on the main-transceiver {page 67}.

“” appears when the Trace function is ON while

in Satellite mode. “ ” appears when the

Reverse Trace function is ON {page 53}.

@9 P.C.T.

Appears when Packet Cluster Tune mode is ON

{page 53}.

#0 SPLIT

Appears when the transmit frequency differs from the

receive frequency {page 31}.

#1 tAs

“tA” or “As” appears while VFO A is selected

{page 18}. “A” appears while Menu A is being

accessed {page 21}.

#2 tBs

“tB” or “Bs” appears while VFO B is selected

{page 18}. “B” appears while Menu B is being

accessed {page 21}.

#3 tMs

“tM” or “Ms” appears while a simplex memory

channel is selected {page 59}. “tMs” appears

while a split frequency memory channel is selected

{page 60}.

“” appears when the Frequency Lock function is

ON. “ ” appears when the Lock All key function

is ON {page 77}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

57 55 5842 45 49 48 56

38 40 43 534635 51

39 41 47 5452443637 50

Appears while in Satellite mode {page 53}.

Appears while Memory Recall or Memory Scroll is

being used for the sub-receiver {page 59}.

Shows the memory channel number for the sub-

receiver. If you select a channel over 99, a leading

digit (1 or 2) appears (the memory number ranges

from 00 to 299).

Appears when the sub-receiver is selected for the

transmission band.

Appears when the sub-receiver’s functions can be

controlled using the front panel keys.

$0 ATT

Appears when the sub-receiver’s receive attenuator

(approx. 12 dB) is ON {pages 57, 73}.

$1 TNC

Appears when the internal TNC is assigned to the

sub-receiver.

$2 XIT

Appears when Transmit Incremental Tuning of the

main transceiver is ON {page 40}.

$3 PRE

Appears when the receiver pre-amplifier of the sub-

receiver is ON {page 57}.

$4 + =

“+” or “–” appears, indicating which offset direction is

selected for the sub-receiver. “=” appears when the

–7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or –6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset is

selected (all E-types only) {page 32}.

$5 RIT

Appears when Receive Incremental Tuning of the

main transceiver is ON {page 38}.

$6 DCS

Appears when the DCS (Digital Code Squelch) of the

sub-receiver is ON {page 36}.

$7 [R]

“R” appears when the Reverse function of the sub-

receiver is ON. “[R]” appears when the ASC

(Automatic Simplex Check) of the sub-receiver is

activated {page 34}.

$8 S

Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the

signal strength level {page 46}.

$9 PWR

Appears when the sub-receiver meter shows the

output power level {page 20}.

Serves as an S-meter to measure and display the

received signal strength for the sub-receiver. It also

displays the relative output power when the sub-band

is selected for the transmission.

%1 C T

“T” appears when the Tone function of the sub-

receiver is ON {page 33}. “C T” appears when the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS) of

the sub-receiver is ON {page 35}.

Appears when the DSP Noise Reduction 1 of the sub-

receiver is activated {page 56}.

%3 PKT

Appears when the internal TNC is operating in Packet

mode {page 49}.

4 GETTING ACQUAINTED

%4 PC

Appears when the TS-2000(X) is being controlled by

a PC {page 81}.

The main transceiver operating frequency display.

When the sub-receiver is switched ON, it shows the

receive frequency for the sub-receiver. However, if

you are controlling the main transceiver functions,

such as RIT, XIT, or SPLIT, it is used to display the

frequency information for these functions {page 45}.

%7 MAIN dot-matrix display

In the normal operating mode, it displays the

operating mode for the main transceiver. It is also

used to display various control information, such as

menu numbers and settings and the DSP filter

configuration.

%8 SUB dot-matrix display

In the normal operating mode, it displays the

operating mode for the sub-receiver. It is also used

to display various control information, such as menu

information and the DSP filter frequency

configuration.

MICROPHONE

PTT

DWN UP

qUP/ DWN keys

Use these keys to step the VFO frequency, memory

channels, or Menu selections up and down. Press

and hold these keys to continuously change the

settings.

wPTT (Push-to-Talk) switch

The transceiver is placed in transmit mode when this

non-locking switch is held down. Releasing the

switch returns the transceiver to receive mode.

OPERATING BASICS

SWITCHING POWER ON/OFF

1Switch the DC power supply ON.

2Press and hold [ ] (POWER) briefly to switch

the transceiver ON.

• Do not press the switch for more than

approximately 2 seconds; the transceiver will

be switched OFF.

• Upon power up, “HELLO” appears, followed by

the selected frequency and other indicators.

F LOCK A

SEND AT

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

3To switch the transceiver OFF, press [ ]

(POWER) again.

4Switch the DC power supply OFF.

• You may skip step 3. After switching the

transceiver ON, you can switch it OFF or ON

using only the power switch of the DC power

supply. The transceiver stores the information

of the POWER switch position when the DC

power source is switched OFF.

ADJUSTING VOLUME

AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN

Turn the MAIN AF control clockwise to increase the

audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the

level.

MAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SQL

Note:

◆

The position of the MAIN AF control does not affect the volume

of beeps caused by pressing keys nor the CW transmit sidetone.

The audio level for Packet operation is also independent of the

MAIN AF control setting.

◆

When the optional RC-2000 is installed, you can control the

volume with the AF controls on both the transceiver and the

RC-2000. However, when turning the transceiver on, the volume

settings of the RC-2000 have priority.

RADIO FREQUENCY (RF) GAIN

Set the MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise. You

may turn it counterclockwise slightly when you have

trouble hearing the desired signal because of

excessive atmospheric noise or interference from

other stations. First take note of the peak S-meter

reading of the desired signal. Then turn the MAIN RF

GAIN control counterclockwise until the S-meter

reads the peak value that you noted. Signals that are

weaker than this level will be attenuated and

reception of the station will become easier.

MANUAL

BC MAIN

GAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

Depending on the type and gain of your antenna, and

the condition of the band, you may also prefer leaving

the MAIN RF GAIN control turned counterclockwise

by the same amount rather than turning it fully

clockwise. When using FM mode, always set the

MAIN RF GAIN control fully clockwise.

SELECTING VFO A OR VFO B

2 VFOs are available for controlling the frequency on

the main transceiver. Each VFO, VFO A and VFO B,

works independently so that a different frequency and

mode can be selected. When SPLIT operation is

activated, VFO A is used for reception and VFO B is

used for transmission. The opposite combination is

also possible.

Press [A/B] to toggle between VFO A and VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to indicate which VFO is

selected.

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SELECTING A BAND

Press [+]/ [–] to select your desired band.

• Holding down either key changes the bands

continuously.

MAIN

SUB

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

5 OPERATING BASICS

SELECTING A MODE

Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], [CW/ FSK/ REV], or

[FM/ AM/ NAR]. To select the second mode on each

key, press the same key again. For example, each

press of [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] toggles between LSB

and USB mode.

AUTO

NAR

REV

LSB

USB

FSK

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

Press [FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to toggle the

Auto Mode selection. When it is active, “AUTO”

appears. If you change the frequency above or

below 9.5 MHz, the transceiver automatically

switches modes; LSB for frequencies under 9.5 MHz

and USB for frequencies equal to or above 9.5 MHz

(HF/ 50 MHz band). As for the 144 MHz,

430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands, the transceiver

automatically changes the operating mode to FM.

You can further add the frequency table data to

change the mode automatically

{page 73}.

ADJUSTING SQUELCH

The purpose of the Squelch is to mute the speaker

when no signals are present. With the squelch level

correctly set, you will hear sound only while actually

receiving signals. The higher the selected squelch

level, the stronger the signals must be to receive.

The appropriate squelch level depends on the

ambient RF noise conditions.

Turn the MAIN SQL control, when there are no

signals present, to select the squelch level at which

the background noise is just eliminated; the MAIN

band LED will turn off. Many ham operators prefer

leaving the MAIN SQL control fully counterclockwise

unless operating on a full-carrier mode such as FM.

The squelch level for the main transceiver is preset

at the factory to approximately 9 o’clock for FM and

11 o’clock for SSB and AM.

MAIN

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SQL

SELECTING A FREQUENCY

Turn the Tuning control clockwise or press Mic [UP]

to increase the frequency. Turn the Tuning control

counterclockwise or press Mic [DWN] to decrease the

frequency.

SEL

1MHz CTRL

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

You may prefer directly entering a frequency using

the numeric keypad if the desired frequency is far

from the current frequency. Press [ENT], then press

the numeric keys as necessary. For details, see

“Direct Frequency Entry” {page 37}.

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

This transceiver provides many other methods for

quickly selecting a frequency. For further information,

see “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.

FRONT PANEL METER

The multi-function meter measures the parameters in

the table below. The S-meter and FILTER scales

appear when the main transceiver is in receive mode,

and the PWR meter appears when it is in transmit

mode. Each press of [5/ METER] switches among

the ALC, SWR, and COMP meters. Peak readings

for the S-meter, ALC, SWR, COMP, and PWR

functions are held momentarily.

reteM ?derusaeMsItahW

SslangisdeviecerfohtgnertS

RWP rewoptuptuotimsnarT

CLA sutatslortnoclevelcitamotuA

RWS oitarevawgnidnatsmetsysannetnA

PMOC gnisunehwlevelnoisserpmochceepS }04egap{rossecorPhceepSeht

RETLIF htdiwretlifPSD

Note:

◆

The COMP meter functions only when the Speech Processor is

ON for SSB, FM, or AM mode.

◆

The PWR indicator shows the output power level as a

percentage on the 1.2 GHz band.

◆

The SWR meter works only for ANT 1 and ANT 2 (HF/ 50 MHz

band).

◆

Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.

5 OPERATING BASICS

TRANSMITTING

For voice communications, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone

in your normal tone of voice. When you finish

speaking, press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].

To transmit CW, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the

Break-in function ON, then close the key or keyer

paddle. Connect a key or keyer paddle {pages 3, 39},

then select CW mode.

F LOCK A

SEND AT

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATT PRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

For a detailed explanation on transmitting, see

“BASIC COMMUNICATIONS”, beginning on page 28.

Note: When using AM, CW, or FSK mode, you may adjust the

carrier level. In general, adjust the level so that the ALC meter reads

within the limits of the ALC zone. For the adjustment procedures,

refer to the instructions for each mode in “TRANSMISSION”

{pages 28, 29, 30}.

SELECTING TRANSMIT POWER

It is wise to select a lower transmit power if

communication is still reliable. This lowers the risk of

interfering with others on the band. When operating

from battery power, selecting a lower transmit power

allows you more operating time before a charge is

necessary. This transceiver allows you to change the

transmit power even while transmitting.

1Press [PWR/ TX MONI].

• The current transmit power appears.

CAR

MIC

TX MONI

PWR

DELAY

KEY

F LOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to

reduce the power or clockwise to increase the

power.

MULTI

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

• The selectable range differs, depending on the

current band and mode.

3Press [PWR/ TX MONI] to complete the setting.

Note: You may access Menu No. 23, “FINE TRANSMIT POWER

TUNING”, and select “ON” (press [+]) to change the step size from

5 W to 1 W {page 79}.

MICROPHONE GAIN

The microphone gain must be adjusted when SSB

or AM mode is used without speech processing

{pages 28, 29}.

1Press [MIC/ CAR].

• The current microphone gain level appears.

The default is 50; the range is from 0 to 100.

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY

MIC

PWR

KEY

FLOCK A

CH1/REC

CH2/REC

CH3/REC

TONE/SEL

METER

CTCSS/SEL

NB/LEVEL

AGC/OFF

FINE/STEP

DCS/SEL

SHIFT/OFFSET

ENT

SEND

PHONES

MIC

ANT1/2

PROC

LEVEL

VOX

ATTPRE

LEVEL

MANUAL

LO/

WIDTH

HI/

SHIFT

N.R.

A.N.

B.C.

FUNC

CLR

MAIN

AUTO

CAR

TX MONI

DELAY NAR

REV

MIC

PWR

KEY

LSB

USB

FSK

DISP

SEL

1MHz CTRL

HF/VHE/UHF ALL M

2Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

3SSB: While speaking into the microphone, adjust

the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter

reflects your voice level, but does not exceed the

ALC limit.

AM: While speaking into the microphone, adjust

the MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated

power meter slightly reflects your voice level.

CW, FSK: While transmitting, adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects

the carrier level within the ALC zone.

MULTI

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P. C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

4Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL control setting.

5Press [MIC/ CAR].

For FM mode, access Menu No. 41 {page 28} and

select “LOW”, “MID”, or “HIGH” for the microphone

gain.

Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,

select “HIGH” for the microphone gain. The microphone sensitivity is

low in FM mode. This may cause insufficient modulation. For other

microphones, select either “LOW” or “MID”.

MENU SETUP

WHAT IS A MENU?

Many functions on this transceiver are selected or

configured via a software-controlled Menu, rather

than through the physical controls of the transceiver.

Once familiar with the Menu system, you will

appreciate the versatility it offers. You can customize

the various timings, settings, and programming

functions on this transceiver to meet your needs

without using many controls and switches.

MENU A/ MENU B

This transceiver has two menus: Menu A and

Menu B. These menus contain identical functions

and can be configured independently. The

transceiver, therefore, allows you to switch between

two different environments quickly and easily. For

example, you can configure Menu A for DXing and

contesting while Menu B is for the relaxed local

ragchewing. By switching from Menu A to Menu B,

you can instantly change the Menu configuration and

key assignment to suit your current operating style.

Or, two operators may share a single transceiver by

dedicating one Menu to each operator. Both

operators can always enjoy their own configuration.

MENU ACCESS

1Press [MENU].

• The Menu No. and setting appear on the main

dot-matrix display, and the explanation of the

menu appears on the sub dot-matrix display.

2Press [A/B] to select Menu A or Menu B.

• “A” or “B” appears, indicating which Menu is

selected.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Menu No.

• Each time you change the Menu No.,

a different scrolling message appears on the

sub dot-matrix display, describing the Menu

No.

• You will see “PUSH SUB” if there are sub-

menus in the Menu No. Pressing [SUB] allows

you to select from among the sub-menus.

Press [MAIN] to exit the sub-menu selection.

4Press [+], [–], Mic [UP]/ [DWN] to select a

parameter.

5Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

QUICK MENU

Because the number of functions this transceiver

provides is extraordinary, there are numerous items in

each Menu. If you find accessing desired Menu Nos.

to be too time consuming, use the Quick Menu to

create your own customized, abbreviated Menu. You

can then add those Menu Nos. which you frequently

use, to the Quick Menu. Copying Menu Nos. to the

Quick Menu has no effect on the Menu.

PROGRAMMING THE QUICK MENU

1Press [MENU].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Menu No.

3Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• A star appears, indicating that the Menu item

has been added to the Quick Menu.

• To remove the item from the Quick Menu,

press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] again.

4Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note: You cannot add a sub menu No. to the Quick Menu. Press

[MAIN] to go back to the main menu No., then press

QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to add the menu No. to the Quick Menu.

USING THE QUICK MENU

1Press [MENU].

2Press [1MHz/ SEL].

• “MHz” appears.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Quick Menu No.

4Press [+], [–], Mic [UP]/[DWN] to change the

current setting for the selected Menu No.

5Press [MENU] to exit Quick Menu mode.

Note: If the Quick Menu has not been programmed, turning the

MULTI/ CH control in step 2 causes “CHECK” to be output in Morse

code.

6 MENU SETUP

MENU CONFIGURATION

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR gaPe

rotarepO ecafretnI

00 ssenthgirbyalpsiD mumixam:4,muminim:1,FFO 4ot1/FFO357

10noitanimulliyeKFFO/NONO57

gninuT lortnoC

20noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT0001/005000183

30htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnocFFO/NONO73

40 gnisuybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoReht HC/ITLUM lortnoc FFO/NONO73

50 ehtrofezispetsycneuqerfzHk9 HC/ITLUM dnabtsacdaorbMAehtnoedomMAnilortnoc FFO/NO

eeS ecnerefeR egaP

yromeM lennahC

60lennahCyromeM sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A60noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMFFO/NOFFO06

B60 lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT seicneuqerf FFO/NOFFO06

nacS noitarepO

70dewolsyllaitrapnacsmargorPFFO/NONO76

80 margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS nacs /004/003/002/001 zH005 zH00376

90dlohnacsmargorPFFO/NOFFO86

01dohtememusernacS OT

)detarepO-emiT(

)detarepO-reirraC(

OT86

11egnarnacslausiV 181/19/16/13 slennahc 16

slennahc

rotinoM dnuoS

21 leveltuptuopeeB mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1/FFO447

31 emulovenotedisXT mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1/FFO544

41 emulovkcabyalpA3-URD mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1/FFO498

51 emulovkcabyalp3-SV mumixam:9,muminim:1,FFO 9ot1/FFO419

rekaepS tuptuO

ro2PS.TXErofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA enohpdaeh

2/1/0087

0xiMbuS/niaM:)L(1PS xiMbuS/niaM:)R(2PS

1niaM:)L(1PS buS:)R(2PS

2xiMbuS4/1+niaM:)L(1PS xiMniaM4/1+buS:)R(2PS

71 eht(2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR stuptuooidua)slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeh FFO/NOFFO87

6 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

annetnAXR81rotcennocTNAXRFHehtmorftupninaelbanEFFO/NOFFO67

retem-S hcleuqS

91hcleuqsretem-S sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A91hcleuqsretem-SelbanEFFO/NOFFO87

B91hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaH 005/052/521/FFO sm FFO87

PSD rezilauqE

rezilauqeXRPSD

F/TSOOBH/FFO /TSOOBB/SSAP RESU/NEVNOC FFO ,87 401

:FFOtalF

:TSOOBHtsoobhgiH

:SSAPFssaptnamroF

:TSOOBBtsoobssaB

:NEVNOClanoitnevnoC

:RESU)erawtfosPCRArofdevreseR(talF

rezilauqeXTPSD

F/TSOOBH/FFO /TSOOBB/SSAP RESU/NEVNOC FFO ,14 401

:FFOtalF

:TSOOBHtsoobhgiH

:SSAPFssaptnamroF

:TSOOBBtsoobssaB

:NEVNOClanoitnevnoC

:RESU)erawtfosPCRArofdevreseR(talF

retliFPSD22MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD /8.2/6.2/4.2/2.2/0.2 zHk0.3

zHk4.2

gninuTeniF32gninutrewoptimsnarteniFFFO/NOFFO83

TOT42remittuo-emiT 03/02/01/5/3/FFO setunim FFO87

retrevsnarT52yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarTNO/FFOFFO97

annetnA renuT

62gninutehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXTNO/FFOFFO37

72gniviecerelihwTAenil-nINO/FFOFFO37

raeniL reifilpmA

82lortnocreifilpmaraeniL sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A82dnabFHrofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

B82dnabzHM05rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

C82dnabzHM441rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

D82 zHM044/034rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnab 2/1/FFOFFO67

E82dnabzHG2.1rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL2/1/FFOFFO67

egasseM kcabyalP

92kcabyalpegassemWCdnaecioV sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A92kcabyalpehttaepeRNO/FFOFFO ,4409

B92kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnI sdnoces06ot0 )dnoces1fospetsni( .ces01 ,4409

6 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

03kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeKNO/FFOFFO44

13ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC zH0001ot004 )zH05fospetsni( zH00803

23emitesirWCsm6/4/2/1sm677

33oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC 0.4ot5.2/OTUA )1.0fospetsni( OTUA24

43oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveRNO/FFOFFO24

53edomyekguBNO/FFOFFO34

63edomBSSniXTWCotuANO/FFOFFO44

73WCotBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFNO/FFOFFO44

KSF

83tfihsKSF

zH058/524/002/071

zH07115

93ytiralopgniyekKSFSREVNI/LAMRON

LAMRON

04ycneuqerfenotKSFzH5212/5721

zH5212

14MFrofniagciMHGIH/DIM/WOLWOL02

24MFrofedomenot-buSTNOC/TSRUB

eeS ecnerefer egap

34tesfforetaeperotuANO/FFONO43

44enotzH0571:dlohXTNO/FFOFFO33

FMTD

54snoitcnufFMTD sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A54tcelesyromemrebmunFMTD sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

B54rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTTSAF/WOLSTSAF67

C54rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaP /057/005/052/001 sm0002/0051/0001 sm00567

D54lortnocetomerciMelbanENO/FFOFFO18

CNT

64CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMBUS05

74CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021

spb0021

84dnabgnisnesDCD /DNABCNT BUS&NIAM CNT dnab 05

94edom)enuTretsulCtekcaP(.T.C.P sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A94edomenuTretsulCtekcaPOTUA/LAUNAM

LAUNAM

B94enotnoitamrifnocXRretsulCtekcaPECIOV/ESROM/FFO

ESROM

05noitarugifnoctekcaP sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A05htdiwdnabretliftekcaPNO/FFOFFO05

B05tekcaProfleveltupniFA)1fospetsni(9ot0405

C05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabNIAM)1fospetsni(9ot0405

D05noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabBUS)1fospetsni(9ot0405

E05CNTlanretxE:dnabBUS/NIAMBUS/NIAMNIAM05

F05CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDspb0069/0021

spb0021

6 MENU SETUP

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

syekFP

15tnemngissayekFP sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A15yekFPlenaptnorF

/.R.N/.C.B/.N.A/FFO /zHM1/2/1TNA/BN /RLC/LLAC/LRTC /2HC/3HC/ENIF /ENUTWC/1HC /OFVM/NI.M /M/OFV/B=A/NACS /TILPS/TES-FT/B/A PSD/RMQ/NI.MQ /INOMXR/INOM /1ECIOV/2ECIOV 26-00UNEM

1ECIOV77

B15yek)LLAC(1FPenohporciMA15saemaSB/A77

C15yek)OFV(2FPenohporciMA15saemaSTILPS77

D15yek)RM(3FPenohporciMA15saemaS

M/OFV

E15yek)FP(4FPenohporciMA15saemaS XR INOM 77

evalS/retsaM noitarepo

25 evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS noitarepo NO/FFOFFO08

35 seicneuqerftilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP sOFVtegratehtot NO/FFOFFO08

tibihnIXT45tibihniXTNO/FFOFFO14

tekcaP

55edomnoitacinummoctekcaPNO/FFOFFO94

65deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC /00291/0069/0084 spb00675/00483 0069 spb 05

OPA75noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA 081/021/06/FFO setunim FFO27

0002-CR noitarugifnoC

85edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR2TNOF/1TNOF1TNOF89

95 yalpsidxirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR tsartnoc )1fospetsni(61ot1857

060002-CRrofedomyalpsiD /EVITAGEN EVITISOP

EVITISOP

0002-ST retaepeR snoitcnuF )ylnOepyt-K(

16noitcnufretaepeR sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A16tcelesedomretaepeR /DEKCOL/FFO SSORC FFO88

B16dlohXTretaepeRNO/FFOFFO88

C16edocDIlortnocetomeR999ot00000028

D16 etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA edomlortnoc NO/FFOFFO28

E16lortnocetomerlanretxENO/FFOFFO28

6 MENU SETUP

noitcnuF uneM .oN

RETLIFPSD

rezilauqeXRPSD02

rezilauqeXTPSD12

MAroBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSD22

FMTD

tcelesyromemrebmunFMTDA54

rebmunFMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaPC54

rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTB54

tesfforetaeperotuA34

edomMFrofhcleuqsretem-SelbanEA91

hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaHB91

MFrofniagciM14

MFrofedomenot-buS24

enotzH0571:dlohXT44

KSF

ytiralopgniyekKSF93

tfihsKSF83

ycneuqerfenotKSF04

DCL

ssenthgirbyalpsiD00

noitanimulliyeK10

xirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR tsartnocyalpsid 95

NOITCNUFYROMEM

noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMA60

lennahcyromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT seicneuqerf B60

noitcnuF uneM .oN

REIFILPMA

dnabFHrofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniLA82

dnabzHM05rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniLB82

zHM441rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnab C82

rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHM044/034 D82

dnabzHG2.1rofyalerlortnocreifilpmaraeniLE82

ANNETNA

TNAXRFHehtmorftupninaelbanE rotcennoc 81

RENUTANNETNA

gniviecerelihwTAenil-nI72

gninutehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXT62

NOITCNUFPEEB

leveltuptuopeeB21

edomBSSniXTWCotuA63

edomyekguB53

oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWC33

emitesirWC23

ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC13

otBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFWC 73

kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeK03

oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveR43

REFSNARTATAD

tilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP .sOFVtegratehtotseicneuqerf 35

evals/retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS noitarepo 25

puorG

uneM .oN

noitcnuF snoitceleS tluafeD .feR egaP

ykS +IIdnammoC )ylnOepyt-K(

26noitarugifnoc+IIdnammoCykS sseccaotBUSsserP unem-buseht ––

A26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoC ehtrofngisllacatupnI rednammoC ON LLAC 38

B26+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarT ehtrofngisllacatupnI retropsnarT ON LLAC 38

C26ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykSsenotSSCTC83

zH5.88

D26deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSspb0069/0021 0021 spb 38

E26edom+IIdnammoCykS /TNEILC/FFO /DNAMMOC RETROP-T FFO38

ALPHABETICAL FUNCTION LIST

6 MENU SETUP

noitcnuF uneM .oN

CNT

tekcaProfleveltupniFAB05

deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC65

CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataDF05

CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataD74

dnabgnisnesDCD84

tekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabniaM noitarepo C05

CNTlanretxE:dnabBUS/NIAME05

CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAM64

edomnoitacinummoctekcaP55

htdiwdnabretliftekcaPA05

enotnoitamrifnocXRretsulCtekcaPB94

edomenuTretsulCtekcaPA94

noitarepotekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabbuSD05

LORTNOCNOISSIMSNART

remiTtuo-emiT42

tibihniXT45

RETREVSNART

yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarT52

LORTNOCGNINUT

otBSSgnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerFWC 73

ehtrofezispetsycneuqerfzHk9 HC/ITLUM tsacdaorbMAehtnoedomMAnilortnoc dnab 50

ybdegnahcseicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoR ehtgnisu HC/ITLUM lortnoc 40

noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT20

htiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnoc30

LORTNOCEMULOV

leveltuptuopeeB21

emulovkcabyalpA3-URD41

emulovenotedisXT31

emulovkcabyalp3-SV51

noitcnuF uneM .oN

KCABYALPEGASSEM

kcabyalpehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnIB92

kcabyalpehttaepeRA92

SYEKFP

yekFPlenaptnorFA15

yek)LLAC(1FPenohporciMB15

yek)OFV(2FPenohporciMC15

yek)RM(3FPenohporciMD15

yek)FP(4FPenohporciME15

LORTNOCREWOP

gninutrewoptimsnarteniF32

FFO/NOREWOP

noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPA75

LORTNOCETOMER

lortnocetomerciMelbanED54

0002-CRrofedomyalpsiD06

edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR85

xirtam-tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR tsartnocyalpsid 95

RETAEPER

etomerlanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA edomlortnoc D16

lortnocetomerlanretxEE16

edocDIlortnocetomeRC16

tcelesedomretaepeRA16

dlohXTretaepeRB16

NACS

dlohnacsmargorP90

dewolsyllaitrapnacsmargorP70

margorPehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS nacs 80

dohtememusernacS01

egnarnacslausiV11

+IIDNAMMOCYKS

+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacrednammoCA26

deepsnoitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykSD26

edom+IIdnammoCykSE26

ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykSC26

+IIdnammoCykSrofngisllacretropsnarTB26

REKAEPS

ro2PS.TXErofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA enohpdaeh 61

eht(2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR stuptuooidua)slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeh 71

BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

SSB TRANSMISSION

SSB is the most commonly-used mode on the HF

Amateur bands. Compared with other voice modes,

SSB requires only a narrow bandwidth for

communications. SSB also allows long distance

communications with minimum transmit power.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] to select either lower or

upper sideband mode.

• “LSB” or “USB” appears to show which

sideband is selected.

3Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone

Gain Adjust.

• The current gain level appears.

4Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

5Speak into the microphone and adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reflects

your voice level but does not exceed the ALC limit.

• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.

Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You may want to use the Speech Processor.

Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}

for details.

6Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

7Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for information on additional useful

operation functions.

FM TRANSMISSION

FM is a common mode for communicating on VHF or

UHF frequencies. Many amateur radio operators use

their portable radios and mobile transceivers in FM

mode. You can also utilize repeaters to reach your

friends when they are outside your antenna

coverage. Although FM requires a wider bandwidth

when compared to SSB or AM mode, it has the finest

audio quality among these modes. When combined

with the full-quieting aspect of FM signals, which

suppress background noise on the frequency, FM can

be the best method for maintaining regular schedules

with your local friends.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

3Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

4Speak into the microphone in your normal tone

and level of voice.

• Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You can switch the Microphone Gain for FM

between “LOW”, “MID”, and “HIGH” by using

Menu No. 41. “LOW” is usually appropriate;

however, select high if other stations report that

your modulation is weak. The MULTI/ CH

control has no effect in FM mode.

5Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for additional information on useful

operation functions.

Note: Microphone gain adjustment for SSB or AM has no effect in

FM mode. In FM mode, you must select “LOW”, “MID” or “HIGH” in

Menu No. 41.

7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

AM TRANSMISSION

Each mode used on the HF Amateur bands has its

own advantages. Although long distance DX

contacts may be less common while using AM, the

superior audio quality characteristic of AM operation

is one reason why some hams prefer this mode.

When looking for others operating on AM, check the

following frequencies first:

3885 kHz, 7290 kHz, 14286 kHz, 21390 kHz, and

29000 ~ 29200 kHz

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select an operating frequency.

2Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode.

• “AM” appears.

3Press [MIC/ CAR] to activate the Microphone

Gain Adjust.

• The current gain level appears.

4Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “VOX” {page 39} for information on

automatic TX/RX switching.

5Speak into the microphone and adjust the

MULTI/ CH control so that the calibrated power

meter slightly reflects your voice level.

• Speak in your normal tone and level of voice.

Speaking too close to the microphone or too

loudly may increase distortion and reduce

intelligibility at the receiving end.

• You may want to use the Speech Processor.

Refer to “SPEECH PROCESSOR” {page 40}

for details.

6Press [SEND] or release Mic [PTT] to return to

receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

7Press [MIC/ CAR] to quit the Microphone Gain

Adjust.

Refer to “COMMUNICATING AIDS”, beginning on

page 37, for information on additional useful

operation functions.

Note: If necessary, adjust the carrier level before speaking into the

microphone. Press [FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment

mode. While transmitting only carrier signals, turn the MULTI/ CH

control so that the ALC meter just begins to indicate. Press [FUNC],

[MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM

When operating in FM mode, you can select wide or

narrow bandwidth operation. The table below shows

the RX IF filter bandwidth and TX deviation

combination for each operating mode. The

bandwidth selection is crucial to avoid audio distortion

or insufficient intelligibility that the other station will

encounter.

edoM retliFFIXR noitaiveDXT

MFediWediW

NMFworraN

worraN

1K-type: Main transceiver only.

All E-types: Main transceiver and sub-receiver.

1Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

2Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the

selection between Wide and Narrow.

• “FM” or “FMN” appears to indicate which

bandwidth is selected.

NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR AM

When receiving AM on the main transceiver, you can

further decrease the bandwidth to eliminate

interference. However, the TX deviation of AM is not

affected by this selection.

1Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select AM mode on the

main transceiver.

2Press [FUNC], [FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the

selection between Normal and Narrow.

• “AM” or “AMN” appears to indicate which IF

bandwidth is selected for the main transceiver.

7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS

CW TRANSMISSION

CW operators know that this mode is very reliable

when communicating under worst conditions. It may

be true that newer digital modes rival CW as being

equally as useful in poor conditions. These modes,

however, do not have the long history of service nor

the simplicity that CW provides.

This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that

supports a variety of functions. For details on using

these functions, refer to “ELECTRONIC KEYER”

{page 42}.

If necessary, refer to “OPERATING BASICS”,

beginning on page 18, for details on how to receive.

1Select the operating frequency.

2Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

• To precisely tune in another station, use Auto

Zero-beat. Refer to “AUTO ZERO-BEAT”

{below}.

3Press [SEND].

• The MAIN band LED lights red.

• Refer to “CW BREAK-IN” {page 42} for

information on automatic TX/ RX switching.

4Begin sending.

• As you transmit, you should hear a sidetone

that lets you monitor your own transmission.

Refer to “TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH

FREQUENCY” {below}.

5Press [SEND] to return to receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED lights green or turns off,

depending on the MAIN SQL setting.

Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press

[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With the key

down, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads within

the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit. Press

[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] again to complete the adjustment.

AUTO ZERO-BEAT

Use Auto Zero-beat before transmitting to tune in a

CW station. Auto Zero-beat automatically and exactly

matches your transmit frequency with the station you

are receiving. Neglecting to do this will reduce your

chances of being heard by the other station.

1Press [FUNC], [RIT/ CW TUNE] to start Auto

Zero-beat.

• “CW TUNE” appears.

• Your transmit frequency automatically changes

so that the pitch of the received signal exactly

matches the TX sidetone/ RX pitch frequency

that you have selected. Refer to “TX

SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY” {below}.

• When matching is completed, “CW TUNE”

disappears.

• If matching is unsuccessful, the previous

frequency is restored.

2To quit Auto Zero-beat, press [FUNC],

[RIT/ CW TUNE] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

You cannot start Auto Zero-beat if you have selected 1.0 kHz or

wider for the DSP filter bandwidth.

◆

When using Auto Zero-beat, the matching error is within

50 Hz

in most cases.

◆

Auto Zero-beat may fail if the keying speed of the target station is

too slow or when some interference is present.

◆

When RIT function is ON, only RIT frequencies change to make

the Auto Zero-beat adjustment.

TX SIDETONE/ RX PITCH FREQUENCY

As you send CW, you will hear tones from the

transceiver speaker. These are called transmit (TX)

sidetones. Listening to these tones, you can monitor

what you are transmitting. You may also use the

tones to ensure that your key contacts are closing,

the keyer is functioning, or to practice sending without

actually putting a signal on the air.

Receive pitch refers to the frequency of CW that you

hear after tuning in a CW station.

On this transceiver, the frequency of the sidetone and

receive pitch are equal and selectable. Access Menu

No. 31 to select the frequency that is most

comfortable for you. The selectable range is from

400 Hz to 1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz.

To change the volume of the TX sidetone, access

Menu No. 13. The selections range from 1 to 9 and

OFF.

Note: The position of the MAIN AF and SUB AF controls do not

affect the volume of the TX sidetone.

ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

SPLIT-FREQUENCY OPERATION

Usually you can communicate with other stations

using a single frequency for receiving and

transmitting. In this case, you select only one

frequency on either VFO A or VFO B. However, there

are cases where you must select one frequency for

receiving and a different frequency for transmitting.

This requires the use of two VFOs. This is referred to

as “split-frequency operation”. One typical case

which requires this type of operation is when you use

an FM repeater {page 32}. Another typical case is

when you call a rare DX station.

When a rare or desirable DX station is heard, that

operator may immediately get many simultaneous

responses. Often, such a station is lost under the

noise and confusion of many calling stations. If you

find that you are suddenly being called by many

operators, it is your responsibility to control the

situation. You may announce that you will be “listening

up 5 (kHz, from your present transmit frequency)”, or

“listening down between 5 and 10 (kHz)”.

1Press [MAIN], [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B on

the main transceiver.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select an operating frequency.

• The frequency selected at this point will be

used for transmitting.

• To copy the selected VFO frequency to the

other VFO, press [A=B].

3Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.

4Select an operating frequency.

• The frequency selected on this VFO will be

used for receiving.

5Press [SPLIT].

• “SPLIT” appears.

• Each press of [A/B] reverses the receive and

transmit frequencies.

6To quit split-frequency operation, press [SPLIT]

again.

• “SPLIT” disappears.

If you access Menu No. 06A and select “ON”, you can

recall a memory channel to use for either receiving or

transmitting. For more information, refer to “Memory-

VFO Split Operation” {page 60} under “MEMORY

FEATURES”.

Note: You cannot perform SPLIT operation on the sub-receiver; it

has only one VFO.

TF-SET (TRANSMIT FREQUENCY SET)

TF-SET allows you to temporarily switch your transmit

frequency and receive frequency. Canceling this

function immediately restores the original transmit and

receive frequencies. By activating TF-SET, you can

listen on your transmit frequency, and change it while

listening. This allows you to check whether or not the

newly selected transmit frequency is free of

interference.

1Configure split-frequency operation as explained

in the previous section.

2Press and hold [TF-SET].

3While holding down [TF-SET], change the

operating frequency by turning the Tuning control

or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

• The transceiver receives on the frequency that

you select, but the frequency shown on the

sub-display stays unchanged.

4Release [TF-SET].

• You are now receiving again on your original

receive frequency.

Successfully contacting a DX station in a pileup often

depends on making a well-timed call on a clear

frequency. That is, it is important to select a relatively

clear transmit frequency and to transmit at the exact

instant when the DX station is listening but the

majority of the groups aren’t transmitting. Switch

your receive and transmit frequencies by using TF-

SET and listen. You will soon learn the rhythm of the

DX station and the pileup. The more proficient you

become at using this function, the more DX stations

you will contact.

Note:

◆

If you press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to lock the operating

frequency before using TF-SET, pressing an incorrect button by

mistake retains the original receive frequency.

◆

TF-SET is disabled while transmitting.

◆

If you have recalled a memory channel (excluding CH 290 to

299), you cannot change the recalled frequency using the

Tuning control.

◆

To enable the Tuning control, access Menu No. 06B and select

“ON”. Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] after recalling a memory

channel changes the memory channels.

◆

An RIT frequency shift is not added; however, an XIT frequency

shift is added to the transmit frequency.

8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

FM REPEATER OPERATION

When using FM mode, you may access a repeater to

enjoy long distance communications. Repeaters,

which are often installed and maintained by radio

clubs, are usually located on mountain tops or other

elevated locations. Generally they operate at higher

ERP (Effective Radiated Power) than a typical

station. This combination of elevation and high ERP

allows communications in FM over much greater

distances than FM communications without using

repeaters.

Most repeaters use a receive and transmit frequency

pair with an offset. In addition, some repeaters must

receive a tone from the transceiver before it allows

access. Repeaters are available on the 29, 50, 144,

430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz bands (TS-2000/

TS-B2000 Optional). For further information,

including repeater frequencies, consult your local

repeater reference.

This transceiver provides the following three methods

for programming two separate frequencies:

• Using the Split-Frequency function {page 31}

• Programming an offset (29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz

and 1.2 GHz bands)

• Storing in a Split-Frequency channel {page 59}

Note:

◆

When programming two separate frequencies using two VFOs,

be sure to select FM mode on both VFOs.

◆

When operating through a repeater, over deviation caused by

speaking too loudly into the microphone can cause your signal to

“talk-off” (break up) through the repeater.

PROGRAMMING AN OFFSET

When using the 29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz or 1.2 GHz

band (TS-2000/ TS-B2000 Optional), selecting a single

frequency and an offset is another method for

programming two separate frequencies. Unlike the

Split-Frequency function, this method requires only a

single VFO.

Note: If you store offset settings in a memory channel, you need not

reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.

■Selecting an Offset Direction

1Select a receive frequency.

2Press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] to switch the offset

direction.

• Select whether the transmit frequency will

be higher (+) or lower (–) than the receive

frequency.

• “+” or “–” appears to indicate which offset

direction is selected.

• To program the –7.6 MHz (430 MHz) or

–6.0 MHz (1.2 GHz) offset on all E-types,

repeatedly press [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] until

“=” appears.

If the offset transmit frequency falls outside the

allowable range, transmitting is inhibited. Use one

of the following methods to bring the transmit

frequency within the band limits:

• Move the receive frequency further inside the

band.

• Change the offset direction.

Note:

◆

You can only change the offset direction while in FM mode.

◆

While using an odd-split memory channel for transmitting,

you cannot change the offset direction.

■Selecting an Offset Frequency

To access a repeater which requires an odd-split

frequency pair, change the offset frequency from

the default which is used by most repeaters. The

default offset frequencies are as follows.

dnaB epyt-K sepyt-EllA

zHM441 ±zHk006

zHM044/034 ±zHM0.5 ±zHM6.1 zHM6.7–

zHG2.1 ±zHM0.21 ±zHM0.53 zHM0.6–

As for the 29 and 50 MHz bands, the default offset

is set to 0 MHz (Simplex). Program the desired

offset frequency for these bands.

1Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate offset frequency.

• The selectable range is from 0.00 MHz to

59.95 MHz in steps of 50 kHz.

3Press [FUNC], [0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] again to

complete the setting.

All E-types only: If you have selected “ =” for the offset

direction, you cannot change the default (–7.6 MHz or –6.0 MHz).

29.520 MHz

88.5 Hz

29.520 MHz

88.5 Hz

29.620 MHz

8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

TRANSMITTING A TONE

Some FM repeaters require the transceiver to

transmit a sub-audible tone to prevent other

repeaters on the same frequency from locking each

other up. The required tone frequency differs among

repeaters. Repeaters also differ in their requirements

for either continuous or burst tones. For the

appropriate selections for your accessible repeaters,

consult your local repeater reference.

After completing the tone settings, pressing [SEND]

or pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes the

transceiver to transmit the selected tone. If you have

selected a 1750 Hz tone, press [4/ TONE/SEL] to

transmit the tone without pressing Mic [PTT].

Note: If you store tone settings in a memory channel, you need not

reprogram each time. Refer to “MEMORY FEATURES” {page 58}.

■Activating the Tone Function

1Confirm that FM mode has been selected on

the VFO(s).

• When using two VFOs, you must select FM

mode on both VFOs.

2Press [4/ TONE/SEL] to switch the Tone

function ON (or OFF).

• “T” appears when the function is ON.

Note:

◆

You cannot use the Tone function with the CTCSS or DCS

functions.

◆

You need to activate the Tone function only when selecting

one of the 38 standard frequencies. The selection you make

here will not affect the transmission of the 1750 Hz tone.

■Selecting a Tone Frequency

1Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].

• The current tone frequency appears. The

default is 88.5 Hz.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate tone frequency.

• The available tone frequencies are listed in

the following table.

3Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL] to complete the

setting.

.oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH(

100.76114.79125.631138.291

209.17210.001223.141235.302

304.47315.301322.641337.012

400.77412.701424.151431.812

507.97519.011527.651537.522

605.28618.411622.261636.332

704.58718.811729.761738.142

805.88810.321828.371833.052

905.19913.721929.971930571

018.49028.131032.681

Note:

◆

Use Nos. 01 to 39 shown in the table above when selecting

tone frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.

◆

You can select a tone frequency independent of a CTCSS

frequency.

■Selecting Continuous or Burst

Access Menu No. 42 to select “Continuous” or

“Burst”. With Continuous selected, the transceiver

sends the tone continuously during the

transmission. With Burst selected, the transceiver

sends a 500 ms tone each time transmission

starts. When using the 144, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2

GHz band, continuous tones are always

transmitted, regardless of the selection.

■Transmitting a 1750 Hz Tone

Most repeaters in Europe require transceivers to

transmit a 1750 Hz tone. With 1750 Hz tone

selected, pressing [4/ TONE/SEL] causes the

transceiver to transmit the 1750 Hz tone.

Releasing the key ceases transmission of the

code. Some repeaters in Europe must receive

continuous signals for a certain period of time,

following a 1750 Hz tone. This transceiver is

capable of remaining in transmit mode for

2 seconds after transmitting the 1750 Hz tone.

Access Menu No. 44 and select “ON”.

8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

AUTOMATIC REPEATER OFFSET

This function automatically selects an offset direction,

according to the frequency that you select on the

144 MHz band. The transceiver is programmed for

offset directions as shown below. To obtain an up-to-

date band plan for repeater offset direction, contact

your national Amateur Radio association.

Access Menu No. 43 and switch the function ON or

OFF. The default is ON.

K-type (U.S.A. and Canada versions)

This complies with the standard ARRL band plan.

All E-types (European versions)

Note:

◆

Automatic Repeater Offset does not function when Reverse is

ON. However, pressing [TF-SET] after Automatic Repeater

Offset has selected an offset (split) status, exchanges the receive

and transmit frequencies.

◆

If you change the offset direction by pressing

[0/ SHIFT/OFFSET] when Automatic Repeater Offset is ON, the

Shift direction on the above figure is applied when you change

the frequencies.

REVERSE FUNCTION

After programming an offset on the 29, 50, 144,

430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz (Optional) band, the

reverse function exchanges a separate receive and

transmit frequency. So, while using a repeater, you

can manually check the strength of a signal that you

receive directly from the other station. If the station’s

signal is strong, both stations should move to a

simplex frequency to free up the repeater.

Press [TF-SET] to switch the Reverse function ON

(or OFF) while the Shift function is active.

• “R” appears when the Reverse function is ON.

Note:

◆

If you press [TF-SET] and try to receive outside the available

receive frequency, the transceiver will not allow you to tune the

frequency. The Reverse function will not operate.

◆

Automatic Repeater Offset does not function while Reverse is

ON.

◆

You cannot switch Reverse ON or OFF while transmitting.

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)

ASC functions only when you have programmed an

offset on the 29, 50, 144, 430/ 440 MHz or 1.2 GHz

(Optional) band. While using a repeater, ASC

periodically monitors the strength of a signal that you

receive directly from the other station. If the station’s

signal is strong enough to allow direct contact without

a repeater, the ASC indicator on the display starts to

blink.

Press and hold [TF-SET] for approximately 1 second

to switch the function ON.

• The “[R]” indicator appears when the function is

ON.

• When direct contact is possible, the “[R]” indicator

blinks.

• To quit the function, press [TF-SET].

Note:

◆

Pressing Mic [PTT] causes the ASC indicator to stop blinking.

◆

ASC does not function if your transmit and receive frequencies

are the same (simplex operation).

◆

ASC does not function while scanning.

◆

Activating ASC while using Reverse switches Reverse OFF.

◆

If you recall a memory channel or the Call channel that has the

Reverse status ON, ASC is switched OFF.

◆

ASC causes received audio to be momentarily intermitted every

3 seconds.

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all tone frequencies to

identify the incoming tone frequency on a received

signal. You can use this function to find which tone

frequency is required by your local repeater.

1Press [FUNC], [4/ TONE/SEL].

• The current tone frequency appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the Tone

Freq. ID.

• “T” blinks and every Tone frequency is

scanned. When the Tone frequency is

identified, the transceiver stops scanning and

the identified frequency is displayed.

• Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume

scanning.

• Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while

the Tone frequency ID scan is active.

+−

−− +S

144.0 145.5 146.4 147.0 147.6

145.1 146.0 146.6 147.4 148.0 MHz

S: Simplex

–

144.0 146.0 MHz145.8145.6

8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

FM CTCSS OPERATION

You may sometimes want to hear calls only from

specific persons. When using FM mode, the

Continuous Tone Coded Squelch System (CTCSS)

allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls from

other persons who are using the same frequency. A

CTCSS tone is sub-audible and is selectable from

among the 38 standard tone frequencies. Select the

same CTCSS tone as the other stations in your

group. You will not hear calls from stations other than

those using the same CTCSS tone.

Note: CTCSS does not cause your conversation to be private. It

only relieves you from listening to unwanted conversations.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select a band.

3Select an operating frequency.

4Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

5Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.

6Press [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to switch the CTCSS

function ON (or OFF).

• “C T” appears when the function is ON.

7Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].

• The current CTCSS frequency appears. The

default CTCSS frequency is 88.5 Hz.

8Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate CTCSS frequency.

• The selectable CTCSS frequencies are listed in

the following table.

9Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL] to complete the

setting.

.oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH( .oN .qerF )zH(

100.76114.79125.631138.291

209.17210.001223.141235.302

304.47315.301322.641337.012

400.77412.701424.151431.812

507.97519.011527.651537.522

605.28618.411622.261636.332

704.58718.811729.761738.142

805.88810.321828.371833.052

905.19913.721929.971

018.49028.131032.681

You will hear calls only when the selected tone is

received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.

Skip steps 7 and 8 if you have already programmed

the appropriate CTCSS frequency.

Note:

◆

When using split-frequency operation, select FM mode on both

VFOs to use CTCSS.

◆

Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table above when selecting

CTCSS frequencies via Wireless Remote Control {page 82}.

◆

You can select a CTCSS frequency independent of a tone

frequency.

◆

You cannot use the CTCSS function with the Tone or DCS

functions.

CTCSS FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all CTCSS frequencies to

identify the incoming CTCSS frequency on a received

signal. You may find this useful when you cannot

recall the CTCSS frequency that the other persons in

your group are using.

1Press [FUNC], [6/ CTCSS/SEL].

• The current CTCSS frequency appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the CTCSS

Freq. ID scan.

• “C T” blinks and every CTCSS tone frequency

is scanned. When the CTCSS frequency is

identified, the transceiver stops scanning and

the identified frequency is displayed.

• Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to resume

scanning.

• Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while

the CTCSS tone frequency ID scan is active.

Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.

8 ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS

FM DCS OPERATION

Digital Code Squelch (DCS) is another FM application

which allows you to ignore (not hear) unwanted calls.

It functions the same way as CTCSS. The only

differences are the encode/ decode method and the

number of selectable codes. For DCS, you can select

from 104 different codes listed in the table below.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

2Select a band.

3Select an operating frequency.

4Press [FM/ AM/ NAR] to select FM mode.

• “FM” appears.

5Turn the SQL control to adjust the squelch.

6Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to switch the DCS function

ON (or OFF).

• “DCS” appears when the function is ON.

7Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].

• The current DCS code appears. The default is

023.

8Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the

appropriate DCS code.

• The available DCS codes are listed in the

following table.

320560231502552133314564216137

520170431212162233324664426237

620270341322362343134305726437

130370541522562643234605136347

230470251622662153544615236457

630411551342172653644325456

340511651442472463254625266

740611261542603563454235466

150221561642113173554645307

350521271152513114264565217

450131471252523214464606327

9Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL] again to complete

the setting.

You will hear calls only when the selected code is

received. To answer the call, press [SEND] or press

and hold Mic [PTT], then speak into the microphone.

Skip steps 7 to 9 if you have already programmed the

appropriate DCS code.

Note: You cannot use DCS with the Tone or CTCSS functions.

DCS CODE ID SCAN

This function scans through all DCS codes to identify

the incoming DCS code on a received signal. You

may find this useful when you cannot recall the DCS

code that the other persons in your group are using.

1Press [FUNC], [•/ DCS/SEL].

• The current DCS code appears.

2Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to activate the DCS Code

ID scan.

•“DCS” blinks and every DCS code is scanned.

When the DCS code is identified, the

transceiver stops scanning and the identified

DCS ID is displayed.

•Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to resume scanning.

•Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to stop scanning while

the DCS code ID scan is active.

Note: Received signals are audible while scanning is in progress.

COMMUNICATING AIDS

RECEIVING

SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY

In addition to turning the Tuning control or pressing

Mic [UP]/ [DWN], there are several other ways to

select your frequency. This section describes

additional methods of frequency selection that may

save you time and effort.

■Direct Frequency Entry

When the desired frequency is far removed from

the current frequency, directly entering a

frequency from the numeric keypad is usually the

fastest method.

1Press [ENT].

• “- - - . - - - . - - ” appears.

2Press the numeric keys ([0] to [9]) to enter

your desired frequency.

• Pressing [ENT] fills the remaining digits (the

digits you did not enter) with 0 and

completes the entry.

• To select 1.85 MHz for example, press [0],

[0], [0], [1], [8], [5], then press [ENT] to

complete the input (7 key strokes).

• To shorten the key strokes, you can also

use [•] as MHz. Press [1], [•] (MHz), [8],

[5], then press [ENT] to complete the input

(5 key strokes).

• Pressing [CLR] cancels the entry and

restores the current VFO frequency.

Note:

◆

You can enter the frequency in the range of 30.00 kHz to

1299.99999 MHz. Refer to the specifications for the

available frequency range.

◆

Attempting to enter a frequency that is outside the

selectable frequency range causes an alarm to sound.

The entered frequency is rejected.

◆

When the entered frequency does not meet the current

VFO frequency step size requirement, the nearest

available frequency is automatically selected (sub-

receiver). The nearest available frequency is

automatically selected after the entered frequency is

changed (main transceiver).

◆

When the 10 Hz digit (last displayed digit) is entered, the

digit 0 is automatically entered for the 1 Hz digit, and

frequency entry is completed. The 1 Hz digit is not

displayed.

◆

When an entered frequency is accepted, RIT or XIT will be

switched OFF, but the RIT or XIT offset frequency is not

cleared.

◆

After recalling memory channels 290 to 299 that have

Start and End frequencies stored, the receive frequency

can be changed by using Direct Frequency Entry within

the programmed range.

■Using 1 MHz Steps

Pressing [+]/ [–] on the front panel changes

Amateur bands. You can also use the MULTI/ CH

control to change the operating frequency in steps

of 1 MHz.

1Press [1MHz/ SEL].

• “MHz” appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control.

• Clockwise increases the frequency, counter-

clockwise decreases the frequency.

3Press [1MHz/ SEL] to exit the function.

• “MHz” disappears.

If you prefer to change the frequency in steps of

100 kHz or 500 kHz steps rather than 1 MHz, press

[FUNC], [1MHz/ SEL] then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select 100 kHz or 500 kHz.

Note: Even if 100 kHz or 500 kHz is selected for the [1MHz/ SEL]

key, the MHz icon appears.

■Quick QSY

To move up or down the frequency quickly, use the

MULTI/ CH control. Turning this control changes

the operating frequency in steps of 5 kHz for SSB/

CW/ FSK and 10 kHz for FM/ AM (below 60 MHz).

• If you want to change the default frequency

step size, press [FUNC], [9/ FINE/STEP].

Select 5 kHz, 6.25 kHz, 10 kHz, 12.5 kHz,

15 kHz, 20 kHz, 25 kHz, 30 kHz, 50 kHz or

100 kHz for FM/ AM, and 1 kHz, 2.5 kHz,

5 kHz, or 10 kHz for the other modes. The

default step size is 5 kHz for SSB/ CW/ FSK/

AM and 10 kHz for FM (below 60 MHz).

• When changing the operating frequency by

using the MULTI/ CH control, frequencies are

rounded such that new frequencies are

multiples of the frequency step size. To cancel

this function, access Menu No. 04 and select

“OFF” (default is ON).

• Within the AM broadcast band, the step size

automatically defaults to the frequency step

value in Menu No. 05. This step size can be

switched between 9 kHz (all E-types: ON) and

5 kHz (K-type: OFF) via Menu No. 05.

Note: The programmed frequency step size for the MULTI/ CH

control is stored independently for the HF/ 50 MHz, 144 MHz,

430/ 440 MHz and 1.2 GHz bands (main transceiver). You can

also set a different frequency step size for SSB, CW, FSK, AM

and FM modes. The sub-receiver also stores the independent

frequency step size for 118 MHz (K-type only), 144 MHz,

300 MHz (K-type only), and 430/ 440 MHz bands. You can also

set a different frequency step size for FM and AM.

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

■Fine Tuning

The default step value when turning the Tuning

control to change the frequency is 10 Hz for SSB,

CW, and FSK modes, and 100 Hz for FM and AM

modes. However, you can change the step size to

1 Hz for SSB, CW, and FSK modes, and 10 Hz for

FM and AM modes.

1Press [9/ FINE/STEP].

• “FINE” appears.

2Turn the Tuning control to select the exact

frequency.

3To quit the function, press [9/ FINE/STEP]

again.

• “FINE” disappears.

Note:

◆

Fine Tuning works only on the main transceiver.

◆

If Menu No. 03 is ON, you cannot perform fine tuning in FM

mode for all bands and AM mode for the 144 MHz/

430/ 440 MHz/ 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 optional) bands.

■Equalizing VFO Frequencies (A=B)

This function allows you to copy the frequency and

modulation mode of the active VFO to the inactive

VFO.

1Select the frequency and mode on VFO A or

VFO B.

2Press [A=B].

• The frequency and mode selected in step 1

are copied to the inactive VFO.

3Press [A/B] to confirm that the frequency was

copied.

RIT (RECEIVE INCREMENTAL TUNING)

RIT provides the ability to change your receive

frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz without

changing your transmit frequency. If the Fine Tuning

([9/ FINE/STEP]) function is ON, the step size

becomes 1 Hz. RIT works equally well with all

modulation modes and while using VFO or Memory

Recall mode.

1Press [RIT/ CW TUNE].

•“RIT” and the RIT offset appear.

2If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the RIT offset

to 0.

3Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your receive

frequency.

4To turn off RIT, press [RIT/ CW TUNE].

• The receive frequency is returned to the

frequency that was selected prior to step 1.

Note:

◆

RIT works only on the main transceiver.

◆

When storing the frequency in a Memory channel with RIT

function ON, RIT offset frequency is added or subtracted to/ from

the VFO frequency. Then the calculated data is stored in the

Memory channel.

AGC (AUTOMATIC GAIN CONTROL)

When using a mode other than FM, AGC selects the

time constant for the automatic gain control circuit.

Selecting a slow time constant will cause the receiver

gain and S-meter readings to react slowly to large

input changes. A fast time constant causes the

receiver gain and the S-meter to react quickly to

changes in the input signal. A fast AGC setting is

particularly useful in the following situations:

• Tuning rapidly

• Receiving weak signals

• Receiving high-speed CW

Unlike other transceivers, the TS-2000’s digital AGC

circuit allows you to adjust the time constant from

slow to fast in 20 steps, where 1 is the slowest and

20 is the fastest. Furthermore, you can switch the

AGC OFF if you desire.

For your convenience, the following default AGC time

constant has already been programmed.

SSB: Level 7 CW: Level 12

FSK: Level 14 AM: Level 5

To change the default time constant:

1Press [8/ AGC/OFF].

• The AGC time constant scale appears on the

sub dot-matrix display.

2To select a slower time constant, turn the

MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise. The bar

indicator moves from F(ast) to S(low). To select

a faster time constant, turn the MULTI/ CH

control clockwise. The bar indicator moves from

S(low) to F(ast).

3If you want to turn the AGC OFF, press [FUNC],

[8/ AGC/OFF].

Note: You cannot adjust the AGC time constant on the sub-receiver.

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

TRANSMITTING

VOX (VOICE-OPERATED TRANSMIT)

VOX eliminates the necessity of manually switching

to the transmit mode each time you want to transmit.

The transceiver automatically switches to transmit

mode when the VOX circuitry senses that you have

begun speaking into the microphone.

When using VOX, develop the habit of pausing

between thoughts to allow the transceiver to drop

back to receive mode briefly. You will then hear if

anybody wants to interrupt, plus you will have a short

period to gather your thoughts before speaking again.

Your listeners will appreciate your consideration as

well as respect your more articulate conversation.

VOX can be switched ON and OFF independently for

CW and the other modes, excluding FSK.

Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to toggle between VOX ON and

OFF.

• The VOX LED lights.

■Microphone Input Level

To enjoy the VOX function, take the time to

properly adjust the gain of the VOX circuit. This

level controls the capability of the VOX circuit to

detect the presence or absence of your voice. In

CW mode, this level cannot be adjusted.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX

function ON.

• The VOX LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The current VOX gain appears on the sub

dot-matrix display.

4While speaking into the microphone using your

normal tone of voice, adjust the setting (default

is 4) using the MULTI/ CH control until the

transceiver reliably switches to transmit mode

each time you speak.

• The selectable gain range is from 0 to 9.

• The setting should not allow background

noise to switch the transceiver to transmit

mode.

Note: The VOX gain level can be adjusted even if VOX is

switched OFF or while you are transmitting.

■Delay Time

If the transceiver returns to receive mode too

quickly after you stop speaking, your final word

may not be transmitted. To avoid this, select an

appropriate delay time that allows all of your

words to be transmitted without an overly long

delay after you stop speaking.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the VOX

function ON.

3Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current setting appears on the sub dot-

matrix display. The default is 50.

4While speaking into the microphone using your

normal tone of voice, adjust the MULTI/ CH

control such that the transceiver switches to

receive mode after you have stopped talking.

• The selectable range is from 5 to 100

(150 ms to 3000 ms) in steps of 5, or OFF.

5Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] to set the VOX

delay.

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

SPEECH PROCESSOR

The Speech Processor levels out large fluctuations in

your voice while you speak. When using SSB, FM, or

AM mode, this leveling action effectively raises the

average transmit output power, resulting in a more

understandable signal. The amount of voice

compression is fully adjustable. You will notice that

using the Speech Processor makes it easier to be

heard by distant stations.

1Select USB, LSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [PROC/ LEVEL] to switch the Speech

Processor ON.

• The PROC LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to enter the

Speech Processor input level adjustment mode.

4As you speak into the microphone, turn the

MULTI/ CH control so that the compression

meter indicates that the compression level is

around 10 dB while you speak.

• Using higher compression will not improve your

signal clarity or apparent signal strength.

Excessively compressed signals are more

difficult to understand due to distortion and are

less pleasant to hear than signals with less

compression.

5Press [FUNC], [PROC/ LEVEL] to exit the Speech

Processor input level adjustment.

6Press [MIC/ CAR] to enter the Speech processor

output level Adjustment.

• As you speak into the microphone, turn the

MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter

reflects according to your voice level but does

not exceed the ALC limit. Press [MIC/ CAR] to

exit when you finish the adjustment.

XIT (TRANSMIT INCREMENTAL TUNING)

Similar to RIT, XIT provides the ability to change your

transmit frequency by ±20.00 kHz in steps of 10 Hz

without changing your receive frequency. If the Fine

Tuning function is ON, the step size is 1 Hz.

1Press [XIT/ ALT].

• “XIT” and the XIT offset appear.

2If required, press [CLEAR] to reset the XIT offset

to 0.

3Turn the RIT/ SUB control to change your transmit

frequency.

4To turn XIT OFF, press [XIT/ ALT].

• The transmit frequency is returned to the

frequency that was selected prior to step 1.

Note:

◆

XIT works only on the main transceiver.

◆

The frequency shift set by the RIT/ SUB control is also used by

the RIT function. Therefore, changing or clearing the XIT offset

also affects the RIT offset.

◆

When the XIT frequency exceeds the limit of available

transmission frequency, the transceiver automatically stops

transmitting.

Transmit power

Time

Speech

Processor

OFF

Speech

Processor

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

CUSTOMIZING TRANSMIT SIGNAL

CHARACTERISTICS

The quality of your transmitted signal is important,

regardless of which on-air activity you pursue.

However, it is easy to be casual and overlook this fact

since you don’t listen to your own signal. The

following sub-sections provide information that will

help you tailor your transmitted signal.

■TX Filter Bandwidth (SSB/ AM)

Use Menu No. 22 to select one of the following

transmit bandwidths: 2.0 kHz, 2.2 kHz, 2.4 kHz

(default), 2.6 kHz, 2.8 kHz, or 3.0 kHz.

htdiwdnaB ycneuqerfdnabssaP

zHk0.2zH0052~005

zHk2.2zH0062~004

zHk4.2zH0072~003

zHk6.2zH0082~002

zHk8.2zH0092~001

zHk0.3zH0003~01

1If the Speech Processor is ON, the low-cut filter is set to 200 Hz

for 2.8 kHz and 3.0 kHz.

■TX Equalizer (SSB/ FM/ AM)

Use Menu No. 21 to change the transmit frequency

characteristics of your signal. You can select from

one of six different transmit profiles including the

default flat response. Selecting any of the following

items from the Menu causes “ ” to appear on

the display.

• Off (OFF):

The default frequency response for SSB, FM,

and AM.

• High boost (H BOOST):

Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective

for a bassy voice.

• Formant pass (F PASS):

Improves clarity by suppressing audio

frequencies outside the normal voice frequency

range.

• Bass boost (B BOOST):

Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective

for a voice with more high frequency

components.

• Conventional (CONVEN):

Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz

and higher.

• User (USER):

Reserved for the optional ARCP software. Off

is programmed at the factory as a default.

Frequency Response Curves

TRANSMIT INHIBIT

Transmit Inhibit prevents the transceiver from being

placed in transmit mode. No signal can be

transmitted when this function is ON even if the PTT

or [SEND] is pressed.

• TX Inhibit OFF: Transmission is allowed.

• TX Inhibit ON: Transmission is not allowed.

Switch the function ON or OFF via Menu No. 54. The

default is OFF.

CHANGING FREQUENCY WHILE TRANSMITTING

Moving your frequency while transmitting is usually

an unwise practice due to the risk of interfering with

other stations. However, if necessary, by using the

Tuning control you can change the operating

frequency while transmitting. You also can change

the XIT offset frequency while in transmit mode.

While transmitting, if you select a frequency outside

the transmit frequency range, the transceiver is

automatically forced to receive mode. If you selected

transmit mode by pressing [SEND], transmission will

not resume until you select a frequency inside the

transmit frequency range, at which time you must

press [SEND] again.

0.7 2.2

Amplitude

Audio

frequency

(kHz)

Bass boost

High boost

Off

Conventional

Formant pass

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

CW BREAK-IN

Break-in allows you to transmit CW without manually

switching between transmit and receive modes. Two

types of Break-ins are available: Semi Break-in and

Full Break-in.

Semi Break-in:

When the key contacts open, the transceiver

automatically waits for the passage of the time period

that you have selected. The transceiver then returns

to receive mode.

Full Break-in:

As soon as the key contacts open, the transceiver

returns to receive mode.

USING SEMI BREAK-IN OR FULL BREAK-IN

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The VOX LED lights.

3Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current setting (Full or delay time)

appears. The default is Full Break-in.

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Full Break-in

or a delay time for Semi Break-in.

• Delay time ranges from 5 to 100 (50 ms to

1000 ms) in steps of 5.

5Begin sending.

• The transceiver automatically switches to

transmit mode.

•When FBK (Full Break-in) is selected:

The transceiver immediately switches to

receive mode when the key opens.

•When a delay time is selected:

The transceiver switches to receive mode after

the delay time that you have selected has

passed.

6Press [FUNC], [KEY/ DELAY] again.

Note: Full Break-in cannot be used with the TL-922/922A linear

amplifier.

ELECTRONIC KEYER

This transceiver has a built-in electronic keyer that

can be used by connecting a keyer paddle to the

transceiver’s rear panel. Refer to “Keys for CW

(PADDLE and KEY)” {page 3} for details regarding

this connection. The built-in keyer supports lambic

operation.

CHANGING KEYING SPEED

The keying speed of the electronic keyer is fully

adjustable. Selecting the appropriate speed is

important in order to send error-free CW that other

operators can copy solidly. Selecting a speed that is

beyond your keying ability will only result in mistakes.

You will obtain the best results by selecting a speed

that is close to the speed used by the other station.

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2Press [KEY/ DELAY].

• The current keying speed appears. The default

is 20 (WPM).

3While keying the paddle and listening to the

transmit sidetone, turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the appropriate speed.

• The speeds range from 10 (WPM) to 60 (WPM),

in steps of 1. The larger the number, the faster

the speed.

4Press [KEY/ DELAY] again to complete the

setting.

Note: When using the semi-automatic “Bug” function, the selected

speed applies only to the rate that dots are sent.

AUTO WEIGHTING

The electronic keyer can automatically change the

dot/dash weighting. Weighting is the ratio of dash

length to dot length. The weighting changes with

your keying speed, thus making your keying easier

for other operators to copy.

Use Menu No. 33 to select AUTO, or 2.5 ~ 4.0 (in

steps of 0.1) fix weight ratio. The default is AUTO.

When the fix weight ratio is selected, the dot/dash

weight ratio is locked regardless of the keying speed.

■Reverse Keying Weight Ratio

Auto Weighting increases the weighting as you

increase your keying speed. However, the

electronic keyer also can decrease the weighting

as you increase your keying speed.

To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 34,

and select ON. The default is OFF.

esreveR gniyeK thgieW

)MPW(deepSgniyeK

52~01 54~62 06~64

FFO8.2:10.3:12.3:1

NO2.3:10.3:18.2:1

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

BUG KEY FUNCTION

The built-in electronic keyer also can be used as a

semi-automatic key. Semi-automatic keys are also

known as “Bugs”. When this function is ON, dots are

generated in the normal manner by the electronic

keyer. Dashes, however, are manually generated by

the operator by holding the keyer paddle closed for

the appropriate length of time.

To switch this function ON, access Menu No. 35, and

select ON. The default is OFF.

Note: When the Bug Key function is ON, CW Message Memory

(see below) cannot be used.

CW MESSAGE MEMORY

This transceiver has three memory channels for

storing CW messages. Each memory channel can

store approximately 50 characters (equivalent of 250

dots). These memory channels are ideal for storing

contest exchanges that you want to send repeatedly.

Stored messages can be played back to check

message content or for transmitting.

The electronic keyer has a function that allows you

to interrupt playback and manually inject your own

keying. To switch this function ON, access Menu

No. 30, and select ON. The default is OFF.

The electronic keyer can also repeatedly play back

the message that you stored. To switch this function

ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON. The

default is OFF.

For repetitive message playback, you can change

the interval between each series of messages.

Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the

range of 0 to 60 seconds.

Note:

◆

This function cannot be used when the Bug Key function is

ON.

◆

Operating the keyer paddle with Menu No. 30 OFF cancels

message playback. Even if message playback does not stop

because of your keying start timing, you can cancel playback

by pressing [CLR].

■Storing CW Messages

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL].

• The VOX LED turns off.

3Press [FUNC] and [1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/ REC], or [3/ CH3/REC] to select a

memory channel to be recorded.

4Begin sending using the keyer paddle.

• The message you send is stored in memory.

5To complete the message storage, press [CLR]

to stop.

• When the memory becomes full, recording

automatically stops.

Note: If you do not operate the keyer paddle after starting to

record a message, a pause is stored in the channel.

■Checking CW Messages without Transmitting

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch it

OFF.

3Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be

played back.

• The message is played back.

• To play back the messages stored in the

other channels in sequence, press the

corresponding channel keys during

playback. Up to three channels can be

queued at the same time.

• While playing back the messages, you can

also adjust the keyer speed by pressing

[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH

control.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

■Transmitting CW Messages

Messages can be transmitted using Semi Break-

in/ Full Break-in or manual TX/RX switching.

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW mode.

• “CW” appears.

2To use Semi Break-in/ Full Break-in, press

[VOX/ LEVEL]. The VOX LED lights.

Otherwise, press [SEND].

3Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC] to select the channel to be

played back.

• The message is played back and

transmitted automatically.

• To transmit the messages stored in the

other channels in sequence, press the

corresponding channel keys during

playback. Up to three channels can be

queued at the same time.

9 COMMUNICATING AIDS

• While playing back the messages, you can

also adjust the keyer speed by pressing

[KEY/ DELAY] and turning the MULTI/ CH

control.

• To interrupt transmission, press [CLR].

4If you pressed [SEND] in step 2, press [SEND]

again to return to receive mode.

■Changing the Inter-message Interval Time

For the message playback repeat, select Menu

No. 29A and set it ON. You can also change the

interval playback time of the message. Use

Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the range

of 0 to 60 seconds, in steps of 1 second.

Note: Menu Nos. 29A and 29B settings are shared with the

voice communication modes when the optional DRU-3A is

installed.

■Changing the Sidetone Volume

Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not

change the CW sidetone playback volume. To

change the CW sidetone volume, access Menu

No. 13 and select OFF, or 1 to 9.

■Insert Keying

If you operate a CW keyer manually while playing

back a recorded CW message, the transceiver

stops playing back the message. However, during

contests or regular QSOs, you may sometimes

want to insert a different number or message at a

certain point in the recorded message.

In this case, first record the CW message as usual

{page 43}, without the number or message you

want to insert. Then, access Menu No. 30 and

select ON.

Now if you operate a CW keyer while you play

back a recorded message, the transceiver pauses

the playback of the recorded message, instead of

stopping it. When you finish sending the number

or message with the keyer, the transceiver

resumes playback of the message.

FREQUENCY CORRECTION FOR CW

If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you would

sometimes use SSB mode (USB or LSB) just to

watch and listen CW signals. It is fine just to

monitor those CW signals but you have experienced

that changing the mode from SSB to CW results

losing the target CW signal. This is because the

frequency on the display always shows the true

carrier frequency for all modes. If you want the

transceiver to shift the receiving frequency to trace

the receiving CW signal when changing the mode

from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW, switch this function

ON. The transceiver shifts the receiving frequency

when changing the mode from SSB to CW. So, you

can still hear the target signal and instantly transmit

the signal in CW, without adjusting the frequency.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 37.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

CW REVERSE (RECEIVE)

This function pivots the BFO from the default position

(USB) to another position (LSB) in CW mode. It is

sometimes effective to remove the interfering signals

from the IF passband by pivoting the BFO.

1Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV].

• “CWR” appears.

3To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],

[CW/ FSK/ REV] again.

AUTO CW TX IN SSB MODE

If you operate both SSB and CW modes, you can

configure the transceiver to change the operating

mode from SSB (USB or LSB) to CW and then

transmit in CW mode when you operate the CW

keyers.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 36.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit the

Menu mode.

Note: You must switch the CW break-in function ON to change the

mode and transmit in CW mode {page 42}.

SUB-RECEIVER

The TS-2000(X) transceiver is equipped with

2 independent receivers. The main transceiver can

receive from 30 kHz to the UHF band (or 1.2 GHz

band if the optional UT-20 is installed) while the sub-

receiver can receive signals in FM or AM mode on

the VHF (144 MHz) or UHF (430/ 440MHz) band.

You can assign the sub receiver to monitor the local

repeater activities or your club channel while you are

operating on the HF/ 50MHz or VHF/ UHF/ (Optional

1.2 GHz) bands with the main transceiver.

Since the TS-2000 also has a built-in TNC, you can

assign the sub-receiver to monitor the local DX

Packet Cluster channel activities without using an

external TNC. If a new DX station is reported to the

DX Packet Cluster, the transceiver automatically

displays the DX station data. If desired, you can

further transfer the DX frequency information to the

main tranceiver to watch and instantly make contact

with the DX station {page 53}.

TX BAND AND CONTROL BAND

In this manual, the frequency on the left of the display

is referred to as the MAIN band and the frequency on

the right is called the SUB band.

To understand how to control the MAIN band and

SUB band frequencies and functions, please note the

differences between the TX band and the Control

band, below.

TX BAND

Press [MAIN] to display the “ ” and “ ” icons on

the MAIN band. When “ ” is on the MAIN band

display, the MAIN band is currently selected as the

transmission band. You can use the MAIN band

frequency to transmit signals or to control the main

transceiver functions.

If you press [SUB], the “ ” and “ ” icons move to

the SUB band display. This means that the SUB

band is now selected as the transmission band and

controls the functions. You can use the SUB band

frequency to transmit signals or control the sub

receiver functions.

CONTROL BAND

On some occasions, you may need to adjust the

frequency and/ or functions for the band you are not

transmitting on. To do this, press [CTRL]. For

example, if both “ ” and “ ” are on the MAIN

band display, pressing [CTRL] will move “ ” to the

SUB band display. “ ” remains on the MAIN band

display. This allows you to continue transmitting on

the MAIN band while you adjust the functions of the

sub-receiver.

RECEIVING

ACTIVATING THE SUB-RECEIVER

Press the SUB AF control to switch the sub-receiver

ON or OFF. The orange LED above the SUB AF/ SQL

control lights when the sub-receiver is switched ON.

Note: When switching the sub-receiver ON or OFF, you may hear a

popping sound from the speaker. This is not a malfunction.

CONTROLLING THE SUB-RECEIVER

To control all the available functions of the sub-

receiver, press [SUB] to transfer the controls and

transmission capability to the sub-receiver. The “ ”

and “ ” icons move from the main transceiver to the

sub-receiver. When you press [SEND] or Mic [PTT],

the transceiver transmits on the SUB band frequency.

Or, if you would like to transmit and receive on the

MAIN band while adjusting the sub-receiver

functions, simply press [CTRL]. Only the “ ” icon

moves from the main transceiver display to the sub

display. The “ ” icon remains on the main

transceiver display. With this setup, you can continue

receiving and transmitting on the main transceiver

VFO frequencies while you are making adjustments

to the sub-receiver functions.

If you need to adjust only the frequency of the sub-

receiver, you can simply turn the RIT/ SUB control.

However, this works only when you are operating the

main transceiver without the RIT/ XIT functions.

When operating the main transceiver with the RIT/

XIT function, first switch OFF the RIT/ XIT function by

pressing [RIT/ CW TUNE] and/or [XIT/ ALT], or press

[CTRL] to move the controls to the SUB band. Then

turn the Tuning control, the MULTI/ CH control or the

RIT/ SUB control to adjust the SUB band frequency.

SELECTING A BAND

Press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign the function

controls to the sub-receiver.

Press [+]/ [–] to select the 144 MHz or the

430/ 440 MHz band.

10 SUB-RECEIVER

The “ ” and “ ” icons are both on the sub-

receiver display:

• You can do all the above, plus transmit on the

SUB band frequency.

This transceiver provides many other methods for

selecting a frequency quickly. For further details, refer

to “SELECTING YOUR FREQUENCY” {page 37}.

SUB-RECEIVER PANEL METER

The multifunction meter measures the parameters

described in the table below. The S-meter appears

when in receive mode and the PWR meter appears

when in transmit mode. Peak readings for the

S- meter and PWR functions are held momentarily.

elacS yalpsiD etatSnoitcnuF

ShtgnertslangisdevieceRevieceR

RWPrewoptuptuotimsnarTtimsnarT

Note: Peak Hold readings cannot be deactivated.

SELECTING A MODE FOR THE SUB-RECEIVER

First, confirm that the “ ” icon is on the SUB band

display. If it is not, press [SUB] or [CTRL] to assign

the function controls to the SUB band.

The SUB band can only be used to transmit in FM

mode and receive in FM or AM mode. Press

[FM/ AM/ NAR] to toggle the operating mode for the

sub- receiver. The narrow bandwidth operation for

AM is not available for the SUB band frequency.

Refer to “NARROW BANDWIDTH FOR FM”

{page 29} for FM operation.

FM CTCSS OPERATION

You can assign an independent CTCSS tone to the

sub-receiver. Refer to “FM CTCSS OPERATION”

{page 35} for function and control details.

FM DCS OPERATION

You can assign an independent DCS code to the sub-

receiver. Refer to “FM DCS OPERATION” {page 36}

for function and control details.

TONE FREQ. ID SCAN

This function scans through all the tone frequencies

in order to identify the incoming tone frequency on

the receiving signal of the sub-receiver. Refer to

“TONE FREQ. ID SCAN” {page 34} for function and

control details.

DCS CODE ID SCAN

This function scans through all the DCS codes in

order to identify the incoming DCS code on the

receiving signal of sub-receiver. Refer to “DCS

CODE ID SCAN” {page 36} for function and control

details.

• Holding down the key changes the bands

continuously.

• If “MHz” is visible on the display, first press

[1MHz/ SEL] to exit from the 1 MHz Step Up/

Down mode.

ADJUSTING THE AUDIO FREQUENCY (AF) GAIN

Turn the SUB AF control clockwise to increase the

audio level and counterclockwise to decrease the

level.

SUB

CALL

C.IN

SUB

1MHz CTRL

M VFO

MG.SEL

M.IN

QUICK MEMO

SATL

A/B

M/S REV

TRACE

MAIN

MANUAL

SQL

SUB

MULTI

BCMAIN

GAIN

VFO/CH

VFO/M A=B

SPLIT

MENU TF-

SET

MAIN SUB

SG.SEL

SCAN

RIT

CW TUNE 9.6k STA

RIT/SUB

CON

XIT

ALT

SET

CLEAR

P.C . T

HF/VHE/UHF ALL MODE MULTI BANDER TS-2000

SQL

Note: The position of the SUB AF control does not affect the volume

of beeps caused by pressing buttons. The audio level for Packet

operation is also independent of the SUB AF control setting.

ADJUSTING THE SQUELCH

Turn the SUB SQL control clockwise when no signals

are present, to select the squelch level at which

background noise is just eliminated. The SUB band

LED turns off when the squelch is ON.

SELECTING A FREQUENCY

When you operate both the main transceiver and the

sub-receiver at the same time, you will be in one of

the following conditions. First, check where the “ ”

and “ ” icons are on the display, then follow the

instructions below.

The “ ” and “ ” icons are both on the MAIN band

display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub-

receiver frequency.

“” is on the SUB band display and “ ” is on the

MAIN band display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the sub-

receiver frequency.

“” is on the MAIN band display and “ ” is on the

SUB band display:

• Turn the RIT/ SUB control, the MULTI/ CH control,

or the Tuning control to adjust the frequency. Or,

directly enter the frequency using the numeric

keypad {page 37}. However, the input frequency

must be within the sub-receiver frequency range.

The frequency you selected may round up to the

nearest workable frequency step size {page 37}.

You cannot transmit on the sub-band frequency.

10 SUB-RECEIVER

ATTENUATOR

The attenuator reduces the level of received signals.

It is useful when there is strong interference from an

adjacent frequency. Since the main transceiver and

sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144

MHz and 430/ 440 MHz bands, activating the

attenuator function for the sub-receiver also causes

the function to switch ON for the same band of the

main transceiver.

PRE-AMPLIFIER

The pre-amplifier amplifies the level of received

signals. It is useful when the receiving signal is weak.

If there is no strong interference from adjacent

frequencies, switch the pre-amplifier ON to raise the

receiving signal level. Since the main transceiver and

sub-receiver share the same antenna for the 144 MHz

and 430/ 440 MHz bands, activating the pre-amplifier

function for the sub-receiver also causes the function

to switch ON for the same band of the main

transceiver.

DUAL WATCH

If different frequency bands are set on the main

transceiver and sub-receiver, you can still monitor the

other band activities while transmitting on the TX

band. It is useful that you can still monitor the local

repeater frequency (VHF or UHF band) while you are

working on a DX station on the HF band of the main

transceiver.

If you have the same frequency band (VHF or UHF

band) for the main transceiver and sub-receiver, you

can monitor both frequencies independently at the

same time. However, both receivers will temporarily

mute when you transmit because the transceiver

shares the same 144 MHz and 430/ 440 MHz band

antenna between the main transceiver and sub-

receiver.

SCAN

All types of scanning are also available for the sub-

receiver. However, the operating frequency range is

limited to the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage.

Refer to “SCAN” {page 66} for details on how to

operate the scan function.

NOISE REDUCTION

Since the sub-receiver can receive only in FM or AM

mode, DSP noise reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) is

available to reduce the noise from the receiving

signals. Refer to “NOISE REDUCTION” {page 56} for

details on how to control and adjust the function.

TRANSMITTING

First, confirm that the “ ” icon is on the SUB band

display. Press [SEND] or press and hold Mic [PTT],

then speak into the microphone in your normal tone

of voice. When you finish speaking, press [SEND]

again or release Mic [PTT].

SELECTING A TRANSMIT POWER

You can also adjust the output power for FM mode on

the 144 MHz and 430/ 440 MHz bands when you are

operating the sub-receiver.

1Press [PWR].

• The current transmit power appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control counterclockwise to

reduce the power or clockwise to increase the

power.

Note:

◆

The selectable range varies depending on the band and mode

{page 79}.

◆

Output power configuration is also reflected in the main

transceiver.

MICROPHONE GAIN

Access Menu No. 41 and select “LOW”, “MID”, or

“HIGH” for the microphone gain.

Note: When using the optional MC-90 microphone in FM mode,

select “HIGH” microphone gain. Microphone sensitivity is low in FM

mode; this may cause insufficient modulation. For other

microphones, select “MID” or “LOW”.

FM REPEATER OPERATION

You can also configure an independent repeater

offset frequency for the sub-receiver, if necessary.

Refer to “FM REPEATER OPERATION” {page 32} for

details.

REVERSE FUNCTION

Press [TF-SET] to switch the sub-receiver Reverse

function ON (or OFF). “R” appears while the Reverse

function is active on the sub-receiver. Refer to

“REVERSE FUNCTION” {page 34} for details.

10 SUB-RECEIVER

AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK (ASC)

You can also use ASC functions on the 144 MHz and

430/ 440 MHz bands of the sub-receiver. While using

a repeater, ASC periodically monitors the strength of

the uplink frequency to check the signals. Press and

hold [TF-SET] until “[R]” appears on the SUB band

display. Refer to “AUTOMATIC SIMPLEX CHECK”

{page 34} for function and control details.

TRANSMITTING A TONE

You can assign another Tone to the sub-receiver.

Refer to “TRANSMITTING A TONE” {page 33} for

function and control details.

MEMORY

You can also utilize all the memory functions

{page 58}, including the Quick Memory function

{page 64}, while you are operating the sub-receiver.

However, the operating frequency range is limited to

the sub-receiver’s frequency coverage. You cannot

recall any memory channels that are outside the sub-

receiver’s frequency coverage. These channels are

automatically skipped when they are recalled on the

sub-receiver.

SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PACKET RADIO

Packet is a unit of data transmitted as a whole from

one computer to another, on a network. Packets can

be transmitted on radio waves as well as on

communications lines. Besides a transceiver and a

computer, all you need is a terminal node controller

(TNC) or Multimode Communications Processor

(MCP). One of the tasks of TNCs and MCPs is to

convert data packets to audio tones, and vice versa.

This transceiver has a built-in TNC which allows you

to use basic (not full) packet applications.

A variety of packet applications developed by hams

include packet bulletin board systems (PBBSs).

PBBSs are created and maintained by volunteers

called System Operators (SysOp). You may access

one of your local PBBSs to send e-mail, download

files, or obtain various useful information. Thousands

of PBBSs, which have formed a worldwide network,

relay e-mail to their intended destinations around the

world.

When you access a local PBBS for the first time, you

often need to register as a new user. After you are

successfully registered, it will then be available as

your home PBBS. E-mail addressed to you will be

held under a directory, called a mailbox, on your

home PBBS.

To send e-mail, you must designate the address of a

recipient, using his or her call sign and the call sign of

his or her home PBBS; ex. KD6NUH@KJ6HC. In this

example, the e-mail is addressed to KD6NUH whose

home PBBS is KJ6HC. If your home PBBS cannot

find KJ6HC in its address file to forward your mail,

you must designate the address in more detail. You

may enter “KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA”, or

“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA”, or up to

“KD6NUH@KJ6HC.#ABC.CA.USA.NA”, as

necessary. The complete address of a recipient living

in the U.S.A., for example, should include an

appropriate region code (preceded by a #), state,

country, and continent abbreviations, as above.

For further information, consult reference books

which should be available at any store that handles

Amateur Radio equipment. Web pages relating to

Packet will also be helpful. On Internet search

engines, use “Packet Radio” as key words to find

those Web pages.

PBBS

Note:

◆

Unlike a TNC, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP)

serves as a communications interface in several digital modes

such as Packet, RTTY, and AMTOR. You can cause it to switch

among the modes by sending a single command from your

computer.

◆

If there is an amateur radio club in your area, consider becoming

a member. You can often learn more in an hour from

experienced hobbyists, than in a month of independent research.

Ask on the local repeaters, or contact your national amateur radio

organization (the ARRL in the U.S.A.) for information on local

amateur radio clubs. You’ll be glad you did.

BUILT-IN TNC

This transceiver has a built-in TNC which conforms to

the AX.25 protocol. Since the built-in TNC has been

designed to work with the Packet Cluster Tune

{page 53} and Sky Commander II+ {page 83}

functions, some of the enhanced TNC commands

may not be available. For the commands supported

by the built-in TNC, consult “BUILT-IN TNC

COMMAND LIST” starting on page 110. The AX-25

protocol is used for communication between TNCs.

The TNC accepts data from your personal computer

and assembles it into packets. It then converts those

packets to audio tones which the transceiver can

transmit. The TNC also takes audio tones from the

transceiver, converts them to data for the computer,

and checks for errors in the data.

In order to activate the built-in TNC, access Menu

No. 55 and select ON. The default is OFF. “PKT”

will appear to show that the built-in TNC is ON.

The TNC mainly functions in Command or Converse

mode. First, you should learn the difference between

these two modes.

• Command mode

When you select Packet mode, the TNC enters

Command mode. A “cmd:” prompt appears on the

computer screen. You can type commands from

the computer keyboard to change the settings of

the TNC. When in Converse mode, press

[Ctrl]+[C] on the keyboard to return to Command

mode.

• Converse mode

The TNC enters this mode when a link with the

target station is established. On the computer

keyboard, type an appropriate command and a

message if necessary, then press [Enter] or

[Return]. What you type is converted into packets

and transmitted over the air. When in Command

mode, type CONVERSE, CONV, or K to enter

Converse mode.

Note: The built-in TNC automatically reinitiates when a malfunction

is detected; this does not designate that the transceiver is defective.

11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

PREPARATION

1Connect the transceiver to your personal

computer (via an external TNC or MCP if desired).

• See “COMPUTER” {page 93} and “MCP AND

TNC” {page 95}.

2Install an appropriate terminal program onto the

personal computer.

• A variety of freeware and shareware programs

can be obtained in various ways. Consult your

reference material or other “packeteers”.

3Initiate the terminal program and set the following

parameters on the personal computer:

• Transfer rate (TNC/MCP <–> Computer):

9600 bps (default setting)

• Data length: 8 bit

• Stop bit: 1 bit

• Parity: Non-parity

• Flow control: Hardware

4Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

5Access Menu No. 46 and select the main band or

the sub-band (default) as the data band.

• “TNC” appears on the data band.

• If you are using an external TNC or MCP,

access Menu No. 50E to make this selection.

The default is main band.

6Access Menu No. 47 and select 1200 bps (default)

or 9600 bps as the transfer rate between TNCs.

• You must select the same transfer rate as the

target station.

• If you are using an external TNC or MCP,

access Menu No. 50F to make this selection.

The default is 1200 bps.

7Select an operating frequency.

8Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [FM/ AM/ NAR] to

select LSB, USB, or FM mode.

9Access Menu No. 50A and select ON to activate

the DSP packet filter for the main transceiver.

10 Turn the HI/ SHIFT control to select the center

frequency of the packet mode. You can further

select either “NAR” (narrow) or “WID” (wide) for

the receiver filter width by turning the LO/ WIDTH

control.

ycneuqerFretneC edoMgnitarepO

zH000113KSP

zH0071)spb0021KSFA(tekcaP

zH0122)spb003KSFA(tekcaP

KSPKSP

Note:

◆

The packet (9600 bps) operation is not affected by the DSP

packet filter settings.

◆

The DSP packet filter works only on the main transceiver.

If you are using an external TNC or MCP, proceed

with the subsequent steps.

11 Following the instructions provided with your TNC

or MCP, enter the calibration mode so that you

can generate a mark condition.

• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)

to red (TX).

12 Access Menu No. 50B to select the appropriate AF

input level.

• Select a proper input level, so that the ALC

meter reflects within the ALC zone.

13 Exit the calibration mode.

• The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to

green (RX).

14 Access Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate

AF output level.

• You cannot use the AF control to make this

adjustment.

• If you have selected sub-band in step 5,

access Menu No. 50D instead.

The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used

for Packet are listed below:

adanaC/.A.S.U )acirfA/eporuE(1noigeRURA

0381~0081—

5363~02630063~0953

0017~0807—

05101~04101—

5.99041~5904121141~10141,99041~98041

01181~50181—

00112~0901202112~00112

98182~0218200392~00292,05182~02182

08705~00605—

090541~019441—

570144~579044520134~050034

DCD SENSE

You can also select the method for inhibiting the built-

in TNC from transmitting. Access Menu No. 48 and

select one of the two methods. The default is “TNC

BAND”.

TNC BAND:

The TNC does not transmit when signals are present

on the TNC (data) band.

MAIN&SUB:

The TNC does not transmit when signals are present

on the main transceiver or sub-receiver.

11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

RADIO TELETYPEWRITING (RTTY)

RTTY is the data communications mode with the

longest history. It was originally designed for use with

mechanical teletypewriters which were often used

before personal computers became common. Now

you can easily start operating RTTY with a personal

computer and MCP. Unlike Packet, each time you

type a letter, it is transmitted over the air. What you

typed is transmitted and displayed on the computer

screen of the recipient.

RTTY operation uses frequency shift keying (FSK)

and the 5-bit Baudot code or the 7-bit ASCII code to

transmit information.

For the cable connections, see “RTTY” {page 95}.

For further information, consult reference books

about Amateur Radio.

1Access Menu No. 38 and select an FSK shift.

• FSK shift is the difference in frequencies

between a mark and a space.

• The 170 Hz default is used on the Amateur

bands.

2Access Menu No. 39 and select a key-down

polarity.

• Select “NORMAL” to transmit a mark when

keying down or “INVERS” to transmit a space.

The default is “NORMAL”.

3Access Menu No. 40 and select high tone

(2125 Hz) or low tone (1275 Hz) for mark.

• High tone (default) is commonly used

nowadays.

4Select an operating frequency.

5Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select FSK.

• “FSK” appears.

6If necessary to be compatible with the other

station, press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to reverse

the transceiver to the upper sideband.

• “FSR” appears.

• Traditionally, the lower sideband is used for

FSK operation.

• Press [FUNC], [CW/ FSK/ REV] to return to

the lower sideband.

7Following the instructions provided with your MCP,

enter a command from your computer to select

transmit mode.

• The MAIN band LED changes from green (RX)

to red (TX).

• You may instead press [SEND] to manually

select the transmit mode.

8Begin sending data from your computer.

• Use Menu No. 50C to select the appropriate AF

output level. The AF control cannot be used

for this adjustment.

• Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI] to monitor

your signals. Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI]

again to quit this function.

9When finished transmitting, enter a command from

your computer to return to receive mode.

• The MAIN band LED changes from red (TX) to

green (RX).

• If you pressed [SEND] in step 7, press [SEND]

again.

The frequencies (measured in kHz) commonly used

for RTTY operation are listed below:

adanaC/.A.S.U 1noigeRURA )acirfA/eporuE(

0481~00812481~8381

)0953:XD(5463~50630263~0853

)0407:XD(0017~08075407~5307

05101~0410105101~04101

5.99041~070415.99041~08041

01181~0018190181~10181

00112~0701202112~08012

03942~0294292942~02922

05182~0708205182~05082

Note: You may adjust the carrier level when necessary. Press

[FUNC], [MIC/ CAR] to enter the adjustment mode. With a key down

condition, turn the MULTI/ CH control so that the ALC meter reads in

the ALC zone but does not exceed the upper ALC zone limit.

11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

AMTOR/ PacTOR/ CLOVER/ G-TOR/ PSK31

Besides Packet and RTTY, digital modes which have

been used among hams include AMTOR, PacTOR,

CLOVER, G-TOR, and PSK31. This manual does not

describe much about these modes. For details,

consult reference books about Amateur Radio.

AMTOR (AMateur Teleprinting Over Radio) has

brought amateur HF digital communication into the

computer age. It is the first error-free HF digital mode

by which data bursts (not steady stream of data) are

transmitted.

PacTOR (Packet Teleprinting On Radio) has

combined the best features of both AMTOR and

Packet to improve the efficiency of HF digital

communications. Like Packet and AMTOR, PacTOR

sends error-free data using a handshaking method.

Of all the Amateur Radio HF digital modes, CLOVER

offers the best overall performance using a

complicated modulation technique, automatic power

adjustment and other advanced features. It may

allow communications to be maintained under the

worst conditions.

G-TOR (Golay-coded Teleprinting Over Radio) is a

relatively new Amateur Radio digital mode currently in

use. G-TOR was developed specifically to handle the

adverse conditions of communicating, across the

solar system, with spacecraft during their missions.

PSK31 was developed by an RTTY enthusiast,

G3PLX, in the Great Britain. The operating technique

is very similar to the conventional Baudot-RTTY,

although more sensitive fine-tuning is required, as a

PSK31 signal requires a tuning accuracy of a few

Hertz. A special feature of PSK31 is that it allows the

entire ASCII character set, including the back space

character.

Your MCP should handle some or all of the above

modes. For available modes on your MCP, consult

the instruction manual for the MCP. For the cable

connections, see “MCP AND TNC” {page 95}.

On most HF bands, audio frequency shift keying

(AFSK) is used for the above modes. This method of

modulation uses audio tones therefore either LSB or

USB mode should be selected. Traditionally, LSB is

used, similar to RTTY, with the exception of AMTOR

which is normally operated in USB.

AMTOR activity can be found on or near 14075 and

3637.5 kHz. These are also good starting places

when searching for PacTOR, CLOVER, G-TOR, or

PSK31 stations.

Note: When using SSB mode for digital operation, use a fast AGC

setting and switch your Speech Processor OFF.

SLOW SCAN TV/ FACSIMILE

Slow-scan Television (SSTV) is a popular application

for transmitting still images over the air, from one

station to another. Instead of trying to describe your

station, simply showing it is much faster. Transmitting

images over the air requires a scan converter,

besides a transceiver. A scan converter transforms

images taken with a video camera into audio signals

that can be fed into your transceiver. The recipient’s

scan converter transforms audio signals back into

video images so that he or she can view them on a

TV set.

Nowadays instead of a scan converter, many hams

use a personal computer, a software application, and

an interface attached to the transceiver. This is much

cheaper, more flexible, and does not require a TV set.

In recent years, many low cost digital cameras have

become available. You can transfer images from

these cameras into your computer.

For further information, consult reference books about

Amateur Radio. The frequencies (measured in kHz)

commonly used for SSTV operation are listed below:

adanaC/.A.S.U 1noigeRURA )acirfA/eporuE(

7583,54830473~0373

17175407~5307

33241,0324153241~52241

0431254312~53312

0868258682~57682

005541—

Fax (facsimile) is one of the original image

transmission modes. Using this mode allows you to

exchange more detailed graphics than SSTV.

Amateur Radio fax functions much like old analog fax

systems. It scans paper and converts acquired

image data into a series of tones representing white

and black portions of the image. Because fax

requires longer transmission time, you should use it

only when band conditions are stable with strong

signals.

Popular fax frequencies include the following:

• 7245, 14245, 21345 (International Net), and

28945 kHz

Operating on SSTV or fax mainly involves learning

the functionality of your computer application or

accessory hardware that supports these modes.

Consult the instruction manual that comes with your

software or accessory equipment.

Note: When operating either SSTV or fax, use a fast AGC setting

and switch OFF your Speech Processor, for best results.

11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

DX PACKET CLUSTER TUNE

DX Packet Cluster is a packet network which consist

of nodes and stations who are interested in DXing

and contesting. If one station finds a DX station on

the air, he or she sends a notice to his or her node.

This node then passes the information to all its local

stations as well as another node. This transceiver

can display received DX information and hold the

latest information on up to 10 DX stations.

This transceiver is also capable of automatically

tuning in a reported DX station. In order to use the

Auto Tune function, access Menu No. 49A and select

“AUTO”; the default is “MANUAL”.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

2Press the SUB AF control to activate the sub-

receiver if it is switched OFF.

• The orange SUB LED lights {page 45}.

3Tune to the frequency of the target DX Packet

Cluster node on the sub-receiver.

4Access Menu No. 46 to confirm that “SUB” is

selected.

5Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to enter the Packet

Cluster Tune (P.C.T.) mode.

• Each time new DX Packet Cluster data is

received, the DX station’s callsign in Morse

code sounds and the information is displayed

on the sub-receiver as shown below:

6If you are not using the Auto Tune function, press

[SET/ P.C.T.].

• The main transceiver is tuned to the frequency

of the reported DX station, on the sub-receiver.

• Transmitting on the tuned frequency, the

transceiver exits the P.C.T. mode. Press

[FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] again to reactivate it if

necessary.

7Press [FUNC], [SET/ P.C.T.] to exit the P.C.T.

mode.

To access desired DX information in the P.C.T

memory, press QUICK MEMO [MR], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control. Press [SET/ P.C.T.] to tune the

main band to the selected station. Press QUICK

MEMO [MR] again to quit the DX information display.

The transceiver can be set to output a beep instead

of a Morse code when new DX Packet Cluster data is

received. Access Menu No. 49B and select “OFF”.

“VOICE” can also be set when you install the optional

VS-3 {page 91}.

Note:

◆

You cannot send DX information to a node using this function.

◆

The DX Packet Cluster data in memory is retained when the

transceiver is turned OFF. However, the sub-receiver’s

frequency display returns to the receiving frequency of the DX

Packet Cluster node.

SATELLITE OPERATION

Amateur satellites receive on one band and transmit

on another. Unlike in regular operation, Satellite

mode can handle uplink/ downlink frequency

combinations simultaneously in all operating modes

as shown below.

KNILPU

NWOD KNIL

dnaB ~FH zHM05 zHM441 /034 zHM044 zHG2.1

~FH zHM05 √√√

zHM441 √√√

/034 zHM044 √√ √

zHG2.1 √√√

Some satellites require a rotator that allows azimuth

and elevation control, plus a high-gain directional

antenna. The antenna must track the satellite which

travels from horizon to horizon. Even so, many hams

have been successfully using fixed omnidirectional

antennas. If you are using a directional antenna, it

would be wise to obtain a pass prediction program.

Doppler Shift is another aspect that you must take

into account when working the satellites. As a target

satellite travels away, frequencies on which you will

receive change. This transceiver has a function that

automatically keeps the sum or difference between

the two frequencies identical when you change the

receive frequency.

For further information, consult Internet Web pages

relating to Amateur satellites. On Internet search

engines, use “AMSAT” as key words to find those

Web pages. Or, you can directly go to the AMSAT

(the Radio Amateur Satellite Corporation) homepage

at http://www.amsat.org. From AMSAT Web pages,

you can download a variety of utilities, including pass

prediction programs, which will ease your satellite

operations.

BASIC OPERATION

When you enter the Satellite mode, you are always

controlling one of 10 Satellite Memory channels with

the adjustable frequency function. The Satellite

Memory channel number (0 ~ 9) appears on the main

transceiver’s display when you enter the mode.

1Press [SATL] to enter Satellite mode.

• The default downlink (435.9 MHz) and uplink

(145.9 MHz) frequencies appear.

• “TRACE”, “ ”, and “ ” appear to indicate the

current selections.

2On VFO A, tune to the downlink (RX) frequency of

the satellite.

11 SPECIALIZED COMMUNICATIONS

3Press [LSB/ USB/ AUTO] or [CW/ FSK/ REV] to

select LSB, USB, or CW mode.

4As the Satellite moves, fine tune to the changing

downlink (RX) frequency of the satellite using the

Tuning control (adjusting the Doppler effect).

• As you adjust the downlink (RX) frequency, the

Trace function automatically changes the uplink

frequency so that the sum of the two

frequencies is kept the same (Reverse Trace).

• If necessary, press [A=B / TRACE] to quit the

Trace function. “TRACE” disappears.

• The trace function can also change the uplink

(TX) frequency so that the difference between

the two frequencies is kept the same (Normal

Trace).

5If you want to switch to the normal trace mode,

press [SPLIT / REV]. “ ” disappears.

6To adjust the frequency on the sub-band display

(normally the uplink frequency) without tracing,

turn the RIT/ SUB control. To adjust it using the

trace function, press [A/B / M/S] to swap the main

band frequency and sub-band frequency then turn

the Tuning control or MULTI/ CH control. The

following table shows which control to use when

adjusting frequencies with tracing ON and OFF.

ECART /

RECART NO ECART /

RECART FFO

gninuT lortnoc )lamroN( buSdnaniaMniaM

HC/ITLUM )esraoC(lortnoc buSdnaniaMniaM

BUS/TIR lortnoc buSbuS

STORING SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNELS

You can store all the above settings to one of 10

Satellite memory channels for the future operations.

1Press [M.IN], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select a channel from 0 to 9.

2Select your desired settings.

3Press [M.IN] again to store the selection to the

memory channel. To quit, press [CLR].

Note: The Satellite Memory channel does not hold the frequency

adjustment values when the channel is changed. So, when you

change the channel number or switch the transceiver OFF, the

adjustment frequency values are cleared if they are not stored by

pressing [M.IN].

RECALLING A SATELLITE MEMORY CHANNEL

1Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH].

• The MULTI/ CH LED lights.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the desired

Satellite Memory channel.

3Press [VFO/M / VFO/CH] to return to the

frequency adjustment mode.

SATELLITE CHANNEL NAME

You can name each Satellite Memory channel using a

maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters. First, store

the settings to the Satellite Memory channel {above}.

To store the Satellite Channel name:

1Press [M.IN] then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the Satellite Memory channel.

2Press [DISP].

3An entry cursor appears. Select a character by

turning MULTI/ CH control, then move the cursor

using [SUB] or [MAIN]. You can also use the

other methods to enter the characters. Refer to

page 63 for details.

4Press [M.IN] to store the name to the Satellite

Memory channel. Press [CLR] to quit.

5The stored Satellite Memory name appears on the

main dot-matrix display.

QUICK MEMORY IN SATELLITE MODE

While in the Satellite mode, only 1 Quick Memory

channel is available. It uses Satellite Memory

channel 9 to store the settings. To store the settings

to the Quick Memory in Satellite mode, press

QUICK MEMO [M.IN]. The settings are stored to

Satellite Memory channel 9.

To recall the Quick Memory, press

QUICK MEMO [MR] or select Satellite Memory

channel 9, using the MULTI/ CH control. Satellite

Memory channel 9 is recalled.

CHECKING THE UPLINK FREQUENCY

When you need to monitor the uplink (TX) frequency,

press [TF-SET]. Each time you press [TF-SET], the

uplink (TX) frequency and the downlink (RX)

frequency are swapped.

USING XIT/ RIT IN SATELLITE MODE

You can also use the RIT or XIT function while in the

Satellite mode. Press [RIT/ CW TUNE] or [XIT/ ALT]

to activate the function. When the RIT or XIT function

is ON, the sub-band frequency display shows the

current RIT or XIT offset frequency instead of the

operating frequency. To clear the RIT or XIT offset

frequency, press [CLEAR].

Note: You cannot activate both the RIT and XIT functions at the

same time in the Satellite mode.

CHANGING THE FREQUENCY BAND

If you need to change the uplink and/or downlink

frequency band, press [CTRL] to move the “ ” icon

to the frequency band that you want to change.

Then, press [+]/ [–] to select the band you want to

operate.

REJECTING INTERFERENCE

edoM tuc-woltluafeD )zH(yceuqerf tuc-hgihtluafeD )zH(ycneuqerf

MF/BSS0030062

MA0010005

4To return the display to the current operating

mode, press [DISP].

Note:

◆

The cut-off frequencies can be adjusted independently for

each operating mode. When you change the operating

mode, the previous setting is recalled for each operating

mode.

◆

When the Packet filter (Menu No. 50A) is ON, you cannot

change the DSP filter bandwidth. Switch the Packet filter

OFF to adjust the DSP filter bandwidth.

■CW/ FSK Modes

1Press [CW/ FSK/ REV] to select CW or FSK

mode.

2Press [DISP].

• The current filter selection appears.

3Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to

increase (wide) the bandwidth, or

counterclockwise to decrease (narrow) the

bandwidth.

edoM )zH(snoitceleShtdiwdnaB tluafeD )zH(

WC ,004,003,002,051,001,08,05 0002,0001,006,005 006

KSF0051,0001,005,0520051

4As for CW, you can further adjust the shift

frequency for passband. Turn the HI/ SHIFT

control to adjust the shift frequency from 400 to

1000 Hz in steps of 50 Hz. The default shift

frequency is 800 Hz.

5To return the display to the current operating

mode, press [DISP].

DSP FILTERS

KENWOOD digital signal processing (DSP)

technology is used for the functions described in this

section. Using DSP filtering, the TS-2000 frees you

from installing many analog filters for each operating

mode. Additionally, you can control the bandwidth,

cancel the multiple jamming beat, and reduce the

noise level using DSP filtering technology.

CHANGING THE RECEIVE FILTER BANDWIDTH

For improving interference reduction capability, this

transceiver also provides IF filters designed using

DSP technology. When in SSB, FM, or AM mode,

you can change the filter bandwidth by altering its low

and/or high cut-off frequency. For CW and FSK

modes, you can change the filter bandwidth by

directly specifying a bandwidth. Changing the filter

bandwidth does not affect the current receive

frequency.

Note:

◆

The receive filter bandwidth can be changed only on the main

transceiver.

◆

The IF DSP filter is not available in FM mode.

■SSB/ FM/ AM Modes

1Select SSB, FM, or AM mode.

2Press [DISP].

• The current filter selection appears.

3Turn the LO/ WIDTH control clockwise to raise

the low cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise

to lower the low cut-off frequency.

LO/ WIDTH

Turn the HI/ SHIFT control clockwise to raise

the high cut-off frequency, or counterclockwise

to lower the high cut-off frequency.

HI/ SHIFT

tsujdA )zH(snoitceleSycneuqerF

HTDIW/OL ,004,003,002,001,05,0 ,009,008,007,006,005 0001

TFIHS/IH ,0002,0081,0061,0041 ,0082,0062,0042,0022 0005,0004,0043,0003

Interfering

signal Desired

signal Interfering

signal

12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

NOTCH FILTER (SSB)

Auto Notch filter automatically locates and attenuates

any single interfering tone within the receive pass

band. This function operates digitally at the IF filter

level, hence it can affect your S-meter reading and

may also affect (slightly attenuate) your desired

signal. However, controlling the AGC level by

notching out the strong interfering beat signals could

bring up the desired SSB signal that is covered by the

interfering beat signal. If the interfering tone is weak,

you may find that Beat Cancel eliminates them more

effectively.

Before

Interfering

tones

After

Receive pass band

Desired

signal

Press [A.N./ LEVEL] to toggle the Auto Notch Filter

ON and OFF.

•“A.N.” appears when the function is ON.

•The interfering beat signals are notched out.

If the interfering beat signals change the tone

frequency randomly, you can adjust the Auto Notch

level.

Press [FUNC], [A.N./ LEVEL] to access the Auto

Notch level adjustment, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select the level from FIX, and 1 to 4.

Level 1 is the slowest beat tone tracking speed and

Level 4 is the fastest. FIX terminates the beat tone

tracking. Adjust this pamameter manually to remove

the beat signal if necessary.

AUTO BEAT CANCEL (SSB/ AM)

Auto Beat Cancel uses an adaptive filter and

attenuates more than one cyclic interference within the

receive pass band. The adaptive filter changes its

characteristics according to the nature of the signal

being received at any given moment. You can use

automatic Beat Cancel when in SSB or AM mode.

Before

Interfering

tones

After

Receive pass band

Desired

signal

Press [B.C./ MANUAL] to toggle between the Auto

Beat Cancel ON and OFF.

•“B. C.” appears when the function is ON.

•If desired, you can manually control the beat

cancel frequency.

MANUAL BEAT CANCEL (ALL MODES)

Press [FUNC], [B.C./ MANUAL], then turn the

MANUAL BC control to select the single Beat Cancel

frequency manually. You can select the beat cancel

frequency from approx. 300Hz to 3000 Hz by turning

the control. Turn the control clockwise to select a

higher frequency and counterclockwise to select a

lower frequency.

Since the DSP Beat Cancel processes the incoming

signals at the AF stage, strong beat signals may

control the AGC, then weaken the target signal level.

In this case, use the Auto Notch Filter instead, to

remove the beat signal from the IF passband filter.

Note: While adjusting the MANUAL BC control, the transceiver

clicks. This is not a malfunction.

NOISE REDUCTION

(N.R. 1: ALL MODES, N.R. 2: SSB/ CW/ FSK/ AM)

This transceiver provides two types of Noise Reduction

functions (1 and 2) for reducing random noise which

interferes with the desired signal. Trying them both is

the easiest way to judge which function works more

effectively under the current conditions. Normally,

select Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced) in SSB

mode and Noise Reduction 2 (SPAC) in CW mode.

Press [N.R./ LEVEL] to toggle between Noise

Reduction 1, Noise Reduction 2, and OFF.

•“ ” or “ ” appears, depending on which

function is selected.

■Setting the N.R. 1 Level Adjustment

The Noise Reduction 1 (Line Enhanced Method)

uses an adaptive filter to reduce the noise element

from the received signals. When the S/N ratio is

reasonably good in SSB, using N.R. 1 will improve

the S/N further.

While N.R. 1 is ON, you can further adjust the noise

reduction level by pressing [FUNC], [N.R./ LEVEL],

then turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the level

from 1 to 9 or AUTO. The default is AUTO.

■Setting the N.R. 2 Time Constant

You can change the correlation time for Noise

Reduction 2 (SPAC). When in SSB mode, select

the correlation time that allows you to hear signals

with more clarity. When receiving CW, it is best to

select the longest correlation time that allows

reliable reception. The longer the correlation time,

the better the S/N ratio.

When N.R. 2 is ON, press [FUNC],

[N.R./ LEVEL], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the correlation time from 2 ms to 20 ms.

The default is 20 ms.

Note:

◆

Using Noise Reduction 2 in SSB mode may lower the clarity of

signals or induce pulse noise, depending on the conditions.

◆

Only Noise Reduction 1 is available for the sub-receiver.

However, the level cannot be adjusted.

12 REJECTING INTERFERENCE

NOISE BLANKER

Noise Blanker was designed to reduce pulse noise

such as that generated by automobile ignitions.

Noise Blanker does not function in FM mode.

Press [7/ NB/ LEVEL] to toggle between the Noise

Blanker ON and OFF.

• “NB” appears when the function is ON.

You can further adjust the Noise blanker level from

1 to 10. The default level is 6.

Press [FUNC], [7/ NB/ LEVEL], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to adjust the noise blanker level.

• “NB LEVEL” and the current level appear on the

sub dot-matrix display.

Note: Noise Blanker is available only for the main transceiver in

SSB, CW, FSK, and AM modes.

PRE-AMPLIFIER

Switching the Pre-amplifier OFF may help reduce

interference from adjacent frequencies.

Press [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle between the

Pre-amplifier ON and OFF.

• “PRE” appears when the function is ON.

The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in

the current band. Each time you select the same

band, the same setting will be automatically selected.

The frequency range of each band is provided in the

following table (under “ATTENUATOR”).

Note: If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430 (440) MHz) band is

selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the

pre-amplifier can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This

is because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same

antenna.

ATTENUATOR

The Attenuator reduces the level of received signals.

This function is useful when there is strong

interference from adjacent frequencies.

Press [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle the Attenuator ON

and OFF.

• “ATT” appears when the function is ON.

The ON/OFF setting will be automatically stored in

the current band. Each time you select the same

frequency band, the attenuator setting will be

automatically recalled.

The frequency range of each band is shown below.

sdnaBycneuqerF )zHM( reifilpma-erP )tluafeD( rotaunettA )tluafeD(

5.2~30.0FFOFFO

1.4~5.2FFOFFO

5.7~1.4FFOFFO

5.01~5.7NOFFO

5.41~5.01NOFFO

5.81~5.41NOFFO

5.12~5.81NOFFO

5.52~5.12NOFFO

0.03~5.52NOFFO

0.06~0.03NOFFO

003~811NOFFO

215~003NOFFO

0031~0421NOsyawlAFFOsyawlA

Note:

◆

If the same frequency (144 MHz or 430/ 440 MHz) band is

selected on both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver, the

attenuator can be switched ON or OFF for both receivers. This is

because the main transceiver and sub-receiver share the same

antenna.

◆

Available receiving frequencies in the above frequency bands

vary, depending on the market code. Refer to the Specifications

{page 106} for details.

◆

If 118 ~ 135.995 MHz, 155 ~ 173.995 MHz or 220 ~ 229.995 MHz

is selected for the sub-receiver, the pre-amplifier cannot be turned

ON (K-type only).

MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY CHANNELS

The TS-2000(X) provides you with 300 memory

channels, numbered 00 to 299, for storing operating

frequency data, modes and other information.

Memory channels 00 to 289 are called Conventional

Memory Channels. Memory channels 290 to 299 are

designed for programming VFO tuning ranges and

scan ranges. The data you can store is listed below:

Conventional memory is used for storing data you

will often recall. For example, you may store the

frequency where you regularly meet your club

members.

retemaraP lennahC 982~00 lennahC 992~092

ycneuqerfXRseY seY

)xelpmis(

ycneuqerfXTseY

edomXRseY seY

)xelpmis(

edomXTseY

seicneuqerfdnE/tratSoNseY

ycneuqerftesffOseYseY

noitceridtfihSseYseY

edomesreveRseYseY

ezispetsycneuqerfXRseY seY )xelpmis(

ezispetsycneuqerfXTseY

ycneuqerfenoTseYseY

ycneuqerfSSCTCseYseY

edocSCDseYseY

edomSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO seYseY

emanyromeMseYseY

tuokcoLlennahCyromeM FFO/NO seY

seY

1Changing the data after recalling a memory channel overwrites the

contents of the channel.

STORING DATA IN MEMORY

There are 2 methods used for storing transmit/receive

frequencies and associated data in memory channels

00 to 289. Use either method, depending on the

relationship of the receive and transmit frequencies

you store:

• Simplex channels:

RX frequency = TX frequency

• Split-frequency channels:

RX frequency ≠ TX frequency

Memory channels 290 to 299 can also be used as

simplex channels.

Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, the frequency that includes the RIT or

XIT offset will be stored.

■Simplex Channels

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO

is selected.

2Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.

3Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select a memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys.

5Press [M.IN] again to store the data.

• The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

■Split-Frequency Channels

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO

is selected.

2Select the frequency, mode, etc. to be stored.

• This frequency and mode will be used for

transmitting.

3Press [A/B] to select the other VFO.

4Select the receive frequency and mode.

5Press [SPLIT].

• “SPLIT” appears.

6Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

7Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select a memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys.

8Press [M.IN] again to store the data.

• The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

Note: When subtone frequencies differ between TX and RX

while performing memory-VFO split operation, the subtone

frequency for TX will be stored in the memory channel.

MEMORY RECALL AND SCROLL

There are two modes which allow you to retrieve

frequencies and associated data that you stored in a

memory channel: Memory Recall and Memory Scroll.

Memory Recall:

In this mode, the transceiver receives and transmits

using a frequency that you retrieve. You can

temporarily change the frequency and associated

data without overwriting the contents of the memory

channel when Menu No. 06B is set to ON.

Memory Scroll:

Use this mode to check the contents of the memory

channels without changing the current receive

frequency. In this mode, frequencies you retrieve are

not used for receiving and transmitting.

■Memory Recall

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

• The memory channel that was last selected

appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select a memory channel.

• Continuously holding down Mic [UP]/

[DWN] steps the transceiver through the

memory channels until the key is released.

• Memory channels which contain no data are

skipped.

• You cannot change memory channels while

transmitting.

3To exit Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M].

Note: Memory channels can also be changed while using the

TF-SET function.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

■Memory Scroll

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

•The memory channel that was last selected

appears.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to step through the memory channels.

• You can also change channels by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the

numeric keys, then pressing [ENT].

3To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].

• The transceiver re-displays the memory

channel or VFO frequency that was

selected before you activated Memory

Scroll.

Note: Do not press [M.IN] again after entering Memory Scroll

mode. Pressing [M.IN] results in over-writing the current VFO

data to the memory channel you selected.

■Temporary Frequency Changes

After retrieving frequencies and associated data in

Memory Recall mode, you can temporarily change

the data without overwriting the contents of the

memory channel.

1Access Menu No. 06B and select ON.

• Skip this step when changing only the

associated data (not the frequency).

2Recall a memory channel.

3Change the frequencies and associated data.

• Use only the Tuning control to select a

frequency.

4If necessary for future use, store the changed

data in another memory channel. Refer to

“Channel ➡ Channel Transfer” {page 61}.

Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using

the TF-SET function.

MEMORY-VFO SPLIT OPERATION

Under “ENHANCED COMMUNICATIONS” {page 31},

you learned about split-frequency operation using two

VFOs. Recalling a split-frequency channel is another

way to perform split-frequency operation. If you

access Menu No. 06A and select ON, you can also

use a memory channel and a VFO together for this

operation, as follows:

• RX: Memory channel

TX: VFO A or VFO B

• RX: VFO A or VFO B

TX: Memory channel

To use a memory channel for receiving:

1Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.

2Press [A/B] to select the VFO that you will use for

transmitting.

•“tA” or “tB” appears to show which VFO is

selected.

3Select the frequency for transmitting.

4Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M].

5Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory

channel to receive.

6Press [SPLIT].

7The VFO A frequency appears on the sub-display.

If you want to use the VFO B frequency to

transmit, press [SPLIT] again.

8Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the

frequency shown on the sub display.

9Press [SPLIT] to exit the SPLIT operation.

• If Split operation is still selected using VFO A or

VFO B, press [SPLIT] again to exit Split

operation.

To use a memory channel for transmitting:

1Access Menu No. 06A and select ON.

2Recall a memory channel by pressing [VFO/M].

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a memory

channel to transmit.

4Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.

5Press [SPLIT]. The other VFO frequency appears

on the sub display for transmission (Normal SPLIT

operation).

6Press [SPLIT] again. The memory channel you

selected in step 3 appears on the sub-display for

transmission.

7Press [SEND] or Mic [PTT] to transmit on the

frequency in the memory channel.

8Press [SPLIT] to exit SPLIT operation.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY TRANSFER

■Memory \ VFO Transfer

After retrieving frequencies and associated data

from Memory Recall mode, you can copy the data

to the VFO. This function is useful, for example,

when the frequency you want to monitor is near

the frequency stored in a memory channel.

1Recall the desired memory channel.

2Press [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL].

• When a simplex channel is recalled, the

data is copied to VFO A or VFO B,

depending on which VFO was used to recall

the channel.

• When a split channel is recalled, the RX

data is copied to VFO A and the TX data is

copied to VFO B.

Note:

◆

The Memory Channel Lockout status and the subtone

frequency are not copied.

◆

Pressing [M

VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the

retrieved data copies the new data to the VFO.

■Channel \ Channel Transfer

You can also copy channel information from one

memory channel to another. This function is

useful when storing frequencies and associated

data that you temporarily change in Memory

Recall mode.

1Recall the desired memory channel {page 59}.

2Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode, press [CLR].

3Select the memory channel where you would

like the data copied, using the MULTI/ CH

control.

4Press [M.IN] again.

982~00lennahC a982~00lennahC

ycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR

ycneuqerfXT aycneuqerfXT

XRrofedoM aXRrofedoM

XTrofedoM aXTrofedoM

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

petsycneuqerfXR apetsycneuqerfXR

petsycneuqerfXT apetsycneuqerfXT

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

982~00lennahC a992~092lennahC

ycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(

ycneuqerfXT a

XRrofedoM aXR/XTrofedoM )xelpmis(

XTrofedoM a

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

petsycneuqerfXR aycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(pets

petsycneuqerfXT a

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

992~092lennahC a982~00lennahC

ycneuqerfXR/XT aycneuqerfXR

aycneuqerfXT

XR/XTrofedoM aXRrofedoM

aXTrofedoM

ycneuqerftesffO aycneuqerftesffO

noitceridtfihS anoitceridtfihS

FFO/NOesreveR aFFO/NOesreveR

ycneuqerfXR/XT )xelpmis(pets

apetsycneuqerfXR

apetsycneuqerfXT

ycneuqerfenoT aycneuqerfenoT

ycneuqerfSSCTC aycneuqerfSSCTC

edocSCD aedocSCD

SCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO aSCD/SSCTC/enoT FFO/NO

emaNyromeM aemaNyromeM

lennahCyromeM FFO/NOtuokcoL alennahCyromeM FFOtuokcoL

When copying a memory channel 290 ~ 299 a

channel 290 ~ 299, Memory Channel Lockout

status changes to OFF, regardless of the original

channel settings.

The tables above illustrate how data is transferred

between memory channels.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

STORING FREQUENCY RANGES

Memory channels 290 to 299 allow you to store

frequency ranges for VFO tuning and Program Scan.

Program Scan is described in the next chapter. To

tune or scan frequencies within a specified range,

store the start and end frequencies for that range in

advance.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

2Select the desired start frequency.

3Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

• To exit Memory Scroll mode and abort the

storage process, press [CLR].

4Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select a memory channel in the range of

290 to 299.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 290, using the

numeric keys.

5Press [M.IN] to store the start frequency in the

memory channel.

• “CLOSE INPUT” appears on the sub dot-matrix

display.

6Turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH control

to select the end frequency.

7Press [M.IN] to store the end frequency in the

memory channel.

• The previous data stored in the channel is

overwritten.

■Confirming Start/End Frequencies

Use this procedure to check the start and end

frequencies that you stored in channels 290 to 299.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN] to select a memory channel from

290 to 299.

3Press [–] to check the start frequency and [+]

to check the end frequency.

■Programmable VFO

Using the start and end frequencies that you

stored in channels 290 to 299, Programmable

VFO restricts the frequency range that you can

tune with the Tuning control. One application of

this function is to help you operate within the

authorized frequency limits of your license.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN] to select a memory channel from

290 to 299.

Now you can only tune from the start frequency to

the end frequency, using the Tuning control.

Note: Pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN] or turning the MULTI/ CH

control results changing the memory channel number while in

Programmable VFO mode.

Memory Channel Lockout

You can lock out memory channels that you prefer

not to monitor during Memory Scan. Memory Scan is

described in the next chapter {page 68}.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select the memory channel.

3Press [CLR] momentarily.

• Pressing [CLR] for more than approximately

2 seconds erases the contents of the

memory channel.

• A dot appears beside the right-most digit of the

memory channel number to indicate the

channel has been locked out.

• Repeatedly pressing [CLR] toggles between

adding and removing the channel from the

scan list.

ERASING MEMORY CHANNELS

If there are memory channels that you will not recall

in the future, you may prefer erasing the contents of

those channels.

1Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select the memory channel.

• You can also select a channel by entering a

3-digit number, such as 012, using the numeric

keys.

3Press and hold [CLR] for approximately two

seconds.

• A long beep sounds to confirm that the channel

data has been erased.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY CHANNEL NAME

You can assign a name to each memory channel. A

maximum of 7 alpha-numeric characters can be

stored.

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN] to select a memory channel.

3Press [DISP].

4Press [+]/ [–] or turn the MULTI/ CH control to

select the desired alpha-numeric character. You

can move the cursor to the left by pressing

[MAIN], or to the right by pressing [SUB]. Or, you

can use an optional DTMF microphone to enter

alpha-numeric characters.

Note: Alpha-numeric entries are limited to those characters

shown in the following DTMF character table when you are using

a DTMF Mic.

5After selecting all the necessary characters for the

memory channel name, press [M.IN] to store the

name, or press [DISP] to select a Memory Group.

You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9).

Enter the desired group number by pressing a

numeric key. The selected group is shown in a

larger font. After selecting a group, press [M.IN]

to store the name and group number in the

memory channel.

6When you recall a memory channel with a name,

the name is displayed on the dot-matrix display

along with the memory channel number and group

number {page 64}.

Alpha-numeric characters

ABCDEFGH I J

KLMNOPQRST

UVWXY Z [ \ ] ^

_`abcdefgh

i j k lmnopqr

stuvwxyz{ |

}~ PS!"#$%&’

()*+,–./01

23456789: ;

<=>?@

ÀÁÂÃÄÅÆÇÈÉ

ÊËÌÍÎÏ ÑÒÓ

ÔÕÖ ØÙÚÛÜ

ßŒàáâãäåæ

çèéêëìíîï

ñòóôõöœøùú

ûü Ÿÿ

Additional characters for all E-types

Available characters

Available characters using a DTMF Mic

FMTD yek sretcarahcelbaliavA

1qz1QZ

2abc2ABC

3def3DEF

4ghi4GHI

5jkl5JKL

6mno6MNO

7 p r s 7PRS

8 tuv8TUV

9wxy9WXY

0ecaps0

?! ' .,–/

&# ( ) <> ;

:"@

*noitcnufoN

AthgirrosrucehtevoM

BtfelrosrucehtevoM

CretcarahcdetcelesehteteleD

DsaemaS ]NI.M[]NI.M[ ]NI.M[ ]NI.M[]NI.M[ yek

13 MEMORY FEATURES

MEMORY GROUP

To manage 300 memory channels, you can divide

them up into a maximum of 10 groups (Groups 0 to 9).

After you configure a Memory Group, you can select

one or more of the Memory Groups you want to recall,

in Memory Recall mode. As a default, all memory

channels are stored in Group 0.

To change the Memory Channel Group:

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Select the desired memory channel for which you

want to change the Memory Group by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

3Press [DISP].

• The Memory Name input prompt appears.

4Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a

Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN] or [SUB]

{page 63}.

• The current Memory Group appears in a larger

font.

5Press a numeric key to change the selected

Group number. The newly selected Group

number appears in a larger font.

6Press [M.IN] to store the settings.

■Memory Group Select

After you configure Memory Groups to the Memory

Channels, you can select one or more of the Groups

to be recalled in Memory Recall mode.

To select Memory Groups:

1Press [FUNC], [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL] to enter

Memory Group Select mode.

2Numbers 0 ~ 9 appear in the main dot-matrix

display. The selected Memory Group numbers are

displayed in larger fonts. To change the selection,

press a numeric key. To select all the Memory

Groups, press [•/ DCS/SEL]. At least, one

Memory Group must be selected.

3Press [M.IN] to save the setting and exit.

4You can now recall only the selected Memory

Groups in Memory Recall mode.

QUICK MEMORY

Quick memory is designed to quickly and temporarily

save data without specifying a particular memory

channel. Use Quick memory to store data you will

not use in future operating sessions. For example, as

you tune across the band looking for DX, it is

convenient to store stations that you want to contact.

You can quickly jump between several different

memory channels as you monitor them.

This transceiver provides ten Quick memory channels

(“0_” to “9_”) that can store the following data:

dnaycneuqerfAOFV edomgnitarepo dnaycneuqerfBOFV edomgnitarepo

FFO/NOreviecer-buS ycneuqerfreviecer-buS edomgnitarepodna

FFO/NOTIRFFO/NOTIX

ycneuqerftesffoTIX/TIRhtdiwdnabretlifrevieceR

FFO/NOreknalBesioNFFO/NOENIF

noitcudeResioNPSD 2/1/FFO lecnaCtaeBPSD FFO/NO

hctoNotuAPSD FFO/NO snoitcnufXR/XT

STORING INTO QUICK MEMORY

Each time you store a new frequency, all previously

stored frequencies are bumped to the next respective

Quick memory channel. When all ten memory

channels contain frequencies, storing one more

frequency bumps the contents of memory channel 9

off the stack (the data is lost).

The following diagram illustrates how the Quick

Memory stacks the data in memory each time you

press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

24.911

Memory 0

144.005

Memory 1

14.235

Memory 2

441.250

Memory 3

18.111

Memory 4

50.015

Memory 5

7.082

Memory 6

29.610

Memory 7

3.545

Memory 8

145.250

Memory 9

21.005

Memory 0

24.911

Memory 1

144.005

Memory 2

14.235

Memory 3

441.250

Memory 4

18.111

Memory 5

50.015

Memory 6

7.082

Memory 7

29.610

Memory 8

3.545

Memory 9

14.085

Memory 0

21.005

Memory 1

24.911

Memory 2

144.005

Memory 3

14.235

Memory 4

441.250

Memory 5

18.111

Memory 6

50.015

Memory 7

7.082

Memory 8

29.610

Memory 9

New data

Note: To use the Quick memory channels, you must operate both

the main transceiver and the sub-receiver in VFO mode. If you are

using the Quick memory channels while the sub-receiver is turned

off, its last operating mode must be VFO mode. Turning the

sub-receiver off while it is recalling a memory channel will not allow

you to use the Quick memory function.

13 MEMORY FEATURES

You can store data in the Quick Memory only when

you operate both the main transceiver and the

sub-receiver in VFO mode.

1Select the frequency, mode, etc. on the main

transceiver or sub-receiver VFO.

2Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• Each time QUICK MEMO [M.IN] is pressed,

the current VFO data is written to the Quick

Memory.

Note: When RIT or XIT is ON, this ON status and the offset will

also be stored.

RECALLING QUICK MEMORY CHANNELS

You can recall a Quick Memory channel only when

you operate both the main transceiver and the

sub-receiver in VFO mode.

1Press QUICK MEMO [MR].

• The current memory channel number appears.

• If there is no data stored in any Quick memory

channel, the data cannot be recalled to the

current VFO, an error beep sounds.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick

memory channel (0 to 9).

• You cannot change memory channels while

transmitting.

3To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.

Note: Memory channels cannot be changed while using the

TF-SET function.

TEMPORARY FREQUENCY CHANGES

After recalling a Quick memory channel, you can

temporarily change the data without overwriting the

contents of the channel. You can change the

frequency even when you select OFF in Menu

No. 06B.

1Press QUICK MEMO [MR].

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select a Quick

memory channel (0 to 9).

3Change the frequencies and associated data.

4To store the changed data in the Quick memory,

press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

•This action stores the new data in the current

channel and bumps the old frequency to the

next higher Quick memory channel.

5To exit, press QUICK MEMO [MR] again.

Note: Memory channel data can also be changed while using

the TF-SET function.

QUICK MEMORY ➡ VFO TRANSFER

This function copies the contents of the recalled

memory channel to the VFO.

1Recall a Quick Memory channel.

2Press [Mss

sVFO/ MG.SEL].

Note: Pressing [M

VFO/ MG.SEL] after temporarily changing the

recalled data copies the new data to the VFO.

SCAN

Scan is a useful function for hands-off monitoring of

your favorite frequencies. By becoming comfortable

with all types of Scan, you will increase your operating

efficiency.

This transceiver provides the following types of scans.

epyTnacS esopruP

lamroN nacS

nacSOFV ehtfodnaberitneehtsnacS detcelesuoyycneuqerf

margorP nacS

ycneuqerfcificepsehtsnacS yromeMniderotssegnar 992~092slennahc

nacSzHM nihtiwseicneuqerfehtsnacS egnarzHM1a

yromeM nacS

lennahC-llA nacS ,slennahcyromeMllasnacS 992ot00morf

nacSpuorG yromeMcificepsehtsnacS spuorglennahc

llaC nacS

OFV dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS ycneuqerfOFVtnerruceht

yromeM lennahC dnalennahcllaCehtsnacS lennahcyromeMdetceleseht

lausiV *nacS

OFV

gnitarepotnerrucehtsnacS asallewsaycneuqerf forebmundeificeps wolebdnaevobaseicneuqerf langisehT.ycneuqerftaht silennahchcaefohtgnerts hparg-rabanideyalpsid

yromeM lennahC

slennahcyromeMehtsnacS langisehtsyalpsiddna anilennahchcaefohtgnerts hparg-rab

*Visual Scan graphically shows how frequencies in a specific range

are busy.

Note:

◆

While using CTCSS or DCS, Scan stops only for the signals that

contain the same CTCSS tone or DCS code that you selected.

◆

When using S-meter Squelch, Scan stops when the received

signal strength matches or exceeds the S-meter setting. Scan

resumes 2 seconds after the signal level drops below the S-meter

setting.

◆

Pressing and holding Mic [PTT] causes Scan to stop if it is

functioning on a non TX band. Pressing Mic [PTT] on the

scanning band causes Scan to stop.

◆

Starting Scan switches OFF the Automatic Simplex Checker.

NORMAL SCAN

When you are operating the transceiver in VFO mode,

2 types of scanning are available.

• VFO Scan

The transceiver scans the entire band of the

frequency you selected. For example, if you are

operating and receiving on the main transceiver’s

VFO A at 14.195.00 MHz, it scans all the

frequencies in the range of 30.00 kHz to

60.00000 MHz. (Refer to VFO frequency range

in the Specifications.)

• Program Scan

By programming the start and end frequency in

Memory channels 290 ~ 299 {page 62}, you can

limit the scanning frequency range. Since there

are 10 memory channels (290 ~ 299) available for

specifying the start and end frequency, you can

select one or more (a maximum of 10) ranges to

scan. This is useful when you are waiting for a DX

station on a certain frequency but the station may

appear on slightly higher or lower frequency.

VFO SCAN

VFO Scan scans the entire frequency range that is

available for the current VFO. When the Program

Scan frequency range is not programmed or no Scan

Group is selected for the Program Scan, the

transceiver also scans the entire frequency range

available for the current VFO.

If one or more Program Scan frequency ranges are

programmed in memory channels 290 to 299:

1Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

2If one or more memory channels are selected for

the Program Scan, the selected channels are

displayed in a larger font on the main dot-matrix

display.

In this case, press [•/ DCS/SEL] to temporarily

deselect all the channels. When there are no Scan

Group channels selected, “VFO SCN MODE”

appears on the sub dot-matrix display.

3Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to the current

VFO mode.

4Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the VFO Scan.

Note:

◆

While scanning, you can change the scan speed by turning the

RIT/ SUB control. Turn the control clockwise/ counterclockwise

to decrease/ increase the scan speed. The speed indicator

appears on the main dot-matrix display, where P1 is the fastest

speed and P9 is the slowest.

◆

You cannot change the VFO Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the VFO Scan speed on the sub-receiver.

14 SCAN

PROGRAM SCAN

Program Scan monitors the range between the start

and end frequencies that you have stored in

Conventional memory channels 290 to 299. Refer to

“STORING FREQUENCY RANGES” {page 62} for

details on how to store the start and end frequencies.

You can select a maximum of 10 memory channels

(Memory channels 290 to 299) and sequentially scan

the ranges that you stored in these channels. Program

Scan starts with the smallest channel number and

repeats the sequence as described below.

1Press [A/B] to select VFO A or VFO B.

• If you are operating the sub-receiver, press

[VFO/M] to select VFO mode.

2Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

3If no Program scan channel is selected, all memory

channel numbers (from 290 to 299) are displayed in

small fonts. Only the one’s digit of each memory

channel is displayed on the main dot-matrix display.

0 represents channel 290, 1 represents channel 291,

2 represents channel 292, etc.

4To select the Program scan frequency range,

press a numeric key 0 to 9. For example, press

[3] for channel 293 only or press [3], [5], [7] to

select channels 293, 295, and 297. When a

channel is selected for the Program Scan, the

number is displayed in a larger font.

To temporarily deselect all the channels (290 to 299)

so that you can perform the VFO Scan, press

[•/ DCS/SEL] (Refer to “VFO SCAN” on page 66).

Note:

◆

At least one of the valid Program Scan channels (from 290 to 299)

must be programmed and selected to perform the Program Scan.

If no Program channel is selected or available for the Program

Scan, the transceiver performs the VFO Scan.

◆

When performing the Program Scan on the sub-receiver, the

frequencies must be within the sub-receiver frequency range

limitations. Otherwise, the Program Scan cannot be performed.

The same conditions apply to the main transceiver.

5Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program

Scan.

• To quickly move towards a desired frequency

while scanning, turn the Tuning control or the

MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

• When in a mode other than FM mode, turning

the RIT/ SUB control clockwise decreases the

scan speed, and counterclockwise increases

the speed. The current scan speed is shown

on the display; P1 is the fastest speed and P9

is the slowest.

• While in FM mode, Scan automatically stops

on a frequency where a signal is present. The

transceiver will either remain on that channel

for a short time (Time-operated mode) or until

the signal drops out (Carrier-operated mode),

depending on which mode you select via Menu

No. 10 {page 68}.

6To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Program

Scan, the sub-receiver automatically skips the memory channels

that cannot be scanned on the sub-receiver. The same

conditions also apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,

far beyond the squelch threshold when in FM mode, Scan may

fail to stop at a channel where a signal is present. If this

happens, turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control slightly

counterclockwise.

◆

If you press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] before storing any frequency range

for memory channels 290 to 299, the transceiver starts VFO

scan.

◆

When the current receive frequency is within one of the ranges

that you selected with channel numbers, Scan starts with the

current frequency. The operating mode stored in the memory

channel is used.

◆

When the current receive frequency is outside all the ranges that

you selected with the channel numbers, Scan starts with the start

frequency stored in the smallest channel number.

◆

The operating mode can be changed while scanning, but the

memory channel is overwritten with the changed mode.

◆

When the current Scan range is smaller than a single step of the

MULTI/ CH control, turning the control clockwise causes Scan to

jump to the start frequency, and counterclockwise to the end

frequency.

◆

Starting Program Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.

◆

While in FM mode, the Program Scan monitors rounded off

frequencies regardless of the Menu No. 04 setting.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

PROGRAM SCAN PARTIALLY SLOWED

You can specify a maximum of 5 frequency points for

each memory channel from 290 to 299 so that the

Program Scan slows down the scanning speed. To

specify the slow down frequency points, first program

the start and end frequencies into a memory channel

(290 ~ 299) {page 62}.

1Access Menu No. 07 to confirm that the function is

ON (default is ON).

2You can further configure the slow down frequency

width. Access Menu No. 08 to select the range

from 100 Hz to 500 Hz (default is 300 Hz).

Note: If you select, for example, 500 Hz for Menu No. 08, the

Program Scan slows down to a

500 Hz width, centering the

frequency you marked below.

3Press [VFO/M] to recall the memory channel

(290 ~ 299) for which you want to specify the

scan slow down frequencies.

4Press [–]/ [+] to confirm the start ([–]) or end ([+])

frequency.

5Turn the Tuning control to the center frequency

point that you want the Program Scan to slow

down. Press QUICK MEMO [M.IN] to mark the

Slow down frequency point. The “ ” icon appears.

14 SCAN

6Repeat step 5 to specify the center slow down

frequency points. You can specify a maximum of

5 frequency points for each channel.

7If you want to clear the slow down frequency

points that you previously stored, press and hold

QUICK MEMO [M.IN] for 1 second.

A confirmation beep sounds and the transceiver

clears all the slow down frequency points you

specified in the memory channel.

Note: You must clear all the previous slow down frequency

points; you cannot clear only specific points.

8Press [VFO/M] to return to VFO mode.

9Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start the Program Scan

with the slow down frequency point(s).

Note:

◆

During the Program Scan, you can turn the RIT/ SUB control to

adjust the scanning speed. Turn the control clockwise/ counter-

clockwise to slow down/ speed up the scan. The Program Scan

speed indicator appears on the main dot-matrix display during

the Program Scan; P1 is the fastest speed and P9 is the slowest.

◆

You cannot change the Program Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

◆

You cannot specify the Program Scan slow down frequency point

for FM mode.

SCAN HOLD

This function stops Program Scan for approximately

5 seconds, then resumes Scan when you jump to the

desired frequency by turning the Tuning control or the

MULTI/ CH control, or by pressing Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

To use this function, access Menu No. 09, and select

ON. The default is OFF.

MHz SCAN

When you operate the main transceiver or sub-

receiver in VFO mode, you can scan an entire 1 MHz

frequency range within the current VFO frequency.

1Press [VFO/M] to select VFO mode.

2Select the desired frequency to perform the MHz

Scan. If you want to scan the entire 145 MHz

frequency, for example, select 145.650 MHz.

Scan will operate between 145.00000 MHz and

145.99999 MHz.

3Press and hold [1MHz/ SEL] to start the MHz Scan.

4Turn the RIT/ SUB control to adjust the scan

speed.

5To stop the MHz Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or

[CLR].

Note:

◆

You cannot change the MHz Scan speed in FM mode.

◆

You cannot change the scan speed on the sub-receiver.

MEMORY SCAN

Memory Scan monitors all memory channels in which

you have stored frequencies (All-channel Scan) or only

a desired group of memory channels (Group Scan).

Scan automatically stops at a channel where a signal

is present, regardless of the operating mode. The

transceiver will either remain on that channel for a

short time (Time-operated mode) or until the signal

drops out (Carrier-operated mode). Use Menu No. 10

to select either mode. The default is Time-operated.

SCAN RESUME METHOD

The transceiver stops scanning at the frequency (or

memory channel) where a signal is detected. It then

continues scanning according to which resume mode

you have selected. You can choose one of the

following modes. The default is Time-operated mode.

• Time-Operated mode

The transceiver remains on a busy frequency (or

memory channel) for approximately 6 seconds,

then continues to scan, even if the signal is still

present.

• Carrier-Operated mode

The transceiver remains on the busy frequency (or

memory channel) until the signal drops out. There

is a 2 second delay between signal dropout and

scan resumption.

1Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu No. 10.

3Press [+]/ [–] to select TO (Time-Operated) or CO

(Carrier-Operated).

4Press [MENU] to complete the setting and exit

Menu mode.

You can lock out the memory channels that you

prefer not to monitor while scanning. To do this, refer

to “Memory Channel Lockout” {page 62}.

ALL-CHANNEL SCAN

Use the following procedure to scan all the memory

channels that contain frequency data in sequence,

ignoring the Memory Group number.

1Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode

via Menu No. 10.

2Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

3Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust

the squelch threshold.

4Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan

Group Select mode.

• The selected Groups appear in a larger font.

5Press [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all Groups so that

the transceiver scans the memory channel

sequentially, ignoring the Memory Group number

data.

14 SCAN

6Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to return to Memory

Recall mode.

7Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to start All-channel Scan.

• Scan starts from the current memory channel

and ascends up through the channel numbers

(scan direction cannot be changed).

• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,

turn the MULTI/ CH control, or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN].

8To stop Scan, press [SCAN] or [CLR].

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Memory

Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels

that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same

conditions apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,

far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a

channel where a signal is present. If this happens, turn the SQL

control slightly counterclockwise.

◆

Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.

GROUP SCAN

For the purpose of Group Scan, the 300 memory

channels can be divided into 10 groups so that you

can select one or more groups to be scanned,

depending on the situation.

When you store frequency data in a memory channel

{page 58}, the transceiver automatically adds the

default Group 0 (zero), to the memory channel data.

To recall the existing memory channel data and

revise the Group number:

1Press [M.IN] to enter Memory Scroll mode.

2Select the desired memory channel by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

3Press [DISP].

• The Memory Name input prompt appears.

Press [DISP] again to skip the input or enter a

Memory Name using [+]/ [–] and [MAIN] or

[SUB] {page 63}.

4Press the desired Group number ([0] to [9]) using

the numeric keypad. The selected Group number

appears in a larger font.

Note: You can select only one of 10 groups (0 to 9) for each

memory channel.

5Press [M.IN] to store and overwrite the new

channel data to the memory channel.

6Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each memory

channel you want to assign to a specific group.

You can select a maximum of 10 groups and

sequentially scan the channels that belong to those

groups. Group Scan starts with the smallest group

number and repeats the sequence, for example,

group 3 ➞ group 5 ➞ group 7 ➞ group 3.

1Select Time-operated or Carrier-operated mode

via Menu No. 10.

2Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

3Turn the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control to adjust

the squelch threshold.

4Press [FUNC], [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to enter Scan

Group Select mode. Then, using the numeric

keypad, enter the group numbers you want to

scan. i.e.- Press [3] for group 3, or press [3], [5],

[7] for groups 3, 5, and 7. The selected Memory

Groups appear in a larger font.

5Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] to exit Scan Group Select

mode.

6Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] again to start Memory

Group Scan.

• Scan ascends up through the channel numbers

(scan direction cannot be changed).

• To jump to a desired channel while scanning,

turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN].

7To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

After using Group Scan, press [FUNC],

[SCAN/ SG.SEL], then [•/ DCS/SEL] to deselect all

the Group numbers you selected in step 4. This

returns you to All-channel Scan (factory default).

Note:

◆

If you are operating on the sub-receiver and perform the Group

Scan, the transceiver automatically skips the memory channels

that cannot be received by the sub-receiver. The same

conditions apply to the main transceiver.

◆

If you have turned the MAIN SQL or SUB SQL control clockwise,

far beyond the squelch threshold, Scan may fail to stop at a

channel in which a signal is present. If this happens, turn the

SQL control slightly counterclockwise.

◆

When the current channel is within one of the groups that you

selected, Scan starts with the current channel.

◆

When the current channel is outside all the groups that you

selected, Scan starts with the group number that is larger than

and closest to the group number of the current channel.

◆

Starting Memory Scan switches OFF the RIT and XIT functions.

CALL SCAN

A Call channel can be stored for each operating

band, such as HF, 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz

and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000 Optional) bands. You can

monitor one of these Call channels and the current

operating frequency alternatively.

1Select the frequency you want to monitor.

• In VFO mode, press [A/B] to select VFO A or B

for the main transceiver or press [SUB] or

[CTRL] to select the sub-receiver VFO. Then,

turn the Tuning control or the MULTI/ CH

control to select the desired frequency.

• In Memory Recall mode, press [VFO/M] to

select the memory channel you want to monitor

by turning the MULTI/ CH control.

2Press [CALL/ C.IN] to recall the Call channel for

the frequency band.

14 SCAN

3Press [SCAN/ SG.SEL].

4The Call channel and the selected VFO frequency

or memory channel are monitored alternatively.

5To stop Scan, press [SCAN/ SG.SEL] or [CLR].

VISUAL SCAN

While you are receiving, Visual Scan allows you to

monitor frequencies near the current operating

frequency. Visual Scan graphically displays how all

frequencies in the selected range are busy. You will

see a maximum of 7 segments, for each frequency

(channel) point that represent relative S-meter levels.

Determine the scan range by selecting the center

frequency and the number of channels. The default

number of channels is 61.

■Using Visual Scan (VFO)

1Select the desired band for Visual Scan.

2Turn the Tuning control, or press Mic [UP]/

[DWN], to select the operating frequency.

• This frequency will be used as the center

frequency.

3Press and hold [DISP] for approximately

1 second to start Visual Scan (VFO).

• The center frequency is displayed on the

main frequency display and the current

scanning frequency is displayed on the sub

frequency display. The operating mode and

the number of channels to be scanned are

displayed on the main dot-matrix display.

The sub dot-matrix display shows the

relative S-meter level of each frequency

point, vertically.

• To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears

on the main dot-matrix display. While the

Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the

paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to

resume the Visual Scan.

4To change the current scanning frequency, turn

the Tuning control or press Mic [UP]/ [DWN].

• The displayed frequency changes and the

cursor moves.

• Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current

scanning frequency the new center

frequency.

• You can move the frequency using the Tuning

control. If you want to revert to the original

center frequency, press [FM/ AM/ NAR].

5To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or

[SCAN/ SG.SEL].

■Changing the Number of Channels to Scan

1Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu

No. 11.

3Press [+]/ [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or

181 channels for the number of channels to

scan.

4Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note:

◆

The current frequency step of the MULTI/ CH control is used

for the Visual Scan.

◆

While performing the Visual Scan, the DUAL WATCH

function {page 47} is temporarily disabled unless you are

using the 144 MHz or 430/ 440 MHz in FM or AM mode and

the Control Band for the main transceiver.

◆

If you start the Visual Scan from the frequency on the sub-

receiver, the frequency is transferred to the main display,

then the Visual Scan starts.

◆

If you start the Visual Scan in Memory Recall mode, the

memory channel frequencies will be scanned.

◆

Visual Scan stops when you transmit.

◆

Depending on the transceiver conditions, Visual Scan and

the S-meter level may differ.

■Using Visual Scan (Memory Channel)

1Press [MENU] to enter Menu mode.

2Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select Menu

No. 11.

3Press [+]/ [–] to select 31, 61 (default), 91 or

181 channels for the number of channels to

scan.

4Press [VFO/M] to enter Memory Recall mode.

5Press and hold [DISP] for approximately

1 second to start Visual Scan (Memory

Channel).

• The center memory channel number is

displayed on the main frequency display

and the current scanning frequency is

displayed on the sub frequency display.

The operating mode of the center memory

channel and the number of channels to be

scanned are displayed on the main dot-

matrix display. The sub dot-matrix display

shows the relative S-meter level of each

frequency point, vertically.

• To pause Scan, press [DISP]. “P” appears

on the main dot-matrix display. While the

Visual Scan is paused, you can monitor the

paused frequency. Press [DISP] again to

resume the Visual Scan.

14 SCAN

6To change the current scanning frequency,

turn the MULTI/ CH control or press Mic

[UP]/ [DWN].

• The displayed memory channel number

changes and the cursor moves.

• Press [1MHz/ SEL] to make the current

scanning frequency the new center

scanning channel.

7To quit Visual Scan, press [CLR] or

[SCAN/ SG.SEL].

OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

APO (Auto Power OFF)

You can set the TS-2000(X) to switch OFF

automatically if no keys or controls are pressed or

adjusted for a certain period of time. 1 minute before

the transceiver switches OFF, “CHECK” is output in

Morse code. You can select the time from OFF, 60,

120, and 180 minutes.

Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 57.

Select the APO time from OFF, 60, 120, or 180

minutes.

Note:

◆

The APO function works even if the transceiver is scanning.

◆

The APO timer starts counting down the timer when no key

presses, no control adjustments, and no command (RS-232C

port) sequences are detected.

AUTOMATIC ANTENNA TUNER

As explained in “ANTENNA CONNECTION” {page 1},

matching the impedance of the coaxial cable and

antenna is important. To adjust the impedance

between the antenna and the transceiver, you have

the choice of using the internal tuner or an external

tuner. This section describes how to use the internal

tuner. For the external tuner, consult the instruction

manual that comes with the tuner.

1Select the transmit frequency.

2Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or

ANT 2.

• If an external tuner is connected to the ANT 1

connector, select ANT 2 to use the internal

antenna tuner. The internal antenna tuner is

automatically bypassed if an external antenna

tuner is connected to ANT 1.

3Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.

•“AT” appears, indicating that the internal

tuner is in-line (not bypassed).

4Press [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second.

• CW mode is selected and tuning begins.

•“” blinks and the MAIN band LED lights red.

• To cancel tuning, press [AT/ ANT1/2] again.

• If the SWR of the antenna system is extremely

high (more than 10:1), an alarm (“SWR” in

Morse code) sounds and the internal tuner is

bypassed. Before attempting to tune again,

adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR.

5See the display and check that tuning has

successfully finished.

ALT (Auto Lock Tuning)

The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) allows the transceiver to

adjust the center receiving frequency automatically

when you operate on the 1.2 GHz band in FM mode.

When the receiving audio signal is distorted or breaking

up, turn this function on to adjust the center receiving

frequency. Some old 1.2 GHz transceivers do not have

stable and precise oscillating circuits and tend to be

slightly off (drifted from) the displayed frequency.

Press [FUNC], [XIT/ ALT] to toggle between the ALT

function ON or OFF.

• “ALT” appears when the function is ON.

Note: The ALT (Auto Lock Tuning) works only on the 1.2 GHz band

in FM mode.

ANTENNAS

HF/ 50 MHz Band

Two antenna connectors are available for the HF/

50 MHz band on the rear panel {page 13}. When you

operate the main transceiver on these frequencies,

you can select one of 2 antennas.

Press [FUNC], [AT/ ANT1/2] to select ANT 1 or ANT 2

for the main transceiver.

•“ ” or “ ” appears to indicate which

antenna is selected.

The ANT 1/ANT 2 setting will automatically be stored

in the antenna band memory. Next time you select

the same band, the same antenna will be

automatically selected.

)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFnoitceleSannetnA

5.2~30.01.4~5.2

5.7~1.45.01~5.7

5.41~5.015.81~5.41

5.12~5.815.52~5.12

0.03~5.520.06~0.03

Note: Connect an external antenna tuner to the ANT 1 connector

only, then select ANT 1. The internal tuner will be automatically

bypassed when the transceiver is switched ON.

VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz Band

When you select the VHF, UHF, or 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/

TS-B2000 optional) band on the main transceiver

and/or the sub-receiver, the following antenna is

automatically selected based on the operating

frequencies.

reviecsnartNIAM )zHM( reviecer-BUS )zHM(

441TNA

)epyt-K(251~241 )sepyt-EllA(641~441

)epyt-K(471~811 )epyt-K(003~022 )sepyt-EllA(641~441

034TNA

)epyt-K(054~024 )sepyt-EllA(044~034 )epyt-K(215~003 )sepyt-EllA(044~034

G2.1TNA

)sepytllA(0031~0421

A/N

Note: The same antenna is shared and used when the main

transceiver and sub-receiver are on the same band. The frequency

coverage varies depending on the market codes.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

• If the tuning was successful, “AT ” stops

blinking and the MAIN band red LED turns off.

• If tuning does not finish within approximately

20 seconds, an alarm (“5” in Morse code)

sounds. Press [AT/ ANT1/2] to stop the alarm

and tuning.

If you access Menu No. 27 and select ON, received

signals will also pass through the internal tuner.

When this function is ON, “ ” appears. This may

reduce interference on the receive frequency.

Note:

◆

The internal tuner will not tune outside the available transmission

frequency limits.

◆

Pressing [AT/ ANT1/2] for more than one second while

transmitting, interrupts transmitting and starts tuning.

◆

If you would like to use a separate receiving antenna, access

Menu No. 18 and switch it ON. When this function is ON,

received signals bypass the internal antenna tuner.

◆

While using CW Full Break-in, the internal tuner will be in-line for

both transmitting and receiving.

◆

Tuning automatically turns OFF in approximately 60 seconds.

“AT” disappears and the error beeps stop.

◆

Tuning may still continue when the SWR meter indicates 1:1.

This happens due to the tuning algorithm; this is not a

malfunction.

◆

Even though the SWR meter shows more than one segment, the

internal tuner may not retune. This happens because of an SWR

calculation algorithm tolerance between 10 W (approx.) transmit

power for tuning and 100 W transmit power.

◆

If tuning does not finish even though the SWR meter indicates

smaller than 3:1, adjust the antenna system to lower the SWR,

then attempt to tune again.

◆

Tuning may not reach an SWR of 1:1, depending on the

transceiver conditions.

■Presetting

After each successful tuning session, the AT

Preset memory function stores the position of the

tuning capacitor in the memory. The position of

the capacitor is stored for each of the antenna

tuner bands (see the following table) and for each

antenna connector (ANT 1 and ANT 2).

Press [AT/ ANT1/2] momentarily.

•“AT” will appear, showing that the internal

tuner is in-line (not bypassed).

• Each time you go across the antenna tuner

band, the AT Preset memory is automatically

recalled to position the tuning capacitor without

the need for retuning. If no preset data exists

for a particular band/antenna combination, then

the default data of 50Ω is used.

Note: Tuning may restart in order to obtain the optimum

matching condition even though the current antenna tuner band

has the preset data.

)zHM(egnaRycneuqerFteserPTA

58.1~30.005.2~58.1

525.3~05.2575.3~525.3

527.3~575.301.4~527.3

30.7~01.401.7~30.7

05.7~01.705.01~05.7

01.41~05.0105.41~01.41

05.81~05.4151.12~05.81

05.12~51.1205.52~05.12

00.92~05.5200.03~00.92

00.15~00.0300.25~00.15

00.35~00.2500.06~00.35

ATTENUATOR

The attenuator function is useful when extremely

strong signals exist nearby your receiving frequency.

When these type of signals exist nearby your

receiving frequency, the AGC function may be

erroneously controlled by the strong signals, rather

than by the target receiving signal. If this happens,

the target receiving signal can be masked and buried

by the strong signals. In this case, turn the

Attenuator function ON.

1Press [ATT/ F LOCK].

2“ATT” appears.

To return to the normal operation, press [ATT/ F LOCK]

again.

Note: If the same band is selected for both the main transceiver and

the sub-receiver, the Attenuator function is on for both receivers.

AUTO MODE

You can configure a maximum of 29 points (HF/

50 MHz), 9 points (144 MHz band), 9 points (430

(440) MHz band), and 9 points (1.2 GHz band) of the

main transceiver VFO (VFO A and B) frequencies to

change the operating mode automatically when you

change the frequency.

As a default, the following modes are programmed on

each operating band.

HF/ 50 MHz band

0.03 ~ 9.5 MHz: LSB

9.5 MHz ~ 60 MHz: USB

144 MHz band

142 ~ 152 MHz: FM

430 (440) MHz band

420 ~ 450 MHz: FM

1.2 GHz band (optional)

1240 ~ 1300 MHz: FM

To add the frequency points to the Auto Mode

selection:

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

The next table is an example of adding 4 frequency

points into memory. With this setup, the transceiver

selects AM mode below 1.62 MHz, CW mode from

1.62 MHz to 2.0 MHz, LSB mode from 2.0 MHz to

9.5 MHz, FM mode from 9.5 MHz to 53.0 MHz and

USB mode from 53.0 MHz to 60.0 MHz. If multiple

data contains the same frequency but a different

mode is entered into memory, the lowest numbered

memory channel is reflected as the Auto Mode.

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM26.1 MA

zHM30.0≤<MA zHM26.1

zHM26.1≤<WC zHM0.2

zHM0.2

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤<MF zHM0.35

zHM0.35

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM0.2 WC

2zHM0.7 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM0.35 MF

To activate the AUTO MODE function, press [FUNC],

[LSB/ USB/ AUTO].

BEEP FUNCTION

The Beep function provides you confirmation of entry,

error status, and malfunctions of the transceiver.

Although you can turn the beep function OFF by

accessing Menu No. 12, we recommend you leave it

ON in order to detect unexpected errors and

malfunctions.

You can also change the output level of the beeps by

accessing Menu No. 12 and selecting 1 to 9.

The transceiver generates Morse code to tell you

which mode is selected when you change operating

modes.

When you change operating Modes, the following

Morse code sounds:

edoM tuptuOedoCesroM

BSL··–·)L(

BSU–··)U(

WC·–·–)C(

R-WC·–··–·–)RC(

KSF·–·)R(

R-KSF·–··–·)RR(

NMA/MA–·)A(

NMF/MF·–··)F(

1Press and hold [USB/ LSB/ AUTO]+[ ]

(POWER) to turn the transceiver ON.

2Press [+] or [–] to select the band to add the

frequency points.

3Select a memory channel number by turning the

MULTI/ CH control.

4Turn the Tuning control to select a desired

frequency point to change the operating mode.

Or, press [ENT] to enter the desired frequency

point {page 37} using the numeric keys.

5Press one of the mode keys to select the desired

operating mode.

• The selected mode appears on the main dot-

matrix display.

6Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have added all the

data.

7Press [CLR] to store the data.

The table below shows the default Auto Mode

frequency points for the HF/ 50 MHz band. When

you activate the Auto Mode selection by pressing

[FUNC], [LSB/ USB/ AUTO], the transceiver

automatically selects the mode; LSB for frequencies

below 9.5 MHz and USB for frequencies greater than

or equal to 9.5 MHz.

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM5.9 BSL

zHM30.0

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM5.9 BSL

2zHM5.9 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM5.9 BSL

The table below is an example of how to add the

frequency point of 1.62 MHz/ AM into memory. With

this set up, the transceiver selects AM mode below

1.62 MHz, LSB mode from 1.62 MHz to 9.5 MHz and

USB mode from 9.5 MHz to 60.0 MHz.

.oNlennahC ataD edomgnitarepO

0zHM26.1 MA zHM30.0≤<MA zHM26.1

zHM26.1

≤<BSL zHM5.9

zHM5.9

≤BSU ≤

zHM0.06

1zHM5.9 BSL

2zHM5.9 BSL

3zHM5.9 BSL

•

••

•

82 zHM5.9 BSL

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

The transceiver also generates the following warning,

confirmation, and malfunction beeps.

speeB snaemtitahW

peebtrohsdehctiphgihA.desserpsiyekdilavA

peebgnoldehctiphgihA ,detpeccasiyrtneyeKA enutTAro,stratsnacS .detelpmocsah

peebtrohsdehctipwolA sinoitarepodilavninA .demrofrep

edocesroMni”LU“ tiucricLLPlanretniehT .detcetedsisutatskcolnu

edocesroMni”S“ ebtonnacenuTotuAWC dilavninaro,detelpmoc .deretnesiycneuqerf

edocesroMni”5“ ebtonnacenuTTA ehtnihtiwdetelpmoc .emitdeificeps

edocesroMni”RWS“ ootsiRWSs’annetnaehT ot)1:01revo(hgih .enuTTAmrofrep

edocesroMni”KCEHC“

OPAehterofebetunim1 noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA( reviecsnartehtsehctiws .FFO

edocesroMni”TB“ WCarofgnitiaW .dedrocerebotegassem

edocesroMni”RA“ egassemtnerrucehT .llufsiyromem

CALL CHANNEL

A CALL channel is a frequency that is often used

when looking for a station with which to make contact

in FM mode. Each frequency band (HF, 50 MHz,

144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, and 1.2 GHz) has one

CALL channel. The default CALL frequencies are

shown below.

To recall the CALL channel:

1Press [CALL/ C.IN].

2Press [CALL/ C.IN] again to return to the previous

operating frequency.

To revise the default CALL channel frequency:

1Select a new CALL frequency and operating mode

on the VFO.

2Press [FUNC], [CALL/ C.IN] to copy the new

frequency and mode to the CALL channel.

dnaB lennahCLLACtluafeD edoMdnaycneuqerf

FHMF/zHM06.92

zHM05MF/zHM00.15

zHM441MF/zHM00.441

zHM044/034zHM00.034

zHM00.044,

MF/

zHG2.1MF/zHM00.0421

1All E-types 2K-type

DISPLAY

BRIGHTNESS

The brightness of the LCD display can be selected

from OFF, and 1 to 4 by accessing Menu No. 00.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 00.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

CONTRAST

The contrast of the LCD dot-matrix display can be

selected from 1 to 16 by accessing Menu No. 59.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 59.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select an appropriate contrast

from 1 to 16.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

KEY ILLUMINATION

The front panel key illumination can be switched ON

or OFF.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 01.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select ON or OFF.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

DTMF

MANUAL DTMF DIALING

If you have an optional MC-52DM microphone, you

can send DTMF tones while you are transmitting.

To send a series of DTMF tones:

1Press Mic [PTT] or [SEND] on the front panel.

2Press the desired DTMF keys to transmit.

• DTMF tones are monitored through the speaker.

3Release Mic [PTT] or press [SEND] on the front

panel to return to receive mode.

DTMF MEMORY

■Entering DTMF tones

The transceiver has 10 DTMF Memory Channels.

Each channel can store a series of 16 DTMF tones.

You can also name each DTMF entry using a

maximum of 8 alpha-numeric characters.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 45.

2Press [SUB] to access Menu No. 45A.

3Press [SUB] again to enter DTMF Memory

Channel mode.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

4Select a DTMF Memory Channel (0 to 9) using the

MULTI/ CH control.

5Press [SUB] to enter the desired memory name.

Use [+]/ [–] to select the characters. Press

[MAIN] or [SUB] to move the cursor left or right

while entering the DTMF memory name. You can

also use the Mic DTMF keys to enter the

characters. Refer to the table on page 63 for the

available characters and numbers.

6Press [M.IN] to store the name into memory.

7Select the desired DTMF tone using [+]/ [–], then

press [SUB] to move the cursor to the right to

enter the next DTMF tone.

8Repeat step 7 until you enter all the desired DTMF

tones. You can enter a maximum of 16 DTMF

tones for each DTMF Memory Channel.

9Press [M.IN] to store the data into memory.

■Transmitting DTMF Memory Channel Data

To send the DTMF Memory Channel data while you

are transmitting:

1Press QUICK MEMO [MR] while you are

transmitting.

2The DTMF Memory Channel number and the

memory name appear on the main dot-matrix

display.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the DTMF

Memory Channel you want to transmit.

4Press QUICK MEMO [MR] to transmit the DTMF

tones.

• The DTMF tones are monitored through the

speaker while they are transmitted.

■DTMF Tone Time Length

When transmitting a series of DTMF tones, each tone

duration is set to the 50 ms (tone)/ 50 ms (mute)

format as default. Some repeaters or auto patch

controllers may require longer DTMF tones and mutes.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 45B.

2Press [–] to select SLOW.

3Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.

The DTMF tones will now be sent using the 100 ms

(tone)/ 100 ms (mute) format.

DTMF Pause Period

In the DTMF Memory, you can enter blanks (pauses)

among a series of DTMF tones. The default pause

period is set to 500 ms, but you can change this

value by accessing Menu No. 45C.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 45C.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select the desired DTMF Pause

period (default is 500 ms).

3Press [MENU] to exit the Menu mode.

HF RX ANTENNA

If you have a separate HF antenna (below 30 MHz)

only for receiving, connect the antenna coaxial cable

to the HF RX ANT connector on the rear panel. This

connector is considered to be connected to a

beverage antenna or directional loop antenna for low-

band operation.

To use the HF RX ANTENNA connector, access

Menu No. 18 and select ON. When the HF RX

ANTENNA is selected for receiving, “ ” appears on

the display.

LINEAR AMPLIFIER CONTROL

When you connect an external HF linear amplifier

to the TS-2000(X) transceiver using the REMOTE

connector, select 1 (fast switching/ 10 ms delay) or

2 (slow switching/ 25 ms delay) to activate the

internal relay so you can interface with the HF

linear amplifier {page 94}.

Some linear amplifiers require a long transmission

delay time because of the slow antenna relay

switching time. In this case, select 2 for the slow

switching.

If you have 50 MHz, 144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz, or 1.2

GHz band linear amplifiers, connect the linear

amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector

for these bands {page 96}.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control

to select Menu No. 28A (HF), 28B (50 MHz),

28C (144 MHz), 28D (430 (440) MHz), or

28E (1.2 GHz).

2Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 1, or 2.

• OFF disables the TS-2000(X) relay.

• 1 is 10 ms transmission delay.

• 2 is 25 ms transmission delay.

Note: If CW full break-in is enabled, 10 ms transmission delay is

applied regardless of the Menu No. 28 settings.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

• Directly select a Menu No. without pressing

[MENU] and turning the MULTI/ CH control.

• Activate the same function as one of the front

panel keys.

One of the following functions can be assigned to

each PF key. Selecting OFF assigns no function to

the PF key.

.N.A2/1TNAB=AB/A.C.BLLAC1HC

2HC3HCRLCLRTCENUTWCINOMPSD

ENIFNI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(NI.M)OMEMKCIUQ(RM

MsOFVrebmuNUNEMBN.R.NFFOzHM1

INOMXRNACSTILPSTES-FTM/OFV1ECIOV

2ECIOV

MONITOR

When you are receiving while the squelch function is

ON, weak signals become intermittent.

Or, if the CTCSS function is ON, you may want to

disable the squelch function temporarily to monitor

the current channel activities.

In these cases, use the MONITOR function to disable

the squelch function temporarily.

To assign the MONITOR function to a [PF] key on the

front panel:

1Press [MENU] and turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 51A.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select RX MONI.

3Press [MENU] to exit Menu mode.

Note: You can also assign the MONITOR function to a

programmable function key on an optional MC-47 microphone.

PF KEY

You can program the front panel [PF] key to assign a

function that you frequently use. The default is Voice

1 for the optional Voice Synthesizer, VS-3 {page 91}.

You can assign one of the functions in

“MICROPHONE PF KEYS” to this PF key, accessing

Menu No. 51A.

RISE TIME OF CW

The rise time of a CW signal is the time for the RF

output to rise to its maximum power after the key is

closed. The default setting, 6 ms, is fine for slow to

medium keying speed and normal weighting (dot/

dash ratio). The 4, 2 or 1 ms settings are good for

faster keying speeds.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 32.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select the desired rise time

(default is 6 ms).

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

LOCK FUNCTIONS

FREQUENCY LOCK FUNCTION

Frequency Lock disables some keys and controls to

prevent you from accidentally activating a function or

changing the current settings.

Press [FUNC], [ATT/ F LOCK] to toggle Frequency

Lock ON or OFF.

•“ ” appears when this function is ON.

The following keys and controls are disabled by

Frequency Lock:

gninuTgninuT gninuT gninuTgninuT lortnoc HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM HC/ITLUM HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM lortnoc B/A

B=ALLACRLC

KSF/WCPSIDTNE

MA/MFOTUA/BSU/BSLNI.M

MsOFV OMEMKCIUQ ]NI.M[ OMEMKCIUQ ]RM[

LTASLES.GS/NACSTILPS

NWOD/PUM/OFVLES/zHM1

CER/1HC/1CER/2HC/2CER/3HC/3

PETS/ENIF/9–/+

Note:

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control and

[+]/ [–] are still available in Menu mode.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, you can still change the transmit

frequency with the Tuning control while in TF-SET mode.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, the MULTI/ CH control is still

available for selections other than frequency and memory

channel changes.

◆

After activating Frequency Lock, [CLR] may be available in some

situations.

LOCK ALL FUNCTION

The Lock All function disables all the keys and

controls on the TS-2000 transceiver, except [FUNC],

[PRE/ LOCK A], Mic [PTT] and [FUNC],

[ATT/ F LOCK].

Press [FUNC], [PRE/ LOCK A] to toggle between the

Lock All function ON or OFF.

•“ ” appears when this function is ON.

To return to normal operation, press [FUNC],

[PRE/ LOCK A].

MICROPHONE PF KEYS

When using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM

microphone, you can customize the functions of the

Microphone PF1 (CALL), PF2 (VFO), PF3 (MR), and

PF4 (PF) keys. You can assign the following types of

functions to these keys via Menu Nos. 51B ~ 51E:

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

If you want to reverse the output:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 17.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

The output is now reversed.

Note: If you are using headphones, the transceiver mutes. The left

channel represents the internal SP or EXT.SP1 and the right channel

represents the EXT.SP2.

S-METER SQUELCH

The S-meter Squelch function opens the squelch only

when the receiving signal has the same or greater

strength than the S-meter Squelch setting. This

function helps you to not open the squelch when

receiving weak signals that you do not want to hear.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 19A.

2Press [+] to select ON.

3Turn the MAIN SQL control and/or the SUB SQL

control to adjust the S-meter Squelch threshold

level. When you turn SQL control, the indicators

on the S-meter move accordingly.

4Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu

mode.

Note: The squelch threshold level of the S-meter squelch is

around the 9 o’clock position for FM (both MAIN and SUB SQL),

the 11 o’clock position for other modes (MAIN SQL), and the 9

o’clock position for AM (SUB SQL), regardless of the SQL controls

position.

SQUELCH HANG TIME

You can adjust the squelch hang time to continuously

monitor unstable signals. When the signal is

temporarily weaker than the S-meter Squelch

threshold level, the squelch does not mute the signal

for a short period of time. In this way, you can

continuously monitor the unstable signal.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 19B.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 125 ms, 250 ms, or

500 ms.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu

mode.

TIME-OUT TIMER

The Time-out Timer limits the time of each

transmission. It is also useful to prevent a long

accidental transmission.

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 24.

2Press [+]/ [–] to select OFF, 3 minutes, 5 minutes,

10 minutes, 20 minutes, or 30 minutes.

3Press [MENU] to store the settings and exit Menu

mode.

RX DSP EQUALIZER

EQUALIZING RECEIVING AUDIO (SSB/ FM/ AM)

Use Menu No. 20 to change the receiver frequency

responses of the target signal. You can select one

from six different receiver profiles including the

default flat response. Selecting any of the following

items from the Menu causes “ ” to appear on

the display.

• Off (OFF):

The default frequency response for SSB, FM, and

AM.

• High boost (H BOOST):

Emphasizes higher audio frequencies; effective for

a bassy voice.

• Formant pass (F PASS):

Improves clarity by suppressing audio frequencies

outside the normal voice frequency range.

• Bass boost (B BOOST):

Emphasizes lower audio frequencies; effective for

a voice with more high frequency components.

• Conventional (CONVEN):

Emphasizes by 3 dB frequencies at 600 Hz and

higher.

• User (USER):

Reserved for the ARCP software. Off is

programmed at the factory as a default.

SEPERATE SPEAKER OUTPUT

The TS-2000(X) has 2 independent receivers and is

capable of receiving 2 different frequencies at the

same time. If no external speaker is connected to the

TS-2000(X), both audio signals are mixed internally,

then output through the internal speaker.

1Connect the external speaker(s) to the EXT.SP1

and/or EXT.SP2 jack on the rear panel {page 2}.

2Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 16.

3Press [+]/ [–] to select 0, 1 or 2.

4Press [MENU] to store the setting.

noitceleSuneM lennahc-L lennahc-R

0dexiMbuS&niaMdexiMbuS&niaM

1niaMbuS

2buS4/1+niaMniaM4/1+buS

If you are using an external speaker on EXT.SP2, you

can configure the transceiver to make a separate

output for each receiver.

1PS.TXE 2PS.TXE TUPTUO

lanretnI )L(PS )L(1PS )R(2PS

–– √A/NA/N

√–setuM √A/N

–√√A/N √

√√ setuM √√

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

TNC

This transceiver has a built-in TNC that is usually

used for the Packet Cluster Tune {page 53} or

SkyCommand II+ operations {page 83}. However,

you can also utilize the built-in TNC as a high

(9600 bps) or normal (1200 bps) speed TNC. The

TNC can be controlled by an external PC that is

connected to COM port on the rear panel {page 49}.

Available TNC command set is listed in the Appendix.

If you desire, you can connect an external TNC or

proprietary TNC/ MCP to ACC2 connector. To

interface an external TNC/ MCP with the TS-2000(X),

refer to the ACC2 connector information {page 95}

and accessing Menu Nos. 50B ~ 50F then configure

and adjust the Menu parameters to work with the

external TNC/ MCP.

Note: You do not have to disable the built-in TNC to interface with an

external TNC. Both the main transceiver and sub-receiver can work

independently unless the transceiver is transmitting on the same

band.

TRANSVERTER

If you have a transverter that converts the TS-2000

operating frequencies to other frequencies, you can

use this TS-2000 transceiver as a transverter exciter.

Consult the instruction manual that came with the

transverter for interfacing to the TS-2000.

1Connect the transverter to the ANT 1, ANT 2,

ANT 144, ANT 430, or ANT 1.2G (TS-2000

optional) connector on the rear of the transceiver.

2Select the exciter operating frequency on the main

transceiver of the TS-2000(X).

• The transverter will use this frequency as the

reference for converting frequencies.

3Access Menu No. 25, and select ON by pressing

[+].

• The output power is automatically set to the

lowest power for that frequency. See TX

POWER (below).

4Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit the

Menu mode.

5Press [ENT], then set the target converting

frequency, using the numeric keys.

6Press [ENT] to complete the entry.

7The transceiver displays the target transverter

frequency instead of the actual operating

frequency.

Note: When using a transverter, not all the functions of this

transceiver are available.

TX MONITOR

TX monitor allows you to monitor the on-going

transmission sound. This is convenient when you

want to check the modulation sound quality of the

transmission. In FSK mode, you can monitor the FSK

signal that the TS-2000(X) is transmitting.

1Press [FUNC], [PWR/ TX MONI].

2The current TX monitor setting appears.

3Turn the MULTI/ CH control to select the monitor

sound level from OFF, and 1 to 9.

4Press [CLR] to store the selected TX monitor

level.

Note:

◆

We recommend you use headphones when you monitor SSB,

AM, or FM mode, in order to avoid howling.

◆

The CW transmission signal cannot be monitored using the TX

monitor function. Use the CW sidetone function to monitor CW

transmissions (Menu Nos. 13 and 31).

TX POWER

You can adjust the transmission output power by

pressing [PWR/ TX MONI] and turning MULTI/ CH

control. If more precise power adjustment is

required, access Menu No. 23 and select ON. When

this menu is ON, the power adjustment steps change

as shown in the table below.

dnaB edoM 32.oNuneM FFO 32.oNuneM NO

/zHM05/FH zHM441

/WC/BSS KSF/MF W001~5 5fospetsni W001~5 1fospetsni

MA W52~5 5fospetsni W52~5 1fospetsni

044/034 zHM

/WC/BSS KSF/MF W05~5 5fospetsni W05~5 1fospetsni

MA W5.21~5 1fospetsni

zHG2.1

/WC/BSS KSF/MF W01~1 1fospetsni

MA W5.2~1 1fospetsni

Note:

◆

The output power settings are stored independently for HF, 50 MHz,

144 MHz, 430/ 440 MHz and 1.2 GHz (TS-2000/ TS-B2000

optional). As shown in the table above, you can also store different

output power settings for AM and other modes for each operating

band.

◆

For AM mode in the 430/ 440 MHz band and the 1.2 GHz (TS-

2000/ TS-B2000 optional) band, the final step is 0.5 W, rather

than 1 W.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

QUICK DATA TRANSFER

This transceiver has the capability to quickly and

conveniently transfer the receive frequency and mode

to another compatible transceiver. Compatible

transceivers include:

• TS-2000(X) • TS-570S/ 570D

• TS-850S • TS-870S

• TS-690S • TS-950SDX

• TS-450S

Data Transfer could be useful while contesting. A

spotting station that is searching for new contest

multipliers can quickly transfer a frequency over to

the running (main) station.

SETTING UP

■Equipment Needed

In addition to a compatible transceiver, the following

equipment is required:

Transfer to TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S:

• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a

9-pin RS-232C female connector at both ends.

Transfer to a transceiver other than TS-2000(X),

TS-570, and TS-870S:

•KENWOOD IF-232C interface unit.

• One cross-wired cable. This cable must have a

9-pin RS-232C female connector at one end and a

25-pin RS-232C female connector at the other

end.

• One straight cable. This cable must have a

6-pin DIN male connector at both ends.

■Connections

For diagrams on how to connect the two transceivers,

see “CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT”

{page 93}.

Note: If you are using a DSP-100 unit with the transceiver, turn on

the transceiver first, then turn on the DSP-100.

USING QUICK TRANSFER

When connecting with another TS-2000(X), TS-570,

or TS-870S, use the same COM connector baud rate

on each transceiver. If transferring to or from other

KENWOOD transceivers, select 4800 bps and 2 stop

bits. On the TS-2000(X), set the parameter in Menu

No. 56 to 4800 bps.

Note: While transferring data, other functions may work slower.

■Transferring Data

The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Master,

sending data to the Slave transceiver.

1Switch ON the Transfer function of each

transceiver.

• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and

select ON. For the compatible transceiver,

refer to the instruction manual that came with

the transceiver.

2On the Master, while in VFO mode, select an

operating frequency and mode.

3On the Master, press QUICK MEMO [M.IN].

• When using another TS-2000(X) as the Slave,

“PC” appears on the Slave.

• The displayed data is stored in Quick memory

channel 0 on the Master and transferred to the

Slave.

Note: If the Master has RIT switched ON, the offset frequency is

added to the receive frequency to be transferred.

■Receiving Data

The TS-2000(X) transceiver works as the Slave,

receiving data from the Master transceiver. The

Slave can receive data using either Quick memory

channel 0 or the VFO.

1Switch ON the Transfer function of each

transceiver.

• On the TS-2000(X), access Menu No. 52 and

select ON. For the compatible transceiver,

refer to the instruction manual that came with

the transceiver.

2On the Slave, access Menu No. 53 and select

either OFF (QUICK MEMO channel 0) or ON

(the VFO).

• The default is OFF (QUICK MEMO).

3On the Master, perform the appropriate operation

to send data.

• For the correct method, refer to the instruction

manual that came with the transceiver.

Note:

◆

If you always use the TS-2000(X) for receiving only, activate the

TX Inhibit function, accessing Menu No. 54 to avoid unintentional

transmission.

◆

When the Slave receives data using the VFO programmed with a

simplex frequency, the received data replaces the data on both

VFOs. On the Slave, both RIT and XIT are set to OFF.

◆

When the Slave receives data using the VFOs programmed with

split frequencies, the received data replaces the data only on the

TX side of the VFO. On the Slave, XIT is set to OFF but RIT is

not changed.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

COMPUTER CONTROL

By connecting this transceiver to a computer, you can

change the computer into an electronic console from

which you can remotely control functions of the

transceiver. This capability makes remote operation

of your transceiver possible from across the room,

from another room, or when coupled with other

commercially available products and where lawful,

from another city, state, or country via a telephone

connection.

Note:

◆

You can use the front panel controls while using computer

control. Settings done from the front panel are effective

immediately.

◆

After the computer is disconnected or turned off, all values and

settings on the front panel are restored.

SETTING UP

■Equipment Needed

• A PC equipped with an RS-232C serial port.

• One straight cable. This cable must have a 9-pin

D-Sub RS-232C female connector at one end, and

at the other end a 9-pin or a 25-pin D-Sub

RS-232C female connector that mates with the

RS-232C port of your computer.

• Transceiver control application.

To design your programs, consult “APPENDIX” for the

necessary information.

■Connections

Connecting the transceiver to the computer is easy.

See the diagram given in “CONNECTING

PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT” {page 93}.

Note: Before connecting this transceiver to the computer, switch

OFF the power to both the transceiver and the computer.

COMMUNICATION PARAMETERS

In order to control the transceiver by computer, you

must first choose the communication parameters.

1On the computer, configure your transceiver

control application for 8 data bits, 1 stop bit and

no parity.

2On the transceiver, select the same transfer rate

and number of stop bits via Menu No. 56.

• The defaults are 9600 bps and 1 stop bit.

Note: To reliably use the 38400 or 57600 bps transfer rates, the

RS-232C port of the computer must support these high-speed

communications parameters.

REMOTE MICROPHONE CONTROLLER

If you have a DTMF microphone, you can use the

microphone as a wired remote control unit as

described below.

1Plug the DTMF microphone into the microphone

connector of the transceiver.

2Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 45D.

3Press [+] to select ON.

4Press [MENU] to store the setting and exit Menu

mode.

The DTMF keys function as follows:

FMTD yek noitcnuF CNUF edom FMTD yek noitcnuF CNUF edom

1nacS–9

hcleuqS

nwoD/pU –

2/enoT /SSCTC SCD

edoC tceleS 0RWP

nwoD/pU –

3VERTFIHSATNE–

4zHM–BLRTC /NIAM BUS

5INOM KCOL NO

CretaepeR–

61ecioV KCOL FFO

DCNUF CNUF FFO

7emuloV

–nwoDnwoD

8dnaB

–# pUpU

1Use the [#] (Up) and [ ](Down) keys to change the settings of

these functions.

2The LOCK function is for the microphone keypad.

Note:

◆

Microphone Remote does not function while transmitting.

◆

You can use the DTMF Memory function {page 75} with the

Microphone Remote function.

◆

The Repeater function is available for K-type models only.

◆

Normally, pressing [2] cycles through Tone, CTCSS, DCS, and

OFF. However, if 1750 Hz is selected for Tone, pressing [2] will

only transmit the 1750 Hz tone. To return to Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS

mode, you must first deselect 1750 Hz for Tone.

◆

Press [D] to enter FUNC mode, to use the 2nd function of the

DTMF keys. Pressing [D] while in FUNC mode will exit FUNC

mode.

◆

[FUNC] on the transceiver works independently from the

Microphone Remote [FUNC] key.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL

(K-type ONLY)

If you have a Kenwood TH-D7A handheld transceiver,

you can use it to remotely control the 144 MHz and

440 MHz bands of the TS-2000(X) transceiver, using

FM mode. You will be controlling one band on the

TS-2000(X) transceiver while sending DTMF tones to

the other band from the remote control transceiver.

This function is useful, for example, when you want to

control the VHF/ UHF FM repeater function of the

TS-2000(X) transceiver from a location outside your

home or vehicle.

Note:

◆

To remotely control the TS-2000(X), you can also use a handheld

transceiver which does not have a remote control function, but a

DTMF function. You must, however, manually send DTMF tones

for control code strings. Skip steps 1 and 3 in “PREPARATION”,

below.

◆

FCC rules permit you to send control codes only on the 440 MHz

band.

PREPARATION

Assuming that the 144 MHz band of the TS-2000

transceiver will be controlled.

On the control transceiver:

1Program a 3-digit secret number.

• If you are using a TH-D7A, see “WIRELESS

REMOTE CONTROL” in its instruction manual.

2Select the transmit frequency on the 440 MHz

band.

3Enter the Remote Control mode.

On the TS-2000 transceiver:

4Access Menu 61C, and select the same secret

number that you selected in step 1.

5Select the receive frequency on the 440 MHz

band of the sub-receiver.

• Mate this frequency with the transmit frequency

on the control transceiver.

6Select the 144 MHz band as the TX band or

Control band for the main transceiver.

7To have the TS-2000(X) transceiver send a control

acknowledgment to the handheld, access Menu

61D and select “ON”.

• DTMF tones which represent the secret

number will be used as an acknowledgment.

8Access Menu 61E and select “ON”.

•“ ” appears when the TS-2000(X) enters

Remote Control mode.

CONTROL OPERATION

When in Remote Control mode, the DTMF keys of the

control transceiver will function as shown in the table

below. Each time you press the desired key, the

transceiver will automatically enter transmit mode and

send the corresponding command to the mobile.

Note: If you are using a transceiver without a remote control

function, manually send “AXXX#YA#” where “XXX” is your 3-digit

secret number and “Y” is a single-digit control command. If you do

not add ”A#” on the end, you can skip sending “AXXX#” next time;

however, the mobile may be accidentally controlled by other stations.

1NOSCD 9RM

2NOENOT 0WOL

3NOSSCTC ARETNE

4FFOSCD BLESENOT

5FFOENOT CNORETAEPER

6FFOSSCTC DFFORETAEPER

7LLAC NWOD

8OFV #PU

To change the transmit/ receive frequency:

([VFO] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary

digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([VFO] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])

To recall a memory channel:

([MR] ➡ [ENTER] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter the necessary

digits) ➡ [ENTER]) or ([MR] ➡ [UP]/ [DOWN])

To change the tone (or CTCSS) frequency:

([TONE SEL] ➡ [0] ~ [9] (enter 2 digits; ex. [0], [5])

➡ [TONE SEL])

• Use Nos. 01 to 38 shown in the table on page 35.

• First activate the Tone or CTCSS function. You

can select a separate tone frequency for the Tone

and CTCSS functions.

Note: While in Wireless Remote Control mode, you can perform only

the following operations on the TS-2000(X) transceiver.

•

Transmit

•

Acknowledge ON/ OFF

•

Secret Number Change

•

Partial/ Full Reset

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

SKY COMMAND II + (K-type ONLY)

The Sky Command II+ allows you to remotely control

the TS-2000(X) transceiver from a separate location.

Since the TS-2000(X) transceiver has an independent

VHF and UHF sub-receiver in addition to the main

transceiver, the sub-receiver can work as a

“Transporter” without requiring another VHF/ UHF

transceiver.

So, if you already have Kenwood’s TH-D7A handheld

or TM-D700A mobile transceiver, you can immediately

start enjoying Sky Command II+ features to remotely

control the HF/ 50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X).

Or, if you have a friend who has another TS-2000(X),

you can also use his/her TS-2000(X) as a

“Commander” (a remote unit) to control the HF/

50 MHz band of your TS-2000(X) at home, using VHF

and UHF bands.

You will use one transceiver as a remote control unit,

called a “Commander”. The VHF/ UHF sub-receiver

in the TS-2000(X) transceiver is called the

“Transporter”. It will function as an interface between

the Commander and the HF/ 50 MHz band of the

TS-2000(X) main transceiver.

This system allows you, for example, to watch for and

hunt DX while washing your car, or to operate the HF

transceiver while relaxing in your car, living room, or

patio, instead of actually operating inside your shack.

SKY COMMAND II + DIAGRAM

ATT PRE-AMP

VOX PROC

SEND

CH1 MIC

FSK

LSB

USB

AT TUNE

POWER HF TRANSCEIVER TS-570D

PHONES 1

CH2

CH3

ANT

REC

FINE

AGC/TONE

REV

CLR

F.LOCK

0ENT

MIC

PWR

KEY

DELAY MENU 1MHz

SPLIT

M/V

DOWN UP

TF-SET

A=B

SCAN M>VFO M.IN

M.IN

FILTER

CW TUNE

B.C.

N.R.

A/B

CLEAR

RIT

XIT

RIT/XIT

IF SHIFT SQL

010

AF RF

HIGH

DSP SLOPE

LOW

010

+–

VHF freq.

Commander Transporter

Audio Audio

UHF freq.

Audios

Control commands

tResponse

Control commands

tResponse

PREPARATION

Although you can use either a TM-D700A, a TH-D7A,

or another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a “Commander”

(an external remote control unit), the following

procedure shows how to set up your TS-2000 as a

“Transporter” at a base station and the TM-D700A as

a “Commander”.

TS-2000 (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Press [SUB] then enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY)

as a “Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Press [SUB] then enter your alias callsign

(ex: WD6DJY-1) as a “Transporter” callsign, using

[+]/ [–] or the MULTI/ CH control. To move the

cursor, press [MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to

store the callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long,

including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6-DJY-1

You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.

•

-WD6DJY

You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY-19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Command II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

Select 1200 bps for TM-D700A (9600 bps can be

used only when you use another TS-2000(X) as a

“Commander”).

7Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency

in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command

II+ operation.

TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu 4–1 and 4–2 to enter the same

callsign that you entered for TS-2000(X).

2Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone

frequency that you selected for TS-2000(X)

(Transporter).

Note: Refer to Chapter 17, Sky Command II, of the TM-D700A

instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS

tone frequency.

Your shack

HF/ 50 MHz

VHF

UHF

TM-D700A/ TH-D7A/

TS-2000(X)

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

Starting Sky Command II+ operation:

After you have completed the following setups, you

can start Sky Command II+ operation. Without

programming these parameters, you cannot perform

Sky Command II+ operation.

On the TS-2000 (Transporter):

1Select the desired HF frequency that you want to

be controlled on the main transceiver.

2Select an open VHF frequency in FM mode for the

main transceiver and another open UHF

frequency in FM mode for the sub-receiver.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62E.

4Select T-PORTER (Transporter).

5Press [MENU] to enter the Transporter mode.

On the TM-D700A (Commander):

1Select the same VHF and UHF frequencies that

you selected for the TS-2000 (Transporter).

2Access Menu 4–4 to select COMMANDER.

•“PRESS [0] KEY TO START COMMANDER!!”

appears.

3Press [0] on the DTMF Mic of the TM-D700A to

start the Sky Command II+ operation.

CONTROL OPERATION

After setting up both the TS-2000 (Transporter) and

the TM-D700A (Commander) for Sky Command II+

operation, press Mic [0] on the Commander. While in

Sky Command mode, the Mic keys of the

Commander will function as described below.

Each time you press a key, the Commander will

automatically enter transmit mode and send the

corresponding control command to the Transporter.

FHehthctiwsoT FFOreviecsnart ciMsserP ]1[ .

ycneuqerfehtegnahcoT nolennahcyromemro reviecsnartFHeht

ciMsserP ]PU[ /]NWD[ .

nanooiduatimsnartoT ycneuqerfFH ciMdlohdnasserP ]TTP[ ehtotnikaepsneht, .enohporcim

nanooiduaevieceroT ycneuqerfFH ciMsserP ]2[ .

dnabFHUehtrotinomoT rednammoCehtno ciMehtsserP FP yek rotinoMehtotdengissa .noitcnuf

yeKciM noitcnuF

1FFOrewoP

2FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH

3hctiwsedomnoitaludoM

4FFO/NOTIR

5FFO/NOTIX

6raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

7FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS

8OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT

9hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI

0FHmorf(eveirtersgnittestnerruCreviecsnart)

BhctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV

CesaercniycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX

DesaercedycneuqerftesffoTIR/TIX

:edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI hctiwszHk1/zH01 hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI

NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI NOyrtne

1“FS” appears when you select 1 kHz step (LSB/ USB/ CW) or 10 kHz

step (FM/ AM).

2After pressing Mic [#], press Mic [0] to [9] to enter a frequency or

memory channel number.

When Mic [0] is pressed, the Commander shows the

current settings of the HF transceiver:

eyr

qHF frequency

wVFO: A, VFO: B,

MR: 00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)

eRIT, XIT

rOFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99

tLSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM

ySPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.

u“FS” appears when Mic [] is pressed.

Note:

◆

After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.

◆

The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every

10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.

◆

The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the

Transporter is ON.

◆

You must set VHF frequency on the main transceiver and UHF

frequency on the sub-receiver. Otherwise, the Sky Command II+

may not operate properly.

◆

When the TS-2000(X) exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the

operating frequency of VFO A will be set to the VHF frequency

that the Sky Command II+ was operated.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

USING TH-D7A AS A COMMANDER

To use a TH-D7A transceiver as a “Commander” (an

external remote control unit), follow the steps below.

Basically, it is the same as using a TM-D700A as a

“Commander” (described on the previous page).

TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a

“Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a

“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long

including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6-DJY-1

You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.

•

-WD6DJY

You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY-19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Commander II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

Select 1200 bps for TH-D7A (9600 bps can be

used only when you use another TS-2000 as a

“Commander”).

7Assign the TNC band to the sub-band by

accessing Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency

in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command

operation.

TH-D7A (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu 4–1 to enter the same callsign that

you entered for the Commander (ex: WD6DJY).

2Access Menu 4–2 to enter the same callsign that

you entered for the Transporter (ex: WD6DJY-1).

3Access Menu 4–3 to select the same CTCSS tone

frequency that you selected for the TS-2000(X)

(Transporter).

4Set the same frequencies that you selected for the

“Transporter” for the VHF and UHF bands.

Note: Refer to Chapter 19, Sky Command II, of the TH-D7A

instruction manual for details on how to enter the callsign and CTCSS

tone frequency.

CONTROL OPERATION

First, switch the TS-2000 transceiver ON and select

T-PORTER (Transporter) from Menu 62E.

Then, access Menu 4–4 on the TH-D7A and select

“COMMANDER”. “PUSH [0] KEY TO START

COMMANDER!!” appears.

Press [0] on the TH-D7A to start Sky Command

mode.

When in Sky Command mode, the keys of the TH-D7A

(Commander) will function as described below. Only

[LAMP], [MONI], and the VOL control functions will

not change.

Each time you press the desired key, the Commander

will automatically enter transmit mode and send the

corresponding control command to the TS-2000

(Transporter).

FHehthctiwsoT FFOreviecsnart sserP ]REWOP[]REWOP[ ]REWOP[ ]REWOP[]REWOP[ .

anooiduatimsnartoT ycneuqerfFH

ehtdlohdnasserP TTPTTP TTP TTPTTP otnikaepsneht,hctiws .enohporcimeht

nanooiduaevieceroT ycneuqerfFH sserP ]XR[]XR[ ]XR[ ]XR[]XR[ .

dnabFHUehtrotinomoT rednammoCehtno dlohdnasserP ]INOM[]INOM[ ]INOM[ ]INOM[]INOM[ .

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

yeK noitcnuF

gninuTgninuT gninuT gninuTgninuT lortnoc rebmunlennahcyromemroycneuqerF egnahc

PUPUPUPUPU/NWDNWD NWD NWDNWD egnahctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

B/AB/A B/A B/AB/A hctiwsBOFV/AOFV:edomOFVnI egnahcon:edomllaceRyromeMnI

REWOPREWOP REWOP REWOPREWOP

FFO/NOrewoP

XRXRXRXRXR

FFO/NOeviecerycneuqerfFH

EDOMEDOM EDOM EDOMEDOM

hctiwsedomnoitaludoM

TIRTIR TIR TIRTIR

FFO/NOTIR

TIXTIX TIX TIXTIX

FFO/NOTIX

RLCRLC RLC RLCRLC

raelctesffoTIXrotesffoTIR

TILPSTILPS TILPS TILPSTILPS

FFO/NOycneuqerf-tilpS

MM ➧VV

OFVotyromeMmorfrefsnarT

TSAF :edomWCro,BSU,BSLnI hctiwszHk1/zH01 hctiwszHk01/zHk1:edomMAroMFnI

CNYSCNYS CNYS CNYSCNYS

eveirtersgnittestnerruC )reviecsnartFHmorf(

TNETNE TNE TNETNE NOyrtneycneuqerf:edomOFVnI rebmunlennahc:edomllaceRyromeMnI NOyrtne

V/MV/M V/M V/MV/M hctiwsedomllaceRyromeM/OFV

1After pressing [ENT], you can use these keys as numeric keys to

enter a frequency or memory channel number.

When [0/ SYNC] is pressed, the Commander shows

the current settings of the HF transceiver:

yr u

qHF frequency

wA (VFO A), B (VFO B),

00 ~ 99 (memory channel number)

eRIT, XIT

rOFF, –9.99 ~ +9.99

t“FS” appears when [FAST] is ON.

yLSB, USB, CW, FM, or AM

uSPLIT–A: VFO A is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–B: VFO B is used for transmitting.

SPLIT–M: A memory channel is used for transmitting.

Note:

◆

On the Transporter, only [LAMP], [MONI], and [MENU] will

function. Pressing any other key will simply cause the

Transporter to generate an error beep.

◆

After pressing [MENU], you can access only Menu 4–4.

◆

The Transporter will transmit its call sign in Morse code every

10 minutes, using the 144 MHz band.

◆

The APO timer will not operate on the transceiver while the

Transporter is ON.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

USING ANOTHER TS-2000 AS A COMMANDER

To use another TS-2000(X) transceiver as a

“Commander” (an external remote control unit), follow

the steps below. Basically, it is the same as using a

TM-D700A as a “Commander” (described on

pages 83 and 84).

TS-2000(X) (Transporter) Setup:

1Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62A.

2Enter your callsign (ex: WD6DJY) as a

“Commander” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62A.

3Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 62B.

4Enter your alias callsign (ex: WD6DJY-1) as a

“Transporter” callsign, using [+]/ [–] or the

MULTI/ CH control. To move the cursor, press

[MAIN] or [SUB]. Press [M.IN] to store the

callsign to Menu No. 62B.

Note: You can use alpha-numeric characters, A to Z, 0 to 9 and

“-”. The callsign must be no more than 9 characters long

including “-”. Also, the following callsign formats cannot be

entered:

•

WD6DJYZ

If you use only letters and numbers for the callsign, the

maximum length is 6 characters.

•

WD6-DJY-1

You cannot use more than 1 “-” within a callsign.

•

-WD6DJY

You cannot use a “-” as the first callsign character.

•

WD6DJY-19

An SSID must be within the range of 1 to 15.

5Access Menu No. 62C, then turn the MULTI/ CH

control to select a CTCSS tone frequency for Sky

Command II+ (default is 88.5 Hz).

6Access Menu No. 62D and select the

communication speed for Sky Command II+.

• Select 1200 bps or 9600 bps.

7Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

8Select a 144 MHz band frequency in FM mode on

the main transceiver and 440 MHz band frequency

in FM mode for the sub-receiver for Sky Command

II+ operation.

TS-2000 (Commander) Setup:

1Access Menu No. 62A and 62B to enter the same

callsign that you entered for the TS-2000

(Transporter).

2Access Menu No. 62C to select the same CTCSS

tone frequency that you selected for the TS-2000

(Transporter).

3Access Menu No. 62D and select the same

communication speed that you selected for the

TS-2000 (Transporter).

4Access Menu No. 46 and select SUB.

5Set the same frequencies that you selected for the

“Transporter” for the main transceiver and sub-

receiver.

Starting Sky Command ll+ operation:

1On the Transporter, access Menu No. 62E.

2Select T-PORTER (Transporter).

3On the Commander, access Menu No. 62E.

4Select COMMANDER (Commander).

5Press [MAIN] on the Commander to start the

operation.

lortnoC noitcnuF

NIAMNIAM NIAM NIAMNIAM lortnoc gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT .ycneuqerf

HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM HC/ITLUM HC/ITLUMHC/ITLUM lortnoc gnitarepoehtlortnocotnruT .yldiparycneuqerf

]NIAM[]NIAM[ ]NIAM[ ]NIAM[]NIAM[ tnerrucehtrotinomotsserP .ycneuqerfgniviecer

]BUS[]BUS[ ]BUS[ ]BUS[]BUS[ ehtllaezinorcnys-erotsserP retropsnartehtneewtebnoitamrofni .rednammocdna

]+[]+[ ]+[ ]+[]+[ /]–[]–[ ]–[ ]–[]–[ ehtnwodropuevomotsserP zHM05/FH(dnabgnitarepo .)sdnaboidarruetama

]M/OFV[]M/OFV[ ]M/OFV[ ]M/OFV[]M/OFV[ edomOFVneewtebelggototsserP .edomllaceRyromeMdna

]TNE[]TNE[ ]TNE[ ]TNE[]TNE[

ycneuqerfderisedaretneotsserP arodapyekciremunehtgnisu yromeMnirebmunlennahcyromem .edomllaceR

M[M[M[M[M[ss

ss ]OFV]OFV ]OFV ]OFV]OFV yromemehtrefsnartotsserP .OFVotnoitamrofnilennahc

]B/A[]B/A[ ]B/A[ ]B/A[]B/A[ .BroAOFVtcelesotsserP

]TILPS[]TILPS[ ]TILPS[ ]TILPS[]TILPS[ NOnoitarepoTILPSelggototsserP .FFOdna

]BSU/BSL[]BSU/BSL[ ]BSU/BSL[ ]BSU/BSL[]BSU/BSL[ .BSUroBSLtcelesotsserP

]KSF/WC[]KSF/WC[ ]KSF/WC[ ]KSF/WC[]KSF/WC[ ebtonnacKSF.WCtcelesotsserP .detceles

]MA/MF[]MA/MF[ ]MA/MF[ ]MA/MF[]MA/MF[ .MAroMFtcelesotsserP

]TIR[]TIR[ ]TIR[ ]TIR[]TIR[ /]TIX[]TIX[ ]TIX[ ]TIX[]TIX[ TIXro/dnaTIRehtetavitcaotsserP .noitcnuf

]RAELC[]RAELC[ ]RAELC[ ]RAELC[]RAELC[ ycneuqerftesffoehtraelcotsserP .TIXro/dnaTIRrof

]CORP[]CORP[ ]CORP[ ]CORP[]CORP[ hceepSehthctiwsotsserP .NOnoitcnuFrossecorP

].N.A[].N.A[ ].N.A[ ].N.A[].N.A[ hctoNotuAehtelggototsserP .FFOdnaNOnoitcnuf

].C.B[].C.B[ ].C.B[ ].C.B[].C.B[ lecnaCtaeBehtelggototsserP .FFOdnaNOnoitcnuf

].R.N[].R.N[ ].R.N[ ].R.N[].R.N[ ,1noitcudeResioNtcelesotsserP .FFOro,2noitcudeResioN

]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,]TA[]TA[ ]TA[ ]TA[]TA[ dna1TNAneewtebelggototsserP .dnabzHM05/FHrof2TNA

]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,]LEVEL/BN/7[]LEVEL/BN/7[ ]LEVEL/BN/7[ ]LEVEL/BN/7[]LEVEL/BN/7[ reknalBesioNehtelggototsserP .FFOroNOnoitcnuf

]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,[[

[

[[]]

]

]] .FFOrewopretropsnarTehthctiwS

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

These keys and controls are available on the

Commander to control the Transporter.

Note:

◆

When the synconize operation is incomplete, the main display

of the Commander may disappear. In this case, press [SUB] to

re-syncronze.

◆

You cannot recall memory channels 100 to 299 using [ENT]

and the numeric keys.

To recall memory channels 100 ~ 299,

use [+]/ [–].

◆

You can recall only the memory channels that have HF/ 50 MHz

frequencies.

◆

Do not use VHF/ UHF frequencies that are suffering from the

harmonics of HF/ 50 MHz transmissions.

◆

The frequency control operations, such as the Tuning control

and RIT/ XIT control, are much slower than using direct controls,

because each control command (in steps of 10 Hz) is sent as

packet data.

◆

When you change the frequency continuously, using the Tuning

control or the MULTI/ CH control, the last entry of the

Commander frequency is reflected on the HF/ 50 MHz

transceiver.

◆

Since Sky Command II+ requires 2 VHF/ UHF frequencies,

check the operating frequencies carefully to avoid interference

with other parties.

◆

When the transceiver exits the Sky Command II+ operation, the

internal TNC retains the data transfer speed in Menu No. 47. If a

different data transfer speed is required for packet operation,

reconfigure it to the desired value.

USING A SEPARATE TRANSPORTER

If you have more than 2 TH-D7A and/or TM-D700A

transceivers, you can use one of the transceivers as

a “Transporter”. This transceiver is connected to the

TS-2000(X) via the RS-232C port, EXT SP jack, and

Mic connector of the base station and the other

TH-D7A or TM-D700A transceiver works as a

“Commander”. With this configuration, you can turn

the TS-2000(X) ON and OFF using the

“Commander”. Refer to the instruction manual of the

TH-D7A or TM-D700A for interfacing the transceiver

to the TS-2000(X) transceiver.

TS-2000 + TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Transporter) Setup:

1Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a

“Transporter” and connect all the necessary

cables to the TS-2000.

2Select a frequency (HF/ 50 MHz band) on the

main transceiver of the TS-2000.

3On the TS-2000 Press [MENU], then turn the

MULTI/ CH control to access Menu No. 62E.

4Select a “CLIENT”.

5Press [MENU] to complete.

6Start the Transporter mode on the TH-D7A or

TM-D700A.

TH-D7A/ TM-D700A (Commander) Setup:

Configure the TH-D7A or TM-D700A as a

“Commander”. Refer to the SKY COMMAND II

chapter in the instruction manual to set up the

transceiver as a “Commander”.

You can use a “Commander” as described on

pages 84 and 86.

REPEATER FUNCTION (K-type ONLY)

This transceiver is capable of receiving signals on

one band and retransmitting them on another band.

For example, a signal received on the sub-receiver is

retransmitted on the main transceiver. Similarly, a

signal received on the main transceiver can be

retransmitted on the sub-receiver’s frequency.

You can use any available frequency on the main

transceiver or sub-receiver to receive and transmit.

However, you cannot retransmit the received signals

that are outside the available transmission

frequencies. Additionally, you must use a different

antenna for transmitting and receiving. For example,

if you receive a VHF signal on the sub-receiver, you

can retransmit it using UHF on the main transceiver.

You cannot retransmit the signal using VHF of the

main transceiver.

Note: For the repeater function to operate, the squelch levels of the

main transceiver and sub-receiver must be adjusted so that no

background noise can be heard.

LOCKED-BAND REPEATER

The transceiver always uses the same band to

receive, and retransmits the received signals on the

other band.

1Select a desired receive frequency on the sub-

receiver.

2Press [MAIN] and select a desired transmit

frequency on the main transceiver.

3Adjust the squelch threshold level so that both

receivers mute.

4Press [MENU], then turn the MULTI/ CH control to

access Menu No. 61A.

5Select LOCKED, using [+].

•“ ” appears.

Note: You can also reverse the receive and transmit bands, so that

you receive on the main transceiver and transmit on the sub-

receiver’s frequency.

CROSS-BAND REPEATER

The cross-band repeater is unlike the lock-band

repeater in that both bands can be used to receive

signals. When a signal is received on one band, it is

retransmitted on the other band. To activate the

cross-band repeater, select CROSS in Menu No. 61A

in step 5.

Note:

◆

The Repeater function has its own Time-out Timer which is set at

3 minutes. This value cannot be changed.

◆

After activating the Repeater function, you cannot access Menu

Nos. other than 61A and 61B.

HANG TIME FOR REPEATER FUNCTION

If necessary, you can cause this transceiver to remain

in the transmit mode for 500 ms after signals drop.

Access Menu No. 61B and select “ON”.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT

(OPTIONAL)

The optional DRU-3A unit allows you to record a

voice message on up to 3 channels. After recording

a message via your transceiver microphone, you can

then send that message.

The maximum recording time for each channel is as

follows:

Channel 1: Approx. 30 seconds

Channel 2: Approx. 15 seconds

Channel 3: Approx. 15 seconds

The DRU-3A is useful in many situations:

• DX chasing or contest operation where repeated

calls are necessary for extended periods of time.

• Checking interference complaints with other

equipment (lets you be in two places at one time).

• Checking or adjusting your transmit signal or your

antenna(s) if it’s not convenient to be sitting in

front of your microphone.

• Helping a friend adjust his/her antenna or receive

when he/she needs repeated test transmissions.

For information on how to install the DRU-3A unit,

refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.

RECORDING MESSAGES

This section explains how to record a single

message.

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch the

function OFF.

3Press [FUNC], [1/ CH1/REC] to record the

message for channel 1.

•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “AP1 –” appear.

• To exit the Record Standby mode and quit

recording your message, press [CLR].

4Press and hold [1/ CH1/REC], then begin

speaking into your microphone.

• Three channels are available for recording

messages. Press channel key [2/ CH2/REC]

or [3/ CH3/REC] in place of [1/ CH1/REC], in

step 3, to record the message on a different

channel.

5Release the key pressed in step 4 when you have

finished recording your message.

• Also when the maximum recording time

passes, recording stops.

• The content of the channel is overwritten with

the new message.

6Repeat steps 3 to 5 to record a message on

another channel.

Note: Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels recording in progress and

clears the memory channel.

MESSAGE PLAYBACK

You can play back the message in channel 1, 2, or 3

to check or to send. It is also possible to make a

longer message, by consecutively playing back the

messages of more than one channel, linking them

together.

You can even repeatedly send a longer, linked

message by using the Repeat function. To switch this

function ON, access Menu No. 29A and select ON

(Default is OFF). Then, select the repeat interval

time in Menu No. 29B (Default is 10 seconds).

Note:

◆

Pressing [ ] (POWER) cancels playback in progress.

◆

The settings in Menu Nos. 29A and No. 29B are shared with CW

Message Playback described in “CW MESSAGE MEMORY”

{page 43}.

■Checking Messages

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2If VOX is ON, press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch

the function OFF.

3Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel

you want to check.

• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and “AP 1– –”

appear while playing back the message in

channel 1.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

4To play back another message in sequence,

press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first

message is being played.

• Up to three channels can be queued.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

■Sending Messages

1Select SSB, FM, or AM.

• Use the same mode for transmitting and

receiving.

2Press [VOX/ LEVEL] to switch VOX ON or

OFF.

• If you switched VOX ON, skip step 3.

3Press [SEND], or press and hold Mic [PTT].

4Press [1/ CH1/REC], [2/ CH2/REC], or

[3/ CH3/REC], depending on which channel

you want to use.

• For example, “s PLAY BACK” and “AP 1– –”

appear while playing back the message in

channel 1.

• To interrupt playback, press [CLR].

5To play back another message in sequence,

press the corresponding key ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]) while the first

message is being played.

• Up to 3 channels can be queued.

6If you pressed [SEND] or Mic [PTT] in step 3,

press [SEND] again or release Mic [PTT].

■Erasing a Recorded Message

1Press [FUNC] then [1/ CH1/REC] or

[2/ CH2/REC] or [3/ CH3/REC] to select the

message which you want to erase.

•“¡|| REC WAIT” and “APn –” appear, where

“n” represents the channel number.

2To erase the recorded message, press and

hold the same key as in step 1 ([1/ CH1/REC],

[2/ CH2/REC], or [3/ CH3/REC]), and press

[CLR] at the same time.

• A beep sounds and the message is erased.

■Changing Inter-message Interval Time

For repetitive message playback, you can change

the interval between each series of messages.

Use Menu No. 29B, and select the time in the

range of 0 to 60 seconds.

■Changing Playback Volume

Turning the MAIN AF or SUB AF control does not

change the volume for playback. To change the

volume, access Menu No. 14 to select the

playback volume level from OFF and 1 to 9.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER (OPTIONAL)

Install the optional VS-3 unit to use this function.

Each time you change the transceiver mode such

as VFO A/B or Memory Recall, the transceiver

automatically announces the new mode. In

addition, you can program the front panel [PF] key

so that pressing it makes the transceiver announce

the displayed information. If you have the optional

MC-47 microphone, you can program one of the

Mic [PF] keys for this function as well.

For an explanation on how to install the VS-3 unit,

refer to “INSTALLING OPTIONS” {page 97}.

The table below indicates what the transceiver

automatically announces when it changes the settings.

desserPyeK noitarepO tnemecnuonnA

]B/A[ AOFV

ycneuqerf+OFV

BOFV

]–[,]+[ egnahcdnaB

]LLAC[ lennahcllaCycneuqerf+llaC

]M/OFV[ roOFV yromeM llaceR

ycneuqerf+OFV ro .oNyromeM+RM ycneuqerf+

]UNEM[ /

]–[,]+[ .oNuneM noitceles

+.oN+uneM /rebmundetceleS retemarap

]NI.M[ yromeM edomllorcS

+lennahC+RM )tigid-3(.oNyromeM ycneuqerF+

]TNE[ ycneuqerF yrtne retnE

HC/ITLUM lortnoc

.oNuneM segnahc

+.oN+uneM /rebmundetceleS retemarap

yromeM .oNlennahc segnahc

yromeM+RM +.oNlennahc ycneuqerf

yekciremuN yrtne gniretnE srebmun rebmunyrevE deretne

]•[ ehtgniruD ycneuqerf yrtne ztrehageM

Note: The PF key assignment parameter is announced as the

number shown below.

rebmununeM361ECIOV462ECIOV56INOMXR

66INOMPSD76RMKCIUQ86NI.MKCIUQ96TILPS

07TES-FT17B/A27M/OFV37B=A

47NACS57OFV>M67NI.M77ENUTWC

871HC972HC083HC18ENIF

28RLC38LLAC48LRTC58zHM1

682/1TNA78BN88.R.N98.C.B

09.N.A99FFO

For the [PF] key, the transceiver will announce

different information, depending on whether VOICE1

or VOICE2 is selected.

VOICE1:

• VFO or memory channel frequencies are

announced beginning with the 10 MHz digit and

continuing through to the 10 Hz digit. If the

memory channel has no data stored, “open” is

announced. For the MHz decimal point, “point” is

announced. For the kHz decimal point, a short

pause (200 ms) is made. A 200 ms pause is also

made between the channel number and the

frequency.

• Menu numbers and their settings are announced

with a short pause (200 ms) between the menu

number and the setting.

Note: If operating a key or a control changes the contents of the

display while an announcement is in progress, the announcement is

interrupted.

VOICE2:

• The S-meter readings at the time you pressed the

key, are announced, for example, “S5” or “20 dB”.

The table below shows the available announcements

when the [PF] (VOICE2) is pressed.

NIAM BUS

reteM-S leveL -ecnuonnA tnem reteM-S leveL -ecnuonnA tnem

3~11S11S

42S22S

6~53S33S

74S44S

9~85S55S

016S66S

21~117S77S

318S88S

51~419S99S

81~61Bd0101Bd01

02~91Bd0211Bd02

22~12Bd0321Bd03

52~32Bd0431Bd04

82~62Bd0541Bd05

03~92Bd0651Bd06

1Assign VOICE1 (63) or VOICE2 (64) to the front

panel [PF] key by accessing Menu No. 51A. Or, if

you are using the optional MC-47 or MC-52DM

microphone, assign one of the Mic [PF] keys to

either VOICE1 or VOICE2. For programming Mic

[PF] keys, refer to “MICROPHONE PF KEYS”

{page 77}.

2Press the [PF] key that you programmed.

• An announcement is made based on the

VOICE1 or VOICE2 selection.

• To interrupt the announcement, press the [PF]

key again.

15 OPERATOR CONVENIENCES

MICROPROCESSOR RESET

If your transceiver seems to be malfunctioning,

resetting the microprocessor default settings may

resolve the problem. There are 2 levels of resetting

the microprocessor of the TS-2000(X): partial reset

and full reset.

INITIAL SETTINGS

For each VFO, the factory defaults for the operating

frequency and mode are as follows:

• MAIN VFO A: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB

• MAIN VFO B: 14.000.000 MHz/ USB

• SUB VFO: 144.000.00 MHz/ FM

The Memory channels and Quick Memory channels

have no data stored.

PARTIAL RESET

Perform a Partial Reset if a key or control does not

function according to the instructions in this manual.

The following data is NOT erased by performing a

Partial Reset.

• Memory channel data

• Menu settings

• Antenna tuner preset data

• ANT 1/ANT 2 data

Reset the transceiver by pressing [A/B]+[ ].

• A confirmatin message appears. Press [A/B] to

proceed. Otherwise, press any other key to

cancel the Partial Reset and return to normal

operation.

• “HELLO” appears on the display and the VFOs

resets to the factory default values.

FULL RESET

Perform a Full Reset if you want to erase all the data

in all the memory channels. In addition, this function

resets all the settings that you customized, to the

factory defaults (i.e.- menu settings, antenna tuner

preset data, etc.).

Reset the transceiver by pressing [A=B]+[ ].

A confirmation message appears when performing

the Full Reset. Press [A=B] to proceed. Otherwise,

press any other key to cancel the Full Reset and

return to normal operation.

When you perform the full reset:

• “HELLO” appears on the display.

• All frequencies, modes, memory data and AT

preset data are set to the factory default values

(refer to “INITIAL SETTINGS”, above).

CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

COMPUTER

The COM connector allows you to directly connect a computer or dumb terminal by using an RS-232C cable

terminated with a 9-pin female connector.

No external hardware interface is required between your computer and the transceiver. See “APPENDIX”

{page 113} for information related to this connector.

COM connector

Personal computer/

dumb terminal

RS-232C

serial port

TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000

Straight cable

COMPATIBLE TRANSCEIVER

When transferring data to or from another TS-2000(X), TS-570, or TS-870S, directly connect the two transceivers

using the COM connectors.

When transferring data to other KENWOOD transceivers, use the optional IF-232C interface unit. Connect the

IF-232C to the ACC 1 connector located on the compatible transceiver.

TS-2000(X) TS-2000(X)/870S/570

TS-2000(X)

Cross-wired cable

See IF-232C manual.

IF-232C

Straight cable

COM Connector

cable

TS-450S/690S/850S/950SDX

ANT

DIN(6P)

RS-232C(25P)

DIN(6P)

16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

RTTY EQUIPMENT

Use the ACC 2 connector to connect to the RTTY equipment. Connect the RTTY key output line to pin 2 of the

ACC 2 connector. Connect the demodulation input line of the RTTY equipment to pin 3 of the ACC 2 connector

{page 95}.

Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the RTTY equipment. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the

transceiver and the RTTY equipment to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.

MCP

power

supply

TS-2000(X) ACC 2

MCP

Personal computer/

dumb terminal

HF LINEAR AMPLIFIER

Connect an external transmit power amplifier to the REMOTE connector (1 male REMOTE connector

(E07-0751-XX) is supplied). Switch ON the linear amplifier control relay via Menu No. 28A.

The TX/RX relay response time is 10 ms when you have selected CW Full Break-in and 25 ms when you have

selected CW Semi Break-in.

Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Some amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control terminal is

grounded. For those amplifiers, connect pin 2 of the REMOTE connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and connect pin 4 of the connector to

the control terminal of the amplifier.

TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000

AC LINE

RF OUTPUT

Linear amplifier

Control relay

GND

REMOTE Connector

(Rear panel view)

REMOTE connector

No. Function

Speaker output

Common terminal

Standby; when grounded, the

transceiver enters TX mode.

When connected with the common

terminal, the amplifier enters TX mode.

When connected with the common

terminal, the amplifier enters RX mode.

ALC input from amplifier

Approx. +12 V DC is output when in

TX mode (10 mA max.).

ANTENNA TUNER

Use the ANT 1 and AT connectors to connect an external antenna tuner. If you connect the external tuner to the

ANT 2 connector, the external tuner will not function.

Note: While using an external antenna tuner with the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000, you cannot use the 6 m band to transmit. Connect your 6 m band

antenna to the ANT 2 connector.

TS-2000(X)/TS-B2000

External antenna tuner

The AT-300 external antenna tuner is a

discontinued model. It may no longer be

available in your area.

16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

MCP AND TNC

Use the ACC 2 connector to connect the input/output lines from a Terminal Node Controller (TNC) for Packet

operation, a Multimode Communications Processor (MCP) for operation on Packet, PacTOR, AMTOR, G-TORTM,

PSK31, or FAX, or from a Clover interface. Also use the ACC 2 connector to connect SSTV and phone patch

equipment (1 male ACC2 connector (E07-1351-XX) is supplied).

• Connect the TNC or MCP to the ACC 2 connector using a cable equipped with a 13-pin DIN plug.

• Connecting the TNC or MCP to a personal computer or dumb terminal requires an RS-232C cable.

Note: Do not share a single power supply between the transceiver and the TNC or MCP. Keep as wide a separation as possible between the

transceiver and the computer to reduce noise-pickup by the transceiver.

9101112

56 78

12 34

.oNniP niP emaN noitcnuF

1ONAS

reviecer-busehtmorftuptuoFA .noitarepolatigidrofnipatadeviecerPCMroCNTehtottcennoC• .gnitteslortnocFABUSmorftnednepednisileveltuptuoFA• .eulavD05.oNuneMehtgnitsujdaybdegnahcebnacleveltuptuoFA• k01.xorppA:ecnadepmituptuO• Ω.

2YTTRtupniyekYTTR

3ONAM

reviecsnartniamehtmorftuptuoFA .noitarepolatigidrofnipatadeviecerPCMroCNTehtottcennoC• .gnitteslortnocFANIAMehtmorftnednepednisileveltuptuoFA• .eulavC05.oNuneMehtgnitsujdaybdegnahcebnacleveltuptuoFA• k01.xorppA:ecnadepmituptuO• Ω.

4DNGdnuorG

5QSM

lortnochcleuqsreviecsnartniaM .noitarepolatigidrofniplortnochcleuqsPCMroCNTehtottcennoC• .neposihcleuqsreviecsnartehtelihwgnittimsnartmorfCNTehtstneverP• ecnadepmiwoL:nepohcleuqS• ecnadepmihgiH:desolchcleuqS•

6CNnoitcennocoN

7QSS

lortnochcleuqsreviecer-buS .noitarepolatigidrofniplortnochcleuqsPCMroCNTehtottcennoC• .neposihcleuqsreviecsnartehtelihwgnittimsnartmorfCNTehtstneverP• ecnadepmiwoL:nepohcleuqS• ecnadepmihgiH:desolchcleuqS•

8DNGdnuorG

9SKP

lortnocenilTTPreviecsnarT .timsnartotlanimretsihtdnuorG• .noitarepolatigidrofnipgnihctiwseviecer/timsnartPCMroCNTehtottcennoC• .stimsnartreviecsnartehtnehwsetumtupnioiduaenohporciM•

01CNnoitcennocoN

11DKP tupnioiduaenohporciM .noitarepolatigidrofnipatadtimsnartPCMroCNTehtottcennoC•

21DNGdnuorG

31SS

lortnocTTP .timsnartotlanimretsihtdnuorG• .)kcajCIMhtiwlellarapni(rellortnoclanretxerehtorohctiwstoofagnitcennocroF• .stimsnartreviecsnartehtnehwetumTONseodtupnioiduaenohporciM•

ACC2

Front view

(Rear panel)

16 CONNECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT

r wt

GND

yEXT.CONT

Front view

(Rear panel)

TXC

Circuit of each TXC (pin 1, 2, 4, and 6)

Circuit of ALC inputs (pin 3, 5, 7, and 8)

(20 V DC, 20 mA max.)

pin 3

pin 5

pin 7

pin 8

.oNniP niP emaN noitcnuF

1CXT34 reviecsnartehtnehwdednuorG zHM044/034ehtnostimsnart ).xamAm02,V02CD(.dnab

2CXT05 reviecsnartehtnehwdednuorG .dnabzHM05ehtnostimsnart ).xamAm02,V02CD(

3CLA reifilpmamorftupniCLAzHM05 .)V7–(

4CXT21 reviecsnartehtnehwdednuorG .dnabzHG2.1ehtnostimsnart ).xamAm02,V02CD(

5CLA morftupniCLAzHM)044(034 .)V7–(reifilpma

6BXT41 reviecsnartehtnehwdednuorG .dnabzHM441ehtnostimsnart ).xamAm02,V02CD(

7CLA reifilpmamorftupniCLAzHG2.1 .)V7–(

8CLA morftupniCLAzHM441 .)V7–(reifilpma

lateM revoc DNGdnuorG

TYPICAL MCP/ TNC SETUP

TNC/MCP

TS-2000

TS-2000X

TS-2000B PS-53

LINEAR AMPLIFIER (50 MHz, VHF, UHF and 1.2 GHz)

Connect an external 50 MHz/ VHF/ UHF/ 1.2 GHz power amplifier control cable to the EXT.CONT connector

(1 male EXT.CONT connector (E07-0851-XX) is supplied). The TX/RX switching time can be configured

independently for each band, accessing Menu Nos. 28B ~ 28E. Select 1 for 10 ms delay or 2 for 25 ms delay.

However, when CW Full Break-in is enabled, 10 ms switching delay is applied automatically regardless of the

settings. You can also disable the EXT.CONT control, selecting OFF (default).

Note: The TX/RX control method differs, depending on external amplifier models. Most amplifiers enter the TX mode when the control

terminal is grounded. For those amplifiers, connect the metal cover of the EXT.CONT connector to the GND terminal of the amplifier and

connect pin 2 (50 MHz), pin 6 (144 MHz), pin 1 (430/ 440 MHz), or pin 4 (1.2 GHz) of the connector to the control terminal of the amplifier.

Personal computer

Power supply for

TNC/ MCP

Power supply

for TS-2000(X)/

TS-B2000

Red

Black

EXT.CONT connector

INSTALLING OPTIONS

You will require a Phillips screwdriver when installing

the optional units.

REMOVING THE BOTTOM CASE

When installing the optional DRU-3A or VS-3 unit,

remove the bottom case first.

1Remove the 10 screws.

2Lift off the bottom case.

DRU-3A DIGITAL RECORDING UNIT

SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER

CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.

1Remove the bottom case (10 screws).

2Locate the DRU-3A connector.

3Peel off the paper on the cushion attached to the

PC board of the transceiver.

4Plug the DRU-3A into the DRU-3A connector of

the PC board.

5Press the top of the DRU-3A to affix it to the

cushion.

DRU-3A

6Replace the bottom case (10 screws).

Note: After the installation, you can adjust the DRU-3A playback

volume by selecting Menu No. 14.

VS-3 VOICE SYNTHESIZER UNIT

SWITCH OFF THE POWER AND UNPLUG THE DC POWER

CABLE BEFORE BEGINNING INSTALLATION.

1Remove the bottom case (10 screws).

2Locate the VS-3 jack.

3Hold the VS-3 unit with the component side facing

up, and insert the VS-3 connector into the VS-3

jack.

4Replace the bottom case (10 screws).

Note: After the installation, you can adjust the VS-3 playback volume

by selecting Menu No. 15.

Cushion

17 INSTALLING OPTIONS

MB-430 MOBILE BRACKET

When installing the MB-430, attach the supplied

plastic spacers (G11-2698-XX) to the transceiver in

advance. This is necessary to protect the

TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 transceiver from scratches.

Once the bracket is installed onto the vehicle,

prepare the transceiver by loosely screwing in the

rear screws. Hook those screws onto the rear guide

rail of the mounting bracket then adjust the

transceiver to your desired angle before tightening

the screws. Insert and tighten the front screws to

secure the transceiver in place.

To remove the transceiver from the bracket, first

remove the front screws, then loosen the rear screws

slightly and pull the transceiver forward to unlatch it

from the bracket.

Do not install the transceiver so that it is vertically on its side.

RC-2000 REMOTE PANEL

Plug the modular cable from the RC-2000 into the

PANEL connector on the TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 rear

panel. Access Menu Nos. 58 ~ 60 to adjust the panel

configuration if necessary.

TS-2000/ TS-2000X

TS-B2000

Rear screw Rear screw

Front screw

Make sure the tab faces out

G11-2698-XX

TROUBLESHOOTING

Note:

◆

Record the date of purchase, serial number and dealer from

whom the transceiver was purchased.

◆

For your own information, retain a written record of any

maintenance performed on the transceiver.

◆

When claiming warranty service, please include a photocopy of

the bill of sale, or other proof-of-purchase showing the date of

sale.

CLEANING

The keys, controls and case of the transceiver are

likely to become soiled after extended use. Remove

the controls from the transceiver and clean them with

a neutral detergent and warm water. Use a neutral

detergent (no strong chemicals) and a damp cloth to

clean the case.

LITHIUM BATTERY

This transceiver uses an EEPROM to store memory

channel data, menu configurations and all necessary

operation parameters. So, you never have to worry

about replacing batteries to operate the transceiver.

However, the transceiver’s built-in TNC requires a

lithium battery (CR-2032) to store the TNC data.

Battery lifetime varies, but under normal operating

conditions, it should last for approximately 5 years.

If you find that the TNC no longer stores the TNC

parameters, contact an authorized KENWOOD

service center for replacing the lithium battery.

DEMONSTRATION MODE

The transceiver can be configured to enter the

demonstration mode for display purposes. To enter

the demonstration mode:

1Switch the transceiver OFF.

2Press [FUNC]+[ ] to switch the transceiver ON.

• On the dot-matrix display windows, you will see

a few killer whales jump across the display.

You will also notice the display brightness

changes and LEDs turn ON and OFF

automatically.

• If you operate the transceiver while in the

demonstration mode, the demonstration is

temporarily paused. But, if no operation is

performed for more than 10 seconds, the

demonstration starts again.

3To exit the demonstration mode, first turn the

transceiver OFF, then press [FUNC]+[ ] to turn

the transceiver ON.

Note: You cannot exit the demonstration mode by simply switching

the transceiver OFF or performing a full reset {page 92}. You must

switch the transceiver OFF then press [FUNC]+[ ] to turn the

transceiver ON in order to exit the demonstration mode.

GENERAL INFORMATION

Your transceiver has been factory aligned and tested

to specification before shipment. Under normal

circumstances, the transceiver will operate in

accordance with these operating instructions. All

adjustable trimmers, coils and resistors in the

transceiver were preset at the factory. They should

only be readjusted by a qualified technician who is

familiar with this transceiver and has the necessary

test equipment. Attempting service or alignment

without factory authorization can void the transceiver

warranty.

When operated properly, the transceiver will provide

years of service and enjoyment without requiring

further realignment. The information in this section

gives some general service procedures requiring little

or no test equipment.

SERVICE

If it is ever necessary to return the equipment to your

dealer or service center for repair, pack the

transceiver in its original box and packing material.

Include a full description of the problems

experienced. Include both your telephone number

and fax number (if available) along with your name

and address in case the service technician needs to

call for further explanation while investigating your

problem. Don’t return accessory items unless you

feel they are directly related to the service problem.

You may return your transceiver for service to the

authorized KENWOOD dealer from whom you

purchased it or any authorized KENWOOD service

center. A copy of the service report will be returned

with the transceiver. Please do not send

subassemblies or printed circuit boards. Send the

complete transceiver.

Tag all returned items with your name and call sign

for identification. Please mention the model and

serial number of the transceiver in any

communication regarding the problem.

SERVICE NOTE

If you desire to correspond on a technical or

operational problem, please make your note short,

complete, and to the point. Help us help you by

providing the following:

1Model and serial number of equipment.

2Question or problem you are having.

3Other equipment in your station pertaining to the

problem.

4Meter readings.

5Other related information (Menu setup, mode,

frequency, key sequence to induce malfunction,

etc.).

DO NOT PACK THE EQUIPMENT IN CRUSHED

NEWSPAPERS FOR SHIPMENT! EXTENSIVE DAMAGE MAY

RESULT DURING ROUGH HANDLING OR SHIPPING.

100

18 TROUBLESHOOTING

melborP esuaCelbaborP noitcAevitcerroC egaP .feR

tonlliwreviecsnartehT retfapurewop CDV8.31agnitcennoc dnaylppusrewop gnihtoN.][gnisserp ,yalpsidehtnosraeppa siesionreviecerondna .draeh

.FFOsiylppusrewopCD .elbacrewopytluaF

detcennoctonsielbacrewopehT .yleruces .neposiesufelbacrewoP

.ylppusrewopCDehtNOhctiwS mrifnoC.elbacrewopehttcepsnI .tcerroceraseitiralop )–(evitagen:kcalB;)+(evitisop:deR CDehtotsnoitcennocehtmrifnoC .eruceseraylppusrewop .esufnwolbehtfoesuacehtrofkooL ynagnitcerrocdnagnitcepsniretfA ehtfoesufwenallatsni,smelborp .gnitardeificeps

ehtNOgnihctiwsretfA reviecsnarteht,rewop noitcnuftonseod ,elpmaxeroF.yllamron tcerrocnirostigidon ehtnoraeppastigid .yalpsid

edistuosiegatlovtupniehTV8.31

CD ±%51.)CDV8.51ot7.11(

sahrossecorporcimehT .denoitcnuflam

ot21aesuroegatlovtupniehttcerroC .yrettabV61

ROSSECORPORCIM“weiveR tahwgnidnatsrednuretfA.”TESER fI.teseRlaitraPaod,tsoleblliwatad .teseRlluFaod,sniamermelborpeht

ehtNOgnihctiwsretfA lanretnieht,reviecsnart ehtotsteserCNT .seulavtluafedyrotcaf

muihtilpukcabCNTlanretniehT .wolootsiegatlovyrettab ruoyybdellatsniyrettabwenaevaH atarorelaed DOOWNEKDOOWNEK DOOWNEK DOOWNEKDOOWNEK .retneCecivreS 99

seodreviecsnartehT yltcerrocdnopserton yekgnisserpretfa gninrutrosnoitanibmoc snoitcurtsnirepslortnoc .launamsihtni

gniebtoneraserudecorP .ylesicerpdewollof sinoitcnufkcoLycneuqerFehT .NO stidnarossecorporcimehT .gnitteserdeenyromem

erareviecsnartehtnosyekehT ehtgnitarepoelihwelbaliavanu .lortnocgninuT

SNOITNEVNOCGNITIRW“weiveR .”DEWOLLOF sserP ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,]KCOLF/TTA[]KCOLF/TTA[ ]KCOLF/TTA[ ]KCOLF/TTA[]KCOLF/TTA[ ot

.FFOnoitcnufehthctiws ROSSECORPORCIM“weiveR tahwgnidnatsrednuretfA.”TESER fI.teseRlaitraPaod,tsoleblliwatad .teseRlluFaod,sniamermelborpeht neht,lortnocgninuTehtgnitarepopotS .syeketairporppaehtsserp

–

tonnacycneuqerfehT .degnahceb ronoitcnufkcoLycneuqerFehT .NOsinoitcnufllAkcoL sserP ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,]KCOLF/TTA[]KCOLF/TTA[ ]KCOLF/TTA[ ]KCOLF/TTA[]KCOLF/TTA[ hctiwsot

.FFOnoitcnufeht sserprO ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ]CNUF[ ]CNUF[]CNUF[ ,]AKCOL/ERP[]AKCOL/ERP[ ]AKCOL/ERP[ ]AKCOL/ERP[]AKCOL/ERP[ ot

.FFOnoitcnufehthctiws

siytilauqoiduaBSS rohgiheht;roopyrev seicneuqerfoiduawol .tnesbaera

siedomnoitarepognorwehT .reviecerehtrofdetceles ehT HTDIW/OLHTDIW/OL HTDIW/OL HTDIW/OLHTDIW/OL rolortnoc

TFIHS/IHTFIHS/IH TFIHS/IH TFIHS/IHTFIHS/IH yltcerrocnisilortnoc

.tes .NOsi2ro1noitcudeResioN

.NOsilecnaCtaeB

.edomehtrofBSLroBSUtceleS

ehtnruT HTDIW/OLHTDIW/OL HTDIW/OL HTDIW/OLHTDIW/OL lortnoc ehtdnaesiwkcolcretnuoc TFIHS/IHTFIHS/IH TFIHS/IH TFIHS/IHTFIHS/IH

.esiwkcolclortnoc sserP ]LEVEL/.R.N[]LEVEL/.R.N[ ]LEVEL/.R.N[ ]LEVEL/.R.N[]LEVEL/.R.N[ ehthctiwsot

.FFOnoitcnuf sserP ]LAUNAM/.C.B[]LAUNAM/.C.B[ ]LAUNAM/.C.B[ ]LAUNAM/.C.B[]LAUNAM/.C.B[ ehthctiwsot

.FFOnoitcnuf

TROUBLESHOOTING

The problems described in this table are commonly encountered operational malfunctions. These types of

difficulties are usually caused by improper hook-up, accidental incorrect control settings, or operator error due to

incomplete programming. These problems are usually not caused by circuit failure. Please review this table, and

the appropriate section(s) of this instruction manual, before assuming your transceiver is defective.

Note: Placing a powered portable transceiver near this transceiver may cause noise in the transceiver.

101

18 TROUBLESHOOTING

melborP esuaCelbaborP noitcAevitcerroC egaP .feR

eraslangisoN eviecerrodeviecer smeesytivitisnes .roop

ehT LQS .esiwkcolcyllufsilortnoc .NOsinoitcnufrotaunettAehT

]DNES[ ehtdna,desserpsaw .edomtimsnartniwonsireviecsnart ciM,rO ]TTP[ .desserpsi sawhtdiwdnabeviecerehT .tesyltcerrocni

rotcennocannetnagnorwehT .detcelessaw)2TNAro1TNA( .FFOsireifilpmaerpeviecerehT

ehtnruT LQS lortnoc.esiwkcolcretnuoc

sserP ]KCOLF/TTA[ ehthctiwsot

.FFOnoitcnuf sserP ]DNES[ eviecerotnruterot ciMesaelerrO.edom ]TTP[ .

dna”SRETLIFPSD“weiveR RETLIFEVIECEREHTGNIGNAHC“ slortnocehttesdna,”HTDIWDNAB .ylgnidrocca sserP ]CNUF[ ,]2/1TNA/TA[ tcelesot

.rotcennocannetnarehtoeht sserP ]AKCOL/ERP[ ehthctiwsot

.NOnoitcnuf

9175

–

eraslangisoN eviecerrodeviecer smeesytivitisnes siretem-S;roop .elacsllufgnidaer

.woloottessawlortnocFRehTehtnruT NIAGFRNIAM ylluflortnoc

.esiwkcolc 81

slangisdevieceR yllatotera .elbigilletninu

sawedomnoitaludomgnorwehT .detceles sserP ]OTUA/BSU/BSL[ ,

]VER/KSF/WC[ ro, ]RAN/MA/MF[ ot

.edomnoitaludomtcerrocehttceles

lliwnacSyromeM .gninnacstratston 1

ehT LQS testonsawlortnoc

.yltcerroc slennahcyromemowtnahtsseL .dekcolnuerew slennahcyromemowtnahtsseL .demmargorperew ehT LQS testonsawlortnoc

.yltcerroc

ehttsujdA LQS tsujotslortnoc .esiondnuorgkcabetanimile .slennahcyromemowttsaeltakcolnU

yromemowttsaeltaniataderotS .slennahc ehttsujdA LQS .slortnoc

64,91

lliwnacSyromeM ehtfoenonacston eht;slennahcderots silennahcderised .tuodekcolTON

lennahceht,detcelesnacSpuorGhtiW .puorgtnereffidanisinacsottnawuoy yromemehtsniatnoctahtpuorgehttceleS .nacsottnawuoylennahc 96

lliwnacSmargorP .gninnacstratston eraseicneuqerfdnednatratsehT .lacitnedi .seicneuqerfdnednatratstnereffiderotS26

tonseodgninuT .yllufsseccushsinif dnaelbaclaixaocehtfoecnadepmiehT .dehctamtonsawannetna hsinifyllufsseccustonseodgninuT ehthguohtlasnoitidnocnognidneped .1:3nahtrellamssetacidniretemRWS

ehtrewolotmetsysannetnaehttsujdA .RWS 1

sirenutlanretniehT dessapyb retfayletaidemmi .detratssigninut

ootsimetsysannetnaehtfoRWSehT .hgih ehtrewolotmetsysannetnaehttsujdA .RWS 1

timsnarttonnacuoY uoyhguohtneve ciMsserp ]TTP[ ro tlusersnoissimsnart .stcatnoconni

tonsawgulpenohporcimehT CIMehtotniyletelpmocdetresni .rotcennoc .NOsinoitcnuftibihnItimsnarTehT fodaetsnidetcelessawKSFroWC .edomeciova sawhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSDehT .detcelesylreporpni rotcennocannetnagnorwehT .detcelessaw)2TNAro1TNA(

CIMehterusne,rewopehtFFOnruT ,tinistcejbongierofonsahrotcennoc .ylmrifrotcennocehtnigulpneht .FFOot45.oNuneMegnahC sserP ]OTUA/BSU/BSL[ ro

]RAN/MA/MF[ .edomeciovatcelesot .22.oNuneMnisgnittesehttsujdA

sserP ]CNUF[ ,]2/1TNA/TA[ tcelesot

.rotcennocannetnarehtoeht

1491

102

18 TROUBLESHOOTING

melborP esuaCelbaborP noitcAevitcerroC egaP .feR

otgnitpmettA nistlusertimsnart ”OLLEH“eht gniraeppaegassem eviecerehtdna gniebedom .derotser

detcennoctonsiannetnaehT .yltcerroc dnaannetnaehtfosecnadepmiehT ylreporptonerareviecsnart .dehctam V8.31edistuosiegatlovtupniehTCD ±.)CDV8.51ot7.11(%51 rewopCDehtfognitartnerrucehT .hguonetonsiylppus

.noitcennocannetnaehtkcehC .yrassecensatcerroC annetnaehtfoRWSehtecudeR .metsys

ot21aesuroegatlovtupniehttcerroC .yrettabV61 asahtahtylppusrewopCDaesU taA5.02nahteromfognitartnerruc .CDV8.31

sahreviecsnartehT .rewoptimsnartwol 1

.woloottessiniagenohporcimehT

snoitcennocmetsysannetnarooP .RWShgihgnisuacera

esaercni,edomMAroBSSninehW .niagenohporcimeht .snoitcennocannetnaehtkcehC sirenutannetnaehttahtmrifnoC .RWSwolagnitroper

tonseodXOV .etarepo .woloottessiniagXOVehT.niagXOVehtesaercnI93

reifilpmaraeniLFH .etarepotonseod 1

siyalerlortnocreifilpmaraenilehT .FFO ehT ETOMER signiriwrotcennoc

.ytluafrognorw

.NOotA82.oNuneMegnahC

ehttcepsnI ETOMER gniriwrotcennoc .yrassecensatcerrocdna

,zHM441,zHM05 rozHM044/034 raenilzHG2.1 tonseodreifilpma .etarepo

.FFOsilortnocreifilpmaraenilehT sielbaclortnocreifilpmaraenilehT ehtotdetcennoc ETOMER

.rotcennoc ehT TNOC.TXE signiriwrotcennoc

.ytluafrognorw

.NOotE82~B82.soNuneMegnahC ehtotelbacehttcennoC TNOC.TXE

.rotcennoc

ehttcepsnI TNOC.TXE rotcennoc .yrassecensatcerrocdnagniriw

6769

sseccatonnacuoY .sretaeperesudna 1

roenotbusaeriuqersretaeperynaM .sseccaotenotzH0571

siycneuqerftfihsronoitceridtfihS .gnorw

”NOITAREPORETAEPERMF“weiveR dnaycneuqerftcerrocehttcelesdna .enotbusfoepyt s’retaeperehtnotimsnarttsumuoY ehtnoeviecerdnaycneuqerftupni otrefeR.ycneuqerftuptuos’retaeper .”NOITAREPORETAEPERMF“

noitarepolatigiD onrowefnistluser stcatnocrostcennoc .snoitatsrehtohtiw

ehtneewtebsnoitcennoclacisyhP dna,retupmoc,reviecsnart erawtfosro,tcerrocnisiPCM/CNT .gnorweraPCM/CNTehtnisgnittes eviecerdnatimsnarttnereffiD .desugnieberaseicneuqerf

reviecsnartehtneewtebslevelehT .tcerrocnieraPCM/CNTehtdna

ehtrolangisdettimsnartruoY .kaewootsilangiseviecergnimocni ruoyniretemarapemityaledXTehT .tesyltcerrocnisawPCM/CNT

sihtgnisusnoitcennocllakcehc-eR dna,launamPCM/CNTruoy,launam salaunamerawdrahretupmocruoy .secnerefer snoitcnufTIXdnaTIRehttahtmrifnoC uoytahtmrifnoC.FFOdehctiwsera .ycneuqerftilpsgnitarepoTONera uneMgnisuslevelXRdnaXTtsujdA noslortnocleveldna,D05~B05.soN .PCM/CNTruoy roannetnaruoyetacoler/tneiroeR .niagannetnaruoyesaercni otemityaledXTPCM/CNTehtteS .sm003nahterom

59,49

04,83

–

tastpmettA ehtgnillortnoc ehthtiwreviecsnart evahretupmoc .deliaf

stcennoctahtelbacehthtiwmelborP .0002B-ST/)X(0002-STehtotCPeht ruoynitessretemarapnoitacinummoC hctamtonodmargorplanimret .sretemarapreviecsnart

elbacdnaelbacehtkcehC .snoitcennoc ehtnisretemarapemasehtesU .reviecsnartehtdnamargorplanimret .65.oNuneMehtkcehC

103

18 TROUBLESHOOTING

OPERATION NOTICES

The TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 has been designed and

engineered to avoid possible hardware glitches.

However, you may notice the following symptoms

when you operate the transceiver. These symptoms

are not malfunctions.

DC POWER SUPPLY

As stated in the SPECIFICATIONS {page 105}, this

transceiver requires a supplied DC voltage source of

13.8 V ±15%. If you find that the transceiver cannot

be switched ON, or that is shut OFF automatically,

the DC voltage may be outside the specified range.

In such a case, remove the DC cable from the

transceiver immediately and confirm that the supplied

voltage is within the specified range.

TX SIGNAL HARMONICS

The TS-2000(X)/ TS-B2000 has 2 independent

receivers. Thus, it can receive signals while you are

transmitting. Because of this, the harmonics or the

mixed heterodyne signal images of your transmission

signal can be monitored through the receiver. Even if

the TX Monitor function {page 79} is OFF, the

transmission signal may be monitored through the

speaker.

INTERNAL BEATS

On some spots of the transceiver bands, the S-meter

moves or you cannot receive any signals. This is

inevitable when you use superheterodyne receivers.

You may notice the signals on the following spots of

the bands.

On the main transceiver:

51.259 MHz, 430.151 MHz, 432.209 MHz,

436.799 MHz, 439.298 MHz, 442.440 MHz

(K-type only), 1247.999 MHz, and 1269.387 MHz.

When the sub-receiver frequency is 144.000 MHz:

146.663 MHz (K-type only) and 436.249 MHz.

When the sub-receiver frequency is 440.000 MHz:

437.333 MHz and 444.315 MHz (K-type only).

Note: When the sub-receiver frequency changes, the above beat

frequencies may be changed accordingly. In this case, turn the

sub-receiver OFF to remove the internal spurious signals.

On the sub-receiver:

144.490 MHz, 144.945 MHz, 430.150 MHz,

436.210 MHz, 436.800 MHz, 442.020 MHz

(K-type only), 449.400 MHz (K-type only) and

429.050 MHz (K-type only).

VISUAL SCAN

When you have the same VHF band or UHF band

for both the main transceiver and the sub-receiver,

the Visual scan may indicate the signals on the

bar-graph display even if no signal is monitored on

the main transceiver. This error occurs due to the

internal spurious harmonics that are generated by

the sub-receiver. Refer to “INTERNAL BEATS”,

above, for the frequencies.

SENSITIVITY (K-type only)

While the main transceiver is receiving on the VHF band

(142 ~ 152 MHz), the sensitivity of the main transceiver

slightly degrades when you select 118 ~ 136 MHz or

155 ~ 300 MHz for the sub-receiver.

AGC

When you turn the AGC function OFF {page 38}, the

receiving audio signals can be distorted. In this case,

decrease the RF GAIN, turn the pre-amplifier OFF, or

turn the attenuator ON. In general, the RF GAIN is

greatly reduced when the AGC is turned OFF.

SUB-RECEIVER

When you turn the sub-receiver ON or OFF, a

popping noise may be monitored from the speaker.

104

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

PS-53

Regulated DC Power

Supply (22.5 A)

MC-43S

Hand Microphone

MC-47

Multi-function Microphone

HS-6

Small Headphones

SP-23

External Speaker

SP-50B

Mobile Speaker

MB-430

Mobile Mounting Bracket

HS-5

Deluxe Headphones

DRU-3A

Digital Recording Unit

VS-3

Voice Synthesizer Unit

LF-30A

Low-pass Filter

PG-2Z

DC Cable

MC-60A

Deluxe Desktop

Microphone

MC-90

DSP-compatible Desktop

Microphone

MC-80

Desktop Microphone

Microphone sensitivity is low in FM mode.

MC-52DM

DTMF Microphone

UT-20

1.2 GHz TX/ RX unit

RC-2000

Mobile Controller

Service center installation only. Contact

an authorized dealer for details.

See page 98 for the installation.

ARCP-2000

Advanced Radio Control

Program

This option is supplied with the TS-B2000.

105

SPECIFICATIONS

lareneG 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

edoM /)MF(E3F/)MA(E3A/)WC(A1A/)BSU,BSL(E3J

)D2F(D2F/)KSF(D1F

slennahcyrome

mforebmuN003

ecnadepmiannetnA05Ω051~7.61renuTannetnAhtiw( Ω)

egatloVylppuSV8.31CD ±%51

dohtemgnidnuorGdnuorgev

itageN

tnerruC ).xam(timsnarTsselroA5.02

)langison(evieceRsselroA6.2

egnarerutarepmetelbasU01– °05~C °41+(C °22

1~F °)F

01–(ytilibatsycneuqerF °05~C °)C niaM nihtiwedomXTMF ±01x5.0

6–

±zHk2

nihtiwedomrehtO ±01x5.0

6–

(±)mpp5.0

buSnihtiW ±01x5.0

6–

±zH006

)erutarepmetmoorta(ycaruccaycneuqerFnihtiW ±mpp5.0

)dedulcnisnoitcejorPDxHxW(snoisnemiD

ni16.41xni1

2.4xni60.11/mm173x701x182

)X0002-ST/0002-ST(

ni65.31xni12.4xni60.11/mm5.443x701x182

)0002B-ST(

thgieW

bl2.

71/gk8.7.xorppA

)0002-ST(

bl6.61/gk5.7.xorppA

)0002B-ST(

bl1.81/gk2.8.xorppA

rettimsnarT 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

egnarycneuqerF

dnabm061

)epyt-K(zHM0.2~8.1

)epyt-E(zHM0.2~18.1

)epyt-2E

(zHM58.1~38.1

)epyt-K(zHM0.2~8.1

)epyt-E(zHM0.2~18.1

dnabm08 )epyt-K(zHM0.4~5.3

)sepyt-EllA(zHM8.3~5.3

)epy

t-K(zHM0.4~5.3

)sepyt-E(zHM8.3~5.3

dnabm04 )epyt-K(zHM3.7~0.7

)sepyt-EllA(zHM1.7~0.7

)epyt-K(zHM3.7~0.7

)se

pyt-E(zHM1.7~0.7

dnabm03zHM51.01~1.01

dnabm02zHM53.41~0.41

dnabm71zHM861.81~860.81

dnabm51zHM54.12~0.12

dnabm2

1zHM99.42~98.42

dnabm01zHM7.92~0.82

dnabm6

)epyt-K(zHM0.45~0.05

)epyt-E(zHM0.25~0.05

)epyt-2E(zHM2.05~0.05

pyt-K(zHM0.45~0.05

)epyt-E(zHM0.25~0.05

dnabm2 )epyt-K(zHM841~441

)sepyt-EllA(zHM641~441

)epyt-K(zHM841~44

)sepyt-E(zHM641~441

dnabmc07 )epyt-K(zHM054~034

)sepyt-EllA(zHM044~034

)epyt-K(zHM054~034

)sepyt-E(zHM044

~034

dnabmc32 zHM0031~0421

)02-TU/w( zHM0031~0421

106

20 SPECIFICATIONS

rettimsnarT 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

rewoptuptuO

MF/KSF/WC/BSS

.xaM /)dnabmc07(W05/)dnabm2~m061(W001

)dnabmc

32(W01

.niM /)dnabmc07(W5/)dnabm2~m061(W5

)dnabmc32(W1

.xaM /)dnabmc07(W5.21/)dnabm2~m061(W52

)dnabmc32(W

5.2

.niM /)dnabmc07(W5/)dnabm2~m061(W5

)dnabmc32(W1

noitaludoM

BSSdecnalaB

MFecnatcaeR

MAlevelwoL

snoissimesuoir

upS

dnabm01~m061sselroBd05–

dnabmc07~m6sselroBd06–

dnabmc32sselroBd05–

)BSS(noisserppusreirraCeromroBd05

noiss

erppusdnabedisdetnawnU

)zHk0.1ycneuqerfnoitaludom( eromroBd05

ycneuqerfmumixaM

)MF(noitaived

ediW ±sselrozH

worraN ±sselrozHk5.2

egnarycneuqerftfihsTIX ±zHk0.02

ecnadepmienohporciM006 Ω

revieceR 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

epyttiucriC reviecnartniaM enydoretehrepus.vnocelpurdauQ:KSF/MA/WC/BSS

ydoretehrepusnoisrevnocelpirT:MF

reviecer-buSenydoretehrepusnoisrevnocelbuoD:MA/MF

egnarycneuqerF

reviecs

nartniaM

)sepytllA(zHM0.06~30.0

)epyt-K(zHM251~241

)sepyt-EllA(zHM641~441

)epyt-K(zHM054~024

)sepyt-EllA(zHM044~034

)02-TU/w(zHM0031~0421

)sepytllA(zHM0.06~30.0

)epyt-K(zHM251~241

)epyt-E(zHM641~441

)epyt-K(zHM054~024

)epyt-E(zHM044~034

)sepytllA(zHM0031~0421

reviecer-buS

)epyt-K(zHM471~811

)sepyt-EllA(zHM641~441

)epy

t-K(zHM215~022

)sepyt-EllA(zHM044~034

)epyt-K(zHM471~811

)epyt-E(zHM641~441

)epyt-K(zHM215~022

)epyt-E(zHM044~034

etaidemretnI

)FI(ycneuqerF

reviecsnartniaM

FIts1

zHM529.57rozHM580.96:zHM06~30.0

zHM598.14:zHM215~8

zHM594.531:zHM0031~0421

zHM596.01:FIdn2

zHk554:FIdr3

zHk0.21:FIht4

reviecer-buS zHM525.85:FIts1

zHk554:FI

dn2

107

20 SPECIFICATIONS

revieceR 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

ytivitisneS

KSF/WC/BSS

)Bd01N/S(

niaM

4:zHM507.1~5.0 μsselroV

2.0:zHM5.42~50

7.1 μsselroV

31.0:zHM0.03~5.42 μsselroV

31.0:zHM0.45~0.05 μsselroV

11.0:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

61.0:

zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

11.0:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

11.0:zHM054~034 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

11.0:zHM0

031~0421 μ)sepytllA(sselroV

)Bd01N/S(

6.13:zHM507.1~5.0 μsselroV

0.2:zHM5.42~507.1 μsselroV

3.1:zHM0.03~5.

42 μsselroV

3.1:zHM0.45~0.05 μsselroV

0.1:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

4.1:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

0.1

:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

0.1:zHM054~034 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

0.1:zHM0031~0421 μ)sepytllA(sselroV

)DAN

ISBd21(

22.0:zHM0.03~0.82 μsselroV

22.0:zHM0.45~0.05 μsselroV

81.0:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

52.0:zHM8

41~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

81.0:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

81.0:zHM054~034 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

81.0:zHM0031~

0421 μ)sepytllA(sselroV

)Bd01N/S(

buS

55.1:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

52.2:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselro

55.1:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

55.1:zHM054~834 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

)DANISBd21(

82.0:zHM641~441 μ)sepy

t-EllA(sselroV

04.0:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

82.0:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

82.0:zHM054~834 μ)epyt

-K(sselroV

ytivitceleS

BSS

/zH003:tuc-woL(

)zH0062:tuc-iH

niaM

zHk4.4:Bd06–,zHk2.2:Bd6–

/zH001:tuc-woL(

)zH

0003:tuc-iH

zHk0.21:Bd05–,zHk0.6:Bd6–

MFzHk0.52:Bd05–,zHk0.21:Bd6–

MA buS zHk0.52:Bd05–,zHk0.21:Bd6–

MFzHk0.5

2:Bd05–,zHk0.21:Bd6–

noitcejeregamI reviecsnartniaMeromroBd07

reviecer-buSeromroBd06

noitcejerFIts1 reviecsn

artniaMeromroBd07

reviecer-buSeromroBd06

)zHk1ta(noitaunettaretlifhctoNeromroBd03

)zHk1ta(noitaunettalecnac

taeBeromroBd04

egnarycneuqerftfihsTIR ±zHk0.02

108

20 SPECIFICATIONS

revieceR 0002-ST

0002B-ST X0002-ST

ytivitisneshcleuqS

MA/KSF/WC/BSS

niaM

0.81:zHM507.1~5.0 μsselroV

8.1:zHM7.8

2~8.1 μsselroV

1.1:zHM0.45~0.05 μsselroV

1.1:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

1.1:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

1.1:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

1.1:zHM054~034 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

1.1:zHM0031~0421 μ)sepytllA(sselroV

.0:zHM0.03~0.82 μsselroV

2.0:zHM0.45~0.05 μsselroV

1.0:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

61.0:zHM841~441 μ)epy

t-K(sselroV

1.0:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

1.0:zHM054~034 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

1.0:zHM0031~0421 μ)sepytllA(sselroV

buS

1.1:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

1.1:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

1.1:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-El

lA(sselroV

1.1:zHM054~834 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

81.0:zHM641~441 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

32.0:zHM841~441 μ)epyt-K(

sselroV

81.0:zHM044~034 μ)sepyt-EllA(sselroV

81.0:zHM054~834 μ)epyt-K(sselroV

8(tuptuooiduA Ω)noitrotsid%01

,eromroW5.1

)2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXE(ecnadepmituptuooiduA8Ω

109

APPENDIX

TS-B2000 FRONT PANEL

PHONES

MIC

RESET

DIGITAL

SIGNAL

PROCESSOR

q[ ] (POWER) switch

Press and hold briefly to switch the transceiver power

ON. Press again to switch the power OFF.

wPower indicator

While the transceiver is turned ON, it lights red.

eMIC connector

Connect a compatible microphone to this connector,

then securely screw down the connector locking ring

{page 3}.

rPHONES jack

Connect a set of headphones to this jack. Inserting a

plug into the jack automatically mutes the audio from

the speaker {page 3}.

tRESET button

Push this switch to reset the microprocessor in the

transceiver. This sets all the contents of the memory

function to the factory default values.

110

21 APPENDIX

BUILT-IN TNC COMMAND LIST

All descriptions in this section are for the users convenience only. KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this

documentation in any way. The built-in TNC does not support the digipeater functions due to the RAM capacity.

dnammoC emaN trohS tluafeD retemaraP noitpircseD

FLOTUAUANOFFO/NO retfaretupmocehtot)FL(deefenilasdnes,NOnehW .)RC(nruteregairrachcae

NELWAWA88/7.tsohstidnaCNTneewtebstibfohtgnelehtsteS

NOCAEBB0YREVE

/YREVE nRETFA ~0=n( )052

ehtfoslavretnitatekcapnocaebasdnes,YREVEottesfI nocaebasdnes,RETFAottesfI.)n(doirepdeificeps fotinuehT.)n(doirepdeificepsehtretfaecnoylnotekcap .sdnoces01sin

TXETBTB— 951~0 sretcarahc nocaebafonoitropatadehtfotnetnocehtseificepS .tekcap

ARBILACLAC—— otQretnE.)oitar05/05(evawerauqskram/ecapsasdneS .edomdnammoCehterotserdnaedometarbilaCtixe

KCEHCHC03052~0 fonoitucexelitnutuo-pordlangismorflavretniehtseificepS .sdnoces01siretemarapehtfotinuehT.noitcennocsid

TCENNOCC—

AIV(1llaC ,3llac,2llac )9llac...

ehtfongisllacehtsi1llaC.tseuqertcennocasdneS fosngisllacera9llacot2llaC.otdetcennocebotnoitats .hguorhtdetaepigidebotsnoitats

ESREVNOCKroVNOC—— sserP.edomesrevnoCretneotCNTehtsesuaC ]C[+]lrtC[ .edomdnammoCehterotserot

EMITCAPCPCFFOFFO/NO tatekcapasdnes,edomesrevnoCnidnaNOnehW .EMITCAPybdenimreteddoirepehtfoslavretni

RCRCNOFFO/NO otstekcapllaot)RC(nruteregairracasdneppa,NOnehW .tneseb

ENNOCSIDD—— .tseuqertcennocsidasdneS

YALPSIDPSID——

ehtllafosutatstnerrucehtyalpsidotCNTehtsesuaC ,H,C,AreifitnedissalcayficepsoslanacuoY.sdnammoc derisedehtylnofosutatsehtyalpsidotTro,M,L,I dnammocehtneewtebecapsaretnE.ssalcdnammoc .HYALPSID.xe;reifitnedissalcadnaeman

sretemaraptropC232-SR:)CNYSA(A sretcarahcCNTlaicepS:)RAHC(C sretemarapretnuoC:)HTLAEH(H sretemarapDI:)DI(I sutatsknilCNT-ot-CNT:)KNIL(L sretemaraprotinoM:)ROTINOM(M sretemarapgnimiT:)GNIMIT(T

TIAWDWD03052~0 litnunoitcetedreirraconmorflavretniehtseificepS siretemarapehtfotinuehT.noissimsnartfonoitucexe .sdnocesillim01

OHCEENOFFO/NO otsretcarahcdeviecerohceotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW .retupmoceht

RNRMRIFRIFFFOFFO/NO

tonsitifiuoyot)tekcap(ecitonasdnesnoitatsrehtoehT ecitonahcusgniviecer,NOnehW.atadeviecerotydaer aseviecertilitnunoissimsnartdnepsusotCNTehtsesuac .eciton”ydaer“

111

21 APPENDIX

dnammoC emaN trohS tluafeD retemaraP noitpircseD

WOLFFNOFFO/NO potsotretupmocehtsesuacyrtneyekgnitrats,NOnehW .stekcapdeviecergniyalpsid

KCARFRF3 052~0 foyrterlitnunoissimsnartenomorflavretniehtseificepS .dnoces1siretemarapehtfotinuehT.noissimsnart

DUABHBH00210069/0021 neewtebetarrefsnartehtsaspb0069ro0021stceleS .snoitatstekcap

SSIKSSIKFFOFFO/NO

.FFOreviecsnartehthctiwsneht,NOretemarapehtteS nehW.edomSSIKretneotniagaNOreviecsnartehtnruT ”NOC“dna”ATS“eht,edomSSIKsretnereviecsnarteht ,edomSSIKtixeoT.semitwefaylevitanretlaknilbsDEL ehtnrutroCNTehtot0CFF0Catadyranibehtdnes reviecsnartehtnrutuoyemittxenehT.FFOreviecsnart .yllacitamotuaFFOretemarapehtstesCNTeht,NO

MOCMMOCMFFOFFO/NO .stekcaplortnocrotinomoslaotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW .stekcapnoitamrofniylnorotinomottisesuac,FFOnehW

NOCMCMFFOFFO/NO elihwsnoitatsrehtorotinomotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW .noitatstegratehthtiwnoitcennocni

ROTINOMMNOFFO/NO.stekcaprotinomotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW

TPRMRMNOFFO/NO tsiltaepigideritneehtyalpsidotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW .stekcapderotinomrof

LLACYMYMLLACON 6sretcarahc DISS+ .ngisllacruoyseificepS

NELCAPP821552~0 afonoitropatadehtfohtgnelmumixamehtseificepS .tekcap

EMITCAPTCAP01RETFA

/YREVE nRETFA ~0=n( )052

deificepsehtfoslavretnitatekcapasdnes,YREVEottesfI retfaecnoylnotekcapasdnes,RETFAottesfI.)n(doirep .sdnocesillim001sinfotinuehT.)n(doirepdeificepseht

TSISREPEP821552~0 ehtrofytilibaborpetaluclacotretemarapaseificepS .dohtemEMITTOLS/TSISREP

TSISREPPPPNOFFO/NO dohtemEMITTOLS/TSISREPehtesuotCNTehtsesuaC .FFOnehwdohtemTIAWDehtro,NOnehw

TESERTESER—— .sdnammocehtllarofsutatstluafedehtserotseR

EMITPSERSER5 052~0 .yalednoissimsnarttekcaptnemgdelwonkcaehtseificepS .sdnocesillim001siretemarapehtfotinuehT

TRATSER

—— nehtFFOdehctiwssitifisanoitcnufotCNTehtsesuaC .NO

YRTERER0151~0 erastekcapfI.seirternoissimsnartforebmunehtseificepS tcennoca,noitcennocnielihwdetpeccayltcerrocton .seirterforebmundeificepsehtretfaniagatnessitseuqer

CAPDNESESD0$F7$~0.tnesebottekcapasecrofhcihwretcarahcaseificepS

112

21 APPENDIX

Note:

◆

If you are using a PC with a communication program to control the built-in TNC, prepare the RS-232C cable (straight) to connect with the COM

terminal of the transceiver. Then, access Menu No. 56 and select the same communication speed and communications parameters. Other

than 4800 bps, the parameters must be set to 8-bit, 1-stop bit, and non-parity. 4800 bps is also used for the Quick Data Transfer function

{page 80} and the communication parameters are fixed as 8-bit, 2-stop bit, and non-parity.

◆

To use the above commands, you must operate the transceiver in Packet communication mode. The default operation mode is PC Control

Command mode {page 113}. To switch to Packet communication mode, either set Menu No. 55 to “ON” {pages 25, 49} or key in “TC 0”

{page 138}.

dnammoC emaN trohS tluafeD retemaraP noitpircseD

EMITTOLSLS3 052~0 slavretninoitarenegrebmunmodnarfodoirepehtseificepS ehtfotinuehT.dohtemEMITTOLS/TSISREPehtrof .sdnocesillim01siretemarap

ECARTCARTFFOFFO/NO stekcapdeviecerllayalpsidotCNTehtsesuac,NOnehW .yteritneriehtni

SEIRTIRT0 51~0 nidemmargorpseirternoissimsnartforebmunehtseificepS .retnuocyrtereht

YALEDXTXT05021~0 fotratsehtdnaNOTTPneewtebyaledemitehtseificepS .sdnocesillim01siretemarapehtfotinuehT.noissimsnart

OTORPNU

QC AIV(1llaC ,3llac,2llac )9llac...

.edomlocotorpnUnitekcapadnesotsngisllacseificepS era9llacot2llaC.noitanitsedehtfongisllacehtsi1llaC .hguorhtdetaepigidebotsnoitatsfosngisllac

WOLFXXNOFFO/NO ,NOnehwlortnocwolferawtfosmrofrepotCNTehtsesuaC .FFOnehwlortnocwolferawdrahro

113

21 APPENDIX

COM CONNECTOR

All descriptions in the PC CONTROL COMMAND

TABLE are for the users convenience only.

KENWOOD will not support or warrantee this

documentation in any way.

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

This transceiver uses a full-duplex, asynchronous,

serial interface for communicating through the male

9-PIN RS-232C COM connector. Each data is

constructed with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit

(4800 bps must be configured as 2 stop bits). No

parity is used. The pinout and the pin functions of the

COM connector are shown below:

COM

12345

9876

Rear panel view

—

Transmit data

Receive data

—

Signal ground

—

Receive enable

Transmit enable

—

Output

Input

—

Input

Output

—

COM

Pin No. COM Pin Name

(Ref.: Computer) Function

(Ref.: Transceiver) I/O

RXD

TXD

GND

RTS

CTS

RXD: Transmit data is serial data transferred from

the transceiver to the computer.

TXD: Receive data is serial data transferred from

the computer to the transceiver.

GND: Signal ground pin

RTS: This signal is applied to the transceiver. It is

used to inhibit transmit data from the transceiver

when the computer is not ready to receive data.

Transmit data is inhibited when the level is low.

CTS: This signal is applied from the transceiver. It

is used to inhibit transmit data from the computer

when the transceiver is not ready to receive data.

Transmit data is stopped when the level is low.

CONTROL OPERATION

Most computers handle data in the form of “bits” and

“bytes”. A bit is the smallest piece of information that

a computer can handle. A byte is composed of eight

bits. This is the most convenient form for most

computer data. This data may be sent in the form of

either serial or parallel data strings. The parallel

method is faster but more complicated, while the

serial method is slower and requires less complicated

equipment. The serial form is, therefore, a less

expensive alternative.

Serial data transmission uses time-division methods

over a single line. Using a single line also offers the

advantage of reducing the number of errors due to

line noise.

Only 3 lines are required theoretically for control of

the transceiver via the computer:

• Transmit data

• Receive data

• Ground

From a practical standpoint, it is also necessary to

incorporate some means of controlling when this data

transfer will occur. The computer and transceiver

cannot be allowed to send data at the same time!

The required control is achieved by using the RTS

and CTS lines.

For example, the transceiver is placed into the

transmit mode whenever the character string “TX;” is

sent from the computer. The character string “TX;” is

called a computer control command. It tells the

transceiver what to do. There are numerous

commands available for control of the transceiver.

These commands may be incorporated into a

computer program written in any high level language.

Programming methods vary from computer to

computer; therefore, refer to the instruction manuals

provided with the terminal program and computer.

114

21 APPENDIX

■Parameters

Parameters are used to specify information

necessary to implement the desired command.

The parameters to be used for each command are

predetermined. The number of digits assigned to

each parameter is also predetermined. Refer to

the Computer Control Commands and the PC

Control Command Tables {page 115} to configure

the appropriate parameters.

When configuring parameters, be careful not to

make the following mistakes.

(correct parameter: “IS+1000”)

IS1000; Not enough parameters specified

(No direction given for the IF shift)

IS+100; Not enough digits

(Only three frequency digits given)

IS +1000; Unnecessary characters between

parameters

IS+10000; Too many digits

(Five frequency digits given)

Note: If a particular parameter is not applicable to this

transceiver, the parameter digits should be filled using any

character except the ASCII control codes (00 to 1Fh) and the

terminator (;).

■Terminator

To signal the end of a command, it is necessary to

use a semicolon (;). The digit where this special

character must appear differs depending on the

command used.

■Error Messages

In addition to the Answer command, the

transceiver can send the following error

messages.

Error

Message Reason for Error

• Command syntax was incorrect.

• Command was not executed due to

the current status of the transceiver

(even though the command syntax

was correct).

A communication error occurred such

as an overrun or framing error during a

serial data transmission.

Receive data was sent but processing

was not completed.

Note: Occasionally this message may not

appear due to microprocessor transients in the

transceiver.

COMPUTER CONTROL COMMANDS

A computer control command is composed of an

alphabetical command, various parameters, and the

terminator that signals the end of the control

command.

EXAMPLE: Command to set VFO A to 7 MHz

Alphabetical command

;

Terminator

00007000000FA

Parameters

Commands can be classified as shown below:

Input

command

(Input to the

transceiver)

Output

command

(From the

transceiver)

Set command

(Sets a

particular condition)

Read command

(Reads an answer)

Answer command

(Transmits a condition)

Computer

control

commands

For example, note the following in the case of the FA

command (Frequency of VFO A):

• To set the frequency to 7 MHz, the following

command is sent from the computer to the

transceiver:

“FA00007000000;” (Set command)

• To read the frequency of VFO A, the following

command is sent from the computer to the

transceiver:

“FA;” (Read command)

• When the Read command above has been sent,

the following command is returned to the

computer:

“FA00007000000;” (Answer command)

Note:

◆

Do not use the control characters 00 to 1Fh since they are either

ignored or cause a “?” answer.

◆

Program execution may be delayed while turning the Tuning

control rapidly.

◆

Receive data is not processed if the frequency is entered from

the keypad.

■Alphabetical Commands

A command consists of 2 alphabetical characters.

You may use either lower or upper case

characters. The commands available for this

transceiver are listed in the PC Control Command

Tables {page 115}.

115

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsrenutannetnalanretniehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P URHTTA-XR:0 NITA-XR:1

2P URHTTA-XT:0 NITA-XT:1

3P )rewsnA(deppotssigninuT/)teS(gninutpotS:0 )rewsnA(evitcasigninuT/)teS(gninuTtratS:1 detelpmocebtonnacgninuT:2

teS

123456789 01

AC 1P2P3P;

daeR

123456789 01

AC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AC 1P2P3P;

.niagFAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM:0 reviecer-buS:1

2P ).xam(552~).nim(000

teS

123456789 01

AG 1P2P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

AG 1P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AG 1P2P2P2P;

.FFO/NOnoitcnuf)IA(noitamrofnIotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOIA:0 NOsitamrofIAdloylnO:1 NOsitamrofIAdednetxeylnO:2 NOerastamrofhtoB:3

reviecsnarteht,detcelessitamrofIAdednetxeehtnehW .sretemarapehtsdnesyllacitamotua

teS

123456789 01

AI 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

AI ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AI 1P;

.leveIhctoNotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 400~000

teS

123456789 01

AL 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

AL ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AL 1P1P1P;

.FFO/NOedoMotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOsinoitcnufedoMotuA:0 NOsinoitcnufedoMotuA:1

teS

123456789 01

AM 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

AM ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AM 1P;

PC CONTROL COMMAND TABLES

116

21 APPENDIX

.2TNA/1TNArotcennocannetnaehtstceleS :sretemaraP1P noitcelesannetnatnerrucehtsdaeR:0 1TNAstceleS:1 2TNAstceleS:2

teS

123456789 01

AN 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

AN ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AN 1P;

.FFO/NOnoitcnufCSAehtsdaerrosteS .noitcnufCSAehtfosutatsehtstropeR :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM:0 reviecer-buS:1

2P FFOCSA:0 NOCSA:1

3P elbissopsitcatnocxelpmiS:0 elbissoptonsitcatnocxelpmiS:1 CSAnehW.dnab”LRTC“otylnodilavsiretemarap2P .nwonknusiesnopsereht,FFOsinoitcnuf

teS

123456789 01

AR 1P2P3P;

daeR

123456789 01

AR 1P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AR 1P2P3P;

.sretemarapnoitcnufedoMotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P dnabzHM05~FH:0 dnabzHM441:1 dnabzHM044/034:2 dnabzHG2.1:3

2P 99~00 )stniop82(dnabzHM05~FH:82~00 stniop8(dnabzHG2.1,zHM044/034,zHM441:80~00 )dnabhcaerof

3P )tigid-11(zHniycneuqerF

4P devreseR:0 BSL:1 BSU:2 WC:3 MF:4 MA:5 KSF:6 R-WC:7 devreseR:8 R-KSF:9

teS

123456789 01

AS 1P2P2P3P3P3P3P3P

11213141516171819102

3P3P3P3P3P3P4P;

daeR

123456789 01

AS 1P2P2P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

AS 1P2P2P3P3P3P3P3P

11213141516171819102

3P3P3P3P3P3P4P;

.sutatsnoitcnufrellecnaCtaeBehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOrellecnaCtaeB:0 NOrellecnaCtaeBotuA:1 NOrellecnaCtaeBlaunaM:2

teS

123456789 01

BC 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

BC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

BC 1P;

.dnabycneuqerfehtnwodsevoM :sretemaraP enoN

teS

123456789 01

BD ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

117

21 APPENDIX

.sgnittesycneuqerfrellecnaCtaeBlaunaMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 360~000

teS

123456789 01

BP 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

BP ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

BP 1P1P1P;

.dnabycneuqerfehtpusevoM :sretemaraP enoN

teS

123456789 01

BU ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.sutatslangisysubehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM ysubtoN:0 ysuB:1

2P reviecer-buS ysuBtoN:0 ysuB:1

1Pehtylno,NOsinoitcnufdnammoCykSehtnehW .desusiretemarap

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

BY ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

BY 1P2P;

.sutatsnoitcnufENUTOTUAWCehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P evitcatoN/noitcnufGNINUTOTUAWCslecnaC:0 evitcA/noitcnufGNINUTOTUAWCsetavitcA:1

teS

123456789 01

CA 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

CA ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

CA 1P;

.sutatsNIAGREIRRACehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P ).xam(001~).nim(000

teS

123456789 01

CG 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

CG ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

CG 1P1P1P;

118

21 APPENDIX

.lennahcLLACehtotycneuqerftnerrucehtsteS :sretemaraP1P pupets1lortnocHC/ITLUMehtevoM:0 nwodpets1lortnocHC/ITLUMehtevoM:1

teS

123456789 01

CH 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.lennahcLLACehtotycneuqerftnerrucehtsteS :sretemaraP enoN

ehtstesti,edomllaceryromeMroedomOFVnielihW .lennahcLLACehtotycneuqerf

teS

123456789 01

CI ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

/NOnoitcnufENUTRETSULCTEKCAPehtsdaerrosteS .FFO :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufenuTretsulCtekcaP:0 NOnoitcnufenuTretsulCtekcaP:1

teS

123456789 01

CM 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

CM ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

CM 1P;

.noitcnufSSCTCehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P 83~10

.srebmunenotSSCTCehtrof53egapotrefeR

teS

123456789 01

CN 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

CN ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

CN 1P1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufSSCTCehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufSSCTC:0 NOnoitcnufSSCTC:1

teS

123456789 01

CT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

CT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

CT 1P;

119

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsdnabXTehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniamehtotdnabXTsteS:0 NOreviecer-busehtotdnabXTsteS:1

2P reviecsnartniamehtotdnabLORTNOCsteS:0 reviecer-busehtotdnabLORTNOCsteS:1

tessiretemarapemaseht,segnahcretemarap1PehtnehW .2Pot

teS

123456789 01

DC 1P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

DC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

DC 1P2P;

.yekNWDenohporcimehtsetalumE :sretemaraP1P 99~00

sadeterpretnisidnammoceht,deificepssiretmarap1PonfI .nwodpets1 dnammoceht,edomyromeMkciuQdnaedomyromeMnI nwodlennahcyromeMasadetaertsiretemarapatuohtiw ycneuqerfehtsadetaertsiti,sretemaraphtiW.dnammoc .dnammocnwod

teS

123456789 01

DN 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.sutatsnoitcnufSCDehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufSCD:0 NOnoitcnufSCD:1

teS

123456789 01

DQ 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

DQ ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

DQ 1P;

.uneMnoisnetxEehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P )ts1(.oNuneM:999~000

2P )dn2(.oNuneM:99~00

3P )dr3(.oNuneM:9~0

4P )ht4(.oNuneM:9~0

5P sretcarahcfognirtsA )htgnelelbairaV(

.”00“tes,elbaliavatonerasunemdr3dnadn2ehtfI .ylnotigid1yficepS :ssenthgirbyalpsiD .)FFOremmiD(;00000000XE .)2levelremmiD(;30000000XE tigid-2evahC26dna95,E~A15,33,13,B92uneM .sretemarap .)tigid-3(999~000:)5P(C16uneM .sretcarahc8fomumixamA:)5P(B~A26uneM .rebmunlennahcyromeMFMTDrof9~0:)3P(A54uneM )edoC(1,)FMTD(0:)4P(A54uneM retcarahctsrifehtfI.stigid61fomumixamA:)5P(A54uneM B26dnaA26.deraelceblliwemaneht,retcarahcecapsasi .”LLACON“emoceb XEehtgnisu,NO55.oNuneMnrutnacuoyhguohtlA .FFOtinrutotdnammoc;1CTehtesutsumuoy,dnammoc

teS

123456789 01

EX 1P1P1P2P2P3P4P5P

11213141516171819102

5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P

12223242526272829203

5P5P5P5P5P;

daeR

123456789 01

EX 1P1P1P2P2P3P4P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

EX 1P1P1P2P2P3P4P5P

11213141516171819102

5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P5P

12223242526272829203

5P5P5P5P5P;

120

21 APPENDIX

uneM .oN noitcnuF 5PretemarapdnammocXE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 revO

00ssenthgirbyalpsiDFFO 1234

10noitanimulliyeKFFONO

20noituloverrepegnahclortnocgninuT0050001

30ehthtiwgninuT HC/ITLUM lortnocFFONO

40 seicneuqerfOFVffosdnuoR ehtgnisuybdegnahc HC/ITLUM

lortnoc FFONO

50 ehtrofezispetsycneuqerfzHk9 HC/ITLUM noedomMAnilortnoc dnabtsacdaorbMAeht FFONO

A60noitarepotilpsOFV-yromeMFFONO

B60 yromem)FFO(dexifro)NO(elbanuT seicneuqerflennahc FFONO

70dewolsyllaitrapnacsmargorPFFONO

80 ehtrofegnarycneuqerfnwodwolS nacsmargorP 001002003004005

90dlohnacsmargorPFFONO

01dohtememusernacSOTOC

11egnarnacslausiV131619181

21leveltuptuopeeBFFO 123456789

31emulovenotedisXTFFO 123456789

41emulovkcabyalpA3-URDFFO 123456789

51emulovkcabyalp3-SVFFO 123456789

61 rofnoitarugifnoctuptuooiduA enohpdaehro2PS.TXE 012

71 2PS.TXEdna1PS.TXEehtsesreveR )slennahcR/Lkcajenohpdaeheht( stuptuooidua FFONO

81 TNAXRFHehtmorftupninaelbanE rotcennoc FFONO

A91hcleuqsretem-SFFONO

B91hcleuqsretem-SrofemitgnaHFFO521052005

02rezilauqeXRPSDFFO

HTSOOB SSAPF BTSOOB -VNOC NE RESU

12rezilauqeXTPSDFFO

HTSOOB SSAPF BTSOOB -VNOC NE RESU

22 roBSSrofhtdiwdnabretlifXTPSDMA 0.22.24.26.28.20.3

32gninutrewoptimsnarteniFFFONO

42remiTtuo-emiTFFO35010203

52yalpsidycneuqerfretrevsnarTFFONO

62 ehtsetelpmocTAnehwdlohXT gninut FFONO

72gniviecerelihwTAenil-nIFFON1O

A82 FHrofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnab FFO12

B82 rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHM05 FFO12

C82 rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHM441 FFO12

D82 rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHM044/034 FFO12

E82 rofyaledlortnocreifilpmaraeniL dnabzHG2.1 FFO12

A92kcabyalpehttaepeRFFONO

B92 ehtgnitaeperrofemitlavretnI kcabyalp 0123456789 06~ )1fospetsni(

03kcabyalprevoytiroirpgniyeKFFONO

121

21 APPENDIX

uneM .oN noitcnuF 5PretemarapdnammocXE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 revO

13ycneuqerfenotedisXT/hctipXRWC004054005055006056007057008058 0001~ )05fospetsni(

23emitesirWC 1246

33oitarthgiewhsad,todgniyekWCOTUA5.26.27.28.29.20.31.32.33.3 0.4~ )1.0fospetsni(

43oitarthgiewotuagniyekWCesreveRFFONO

53edomyekguBFFONO

63edomBSSniXTWCotuAFFONO

73 gnignahcrofnoitcerrocycneuqerF WCotBSS FFONO

83tfihsKSF071002524058

93ytiralopgniyekKSF -RON LAM -EVNI SR

04ycneuqerfenotKSF57215212

14MFrofniagciMWOLDIMHGIH

24MFrofedomenot-buS

TSRUB

TNOC

34tesfforetaeperotuAFFONO

44enotzH0571:dlohXTFFONO

A54tcelesyromemrebmunFMTD.stnemmocretemarapehteeS

B54rebmunFMTDderotsrofdeepsXTWOLSTSAF

C54 FMTDderotsrofnoitarudesuaP rebmun 001052

D54lortnocetomerciMelbanEFFONO

64CNTlanretnI:dnabBUS/NIAMNIAMBUS

74CNTlanretnI:deepsrefsnartataD00210069

84dnabgnisnesDCD CNT DNAB -NIAM BUS&

A94edomenuTretsulCtekcaPOTUA -NAM LAU

B94enotnoitamrifnocXRretsulCtekcaPFFO -ROM ES ECIOV

A05htdiwdnabretliftekcaPFFONO

B05tekcaProfleveltupniFA01

C05 rofleveltuptuoFAdnabNIAM noitarepotekcap 01

D05 tekcaprofleveltuptuoFAdnabBUS noitarepo 01

E05CNTlanretxE:dnabBUS/NIAMNIAMBUS

F05CNTlanretxE:deepsrefsnartataD00210069

A15yekFPlenaptnorF )tigid-2(99~00 ,INOMPSD:66,INOMXR:56,2ECIOV:46,1ECIOV:36,.oNuneM:26~0 ,M/OFV:27,B/A:17,TES-FT:07,TILPS:96,NI.MOMEMKCIUQ:86,RMOMEMKCIUQ:76 ,3HC:08,2HC:97,1HC:87,ENUTWC:77,NI.M:67,OFV>M:57,NACS:47,B=A:37 ,.C.B:98,.R.N:88,BN:78,2/1TNA:68,zHM1:58,LRTC:48,LLAC:38,RLC:28,ENIF:18 noitcnufoN:99,.N.A:09

.)edoctekramehtnognidneped(elbaliavaebtonyamsrebmununemllA

B15yek1FPenohporciM

C15yek2FPenohporciM

D15yek3FPenohporciM

E15yek4FPenohporciM

25 /retsamnirefsnartycneuqerftilpS noitarepoevals FFONO

35 tilpSderrefsnartehtetirwottimreP .sOFVtegratehtotseicneuqerf FFONO

45tibihniXTFFONO

55edomnoitacinummoctekcaPFFONO

122

21 APPENDIX

uneM .oN noitcnuF 5PretemarapdnammocXE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 revO

65deepsnoitacinummoctropMOC00840069

75noitcnuf)ffOrewoPotuA(OPAFFO06

85edomnoitarepoysaenitnof0002-CR -TNOF 1-TNOF 2

95 -tod)X(0002-ST/lenap0002-CR tsartnocyalpsidxirtam 12

060002-CRrofedomyalpsiD -AGEN EVIT -ISOP EVIT

A16tcelesedomretaepeRFFO

-KCOL DE SSORC

B16dlohXTretaepeRFFONO

C16edocDIlortnocetomeR)rebmuntigid-3(999~000

D16 lanretxenilangistnemegdelwonkcA edomlortnocetomer FFONO

E16lortnocetomerlanretxEFFONO

A26 ykSrofngisllacrednammoC +IIdnammoC .38egapeeS.sretcarahc9fomumixamA

B26 ykSrofngisllacretropsnarT +IIdnammoC .38egapeeS.sretcarahc9fomumixamA

C26ycneuqerfenot+IIdnammoCykS.rebmunenotehtrof53egapeeS

D26 noitacinummoc+IIdnammoCykS deeps 00210069

E26edom+IIdnammoCykSFFO -ILC TNE -MOC DNAM -ROP-T RET

123

21 APPENDIX

.ycneuqerfAOFVehtstesdnasdaeR :sretemaraP1P .)tigid-11(zHniycneuqerfehtyficepS stigidknalbehT.zHM591.41rof00059141000,elpmaxeroF .0ebtsum

teS

123456789 01

FA 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FA ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FA 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

.ycneuqerfBOFVehtstesdnasdaeR :sretemaraP1P .)tigid-11(zHniycneuqerfehtyficepS stigidknalbehT.zHM591.41rof00059141000,elpmaxeroF .0ebtsum

teS

123456789 01

FB 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FB ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FB 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

.ycneuqerfOFVs’reviecer-busehtstesdnasdaeR :sretemaraP1P .)tigid-11(zHniycneuqerfehtyficepS knalbehT.zHM591.441rof00059144100,elpmaxeroF nidesusiezispetsycneuqerfdilavniehtfI.0ebtsumstigid ehtstesyllacitamotuareviecsnarteht,retemarap1Peht .ycneuqerftseraen

teS

123456789 01

FC 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FC 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P;

.nrettaptodyalpsidretlifehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P )tib-23(DFFFFFFF~00000000 .stod03sahyalpsidhtdiwretlifehT erastib2tsalehT.tfelehtnotodastneserperBSM .desunu .0otteserastibesehT

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

FD ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FD 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

;

124

21 APPENDIX

.MOC/LLACroHC.M,OFVreviecerehtsdaerrostceleS :sretemaraP1P AOFV:0 BOFV:1 HC.M:2 LLAC:3

.dnab)lortnoC(LRTCtnerrucehtotdeilppasidnammocehT

teS

123456789 01

FR 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FR ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FR 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufENIFehtsdaerrostceleS :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufENIF:0 NOnoitcnufENIF:1

teS

123456789 01

FS 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FS 1P;

.MOC/LLACroHC.M,OFVs’rettimsnartehtsdaerrostceleS :sretemaraP1P AOFV:0 BOFV:1 HC.M:2 LLAC:3

.dnabXTtnerrucehtotdeilppasidnammocehT

teS

123456789 01

FT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FT 1P;

.htdiwretlifeviecerPSDehtsdaerrostceleS :sretemaraP1P )zHni(9999~0000 0002,0001,006,005,004,003,002,051,001,08,05:WC 0051,0001,005,052:KSF ediW=1000,worraN=0000:MA/MF

LSehtesU.dnammocWFehtesutonnacuoy,edomBSSnI .daetsnidnammocHSro

teS

123456789 01

FW 1P1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

FW ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

FW 1P1P1P1P;

.sutatstnatsnocCGAehtsdaerrostceleS :sretemaraP1P FFO=000 ).xam(020~).nim(100

reviecsnartehT.edomMFnidesuebtonnacsdnammocTG nidesusidnammocTGehtnehwsecaps3htiwsdnopser .edomMF

teS

123456789 01

GT 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

GT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

GT 1P1P1P;

125

21 APPENDIX

.rebmunDIreviecsnartehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P 0002-ST:910

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

ID;

rewsnA

123456789 01

ID 1P1P1P;

.sutatsreviecsnartehtseveirteR :sretemaraP1P )tigid-11(.zHniycneuqerfehtyficepS .”0“ebtsumstigidknalbehT2P .ezispetsycneuqerF3P ycneuqerfTIX/TIR ±zHni99999

4P NOTIR:1,FFOTIR:0

5P NOTIX:1,FFOTIX:0 CMeeS.rebmunknablennahcehtyficepS:7P,6P .dnammoc 8P XT:1,XR:0

9P .sliatedrofsdnammocDMeeS.edomgnitarepO

01P .sdnammocTFdnaRFeeS11P .dnammocCSeeS.sutatsnacS21P .dnammocPSeeS.sutatsnoitarepotilpS31P SCD:3,SSCTC:2,ENOT:1,FFO:041P .dnammocNTeeS.ycneuqerfenoT51P .dnammocSOeeS.sutatstfihS

51Pdna2Peht,+IIdnammoCykSgnitarepoelihW htgnelretemarap2PehT.knalbemocebsretemarap 5semocebhtgnelretemarap3Pehtdnasetyb5otsegnahc .setyb

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

IF;

rewsnA

123456789 01

IF 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P2P2P2P2P3P3P3P

12223242526272829203

3P3P3P4P5P6P7P7P8P9P

13233343536373839304

01P11P21P31P41P41P51P;

.sutatsnoitcnufTFIHSFIehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P ecaps

2P edomWCni)05fospetsni(0001~0040

MAro,MF,KSF,BSSnielihwdesuebtonnacsdnammocSI .edom

teS

123456789 01

IS 1P2P2P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

IS;

rewsnA

123456789 01

IS 1P2P2P2P2P;

.reyekcirtceleehtfodeepsgniyekehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P ]MPWni[).xam(060~).nim(010

teS

123456789 01

KS 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

KS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

KS 1P1P1P;

126

21 APPENDIX

.edocesroMotnisretcarahcehtstrevnoC :sretemaraP1P elbaliavasireffubretcarahC:0 elbaliavatonsireffubretcarahC:1 ).dnammocteSrofdesusiecapsA.ylnodnammocrewsnA( 2P srebmundnasretcarahcretnE :erasretcarahcelbaliavA )ecaps(_ZYXWVUTSRQPONMLKJIHGFEDCBA 9876543210 ?=:/.–,+*)('"

.retemarap2Pehtrofdesusihtgneletyb-42dexifehT .sretcarahcdesunuehtrofdesuebtsumretcarahc)ecaps(_ .detrevnoctonebtonlliwsretcarahcecapsesehT

teS

123456789 01

KY 1P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P

11213141516171819102

2P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P

12223242526272829203

2P2P2P2P2P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

KY ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

KY 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufkcolyekehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P )0002B-ST/0002-ST(FFOnoitcnufkcoL:0 )0002B-ST/0002-ST(NOnoitcnufKCOL.F:1 )0002B-ST/0002-ST(NOnoitcnufKCOL.A:2

2P )0002-CR(FFOnoitcnufKCOL:0 )0002-CR(NOnoitcnufKCOL:1

teS

123456789 01

LK 1P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

LK ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

LK 1P2P;

gnidrocerreyekcirtcelerotinuA3-URDehtsdaerdnasteS .sutats :sretemaraP1P )ylnodnammocteS(gnidrocerpotS:0 evitcanisinoitcnufgnidroceR:0 1HCotgnidrocertratS:1 2HCotgnidrocertratS:2 3HCotgnidrocertratS:3

teS

123456789 01

LM 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

LM ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

LM 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufTLAehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufTLA:0 NOnoitcnufTLA:1

teS

123456789 01

LT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

LT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

LT 1P;

.lennahcyromeMehtsdaerrosllaceR :sretemaraP1P rebmunknaboN:)ecaps(_ rebmunknabyromeM:2~0

2P rebmunlennahC:99~00

sadetaertera99ot00morfsrebmunlennahcyromeM 991ot001morfsrebmunlennahcyromeM.0knabyromeM srebmunlennahcyromeM.1knabyromeMsadetaertera .2knabyromeMsadetaertera992ot002morf

teS

123456789 01

MC 1P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

MC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MC 1P2P2P;

127

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsedomgnitarepoehtsdaerrosllaceR :sretemaraP1P BSL:1 BSU:2 WC:3 MF:4 MA:5 KSF:6 R-RC:7 devreseR:8 R-KSF:9

teS

123456789 01

MD 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

MD ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MD 1P;

.BroAuneMsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P AuneM:0 BuneM:1

teS

123456789 01

MF 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

MF ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MF 1P;

.sutatsniagenohporciMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P ).xam(001~).nim(000

teS

123456789 01

MG 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

MG ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MG 1P1P1P;

.levelnoitcnufROTINOMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOROTINOM:000 ).xam(900~).nim(100

teS

123456789 01

ML 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

ML ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

ML 1P1P1P;

rednammoCykSniFFO/NOnoitcnufROTINOMehtsteS .edom :sretemaraP1P FFOROTINOM:0 NOROTINOM:1

teS

123456789 01

MO 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

MO 1P;

128

21 APPENDIX

.atadlennahcyromeMehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P ycneuqerfXT:1,ycneuqerfXR:0 3P,2P .dnammocCMeeS.rebmunlennahcdnaknaB

4P .)tigid-11(zHniycneuqerF

5P .dnammocDMeeS.edoM

6P .NOtuokcoL:1,FFOtuokcoL:0.sutatstuokcoL

7P .SCD:3,SSCTC:2,ENOT:1,FFO:0

8P .53egapeeS.rebmuNenoT

9P .dnammocNCeeS.rebmunenotSSCTC01P .dnammocCQeeS.edocSCD11P .sutatsESREVER21P .dnammocSOeeS.sutatsTFIHS31P .dnammocSOeeS.ycneuqerftesffO

41P .dnammocTSeeS.ezispetS51P .)9~0(rebmunpuorGyromeM

61P .sretcarahc8fomumixamA.emanyromeM

:992~092lennahcyromeM )ycneuqerfdne(1=1P,)ycneuqerftrats(0=1P

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

MR 1P2P3P3P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MR 1P2P3P3P4P4P4P4P

11213141516171819102

4P4P4P4P4P4P4P5P6P7P

12223242526272829203

8P8P9P9P01P01P01P11P21P31P

13233343536373839304

31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P41P41P

14243444546474849405

51P61P61P61P61P61P61P61P61P;

.atadpuorGyromeMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 0puorGyromeM

2P 1puorGyromeM

3P 2puorGyromeM

4P 3puorGyromeM

5P 4puorGyromeM

6P 5puorGyromeM

7P 6puorGyromeM

8P 7puorGyromeM

9P 8puorGyromeM

01P 9puorGyromeM

detceleS:1,detcelesnU:0

teS

123456789 01

MU 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P

11213141516171819102

9P01P;

daeR

123456789 01

MU ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

MU 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P

11213141516171819102

9P01P;

129

21 APPENDIX

.lennahcyromeMehtotatadehterotS :sretemaraP1P ycneuqerfXT:1,ycneuqerfXR:0 3P,2P .dnammocCMeeS.rebmunlennahcdnaknaB

4P .)tigid-11(zHniycneuqerF

5P .dnammocDMeeS.edoM

6P NOtuokcoL:1,FFOtuokcoL:0.sutatstuokcoL

7P SCD:3,SSCTC:2,ENOT:1,FFO:0

8P .53egapeeS.rebmuNenoT

9P .dnammocNCeeS.rebmunenotSSCTC01P .dnammocCQeeS.edocSCD11P .sutatsESREVER21P .dnammocSOeeS.sutatsTFIHS31P .dnammocSOeeS.ycneuqerftesffO

41P .dnammocTSeeS.ezispetS51P .)9~0(rebmunpuorGyromeM

61P .sretcarahc8fomumixamA.emanyromeM

:992~092lennahcyromeM )ycneuqerfdne(1=1P,)ycneuqerftrats(0=1P

teS

123456789 01

MW 1P2P3P3P4P4P4P4P

11213141516171819102

4P4P4P4P4P4P4P5P6P7P

12223242526272829203

8P8P9P9P01P01P01P11P21P31P

13233343536373839304

31P31P31P31P31P31P31P31P41P41P

14243444546474849405

51P61P61P61P61P61P61P61P61P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.sutatsnoitcnuf)reknalBesioN(BNehtsdaerroteS :sretemaraP1P FFOBN:0 NOBN:1

teS

123456789 01

NB 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

NB ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

NB 1P;

.level)reknalBesioN(BNehtsdaerroteS :sretemaraP1P ).xam(010~).nim(100

.100sadetaertsi000 .010sadetaertera999~010

teS

123456789 01

NL 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

NL ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

NL 1P1P1P;

.sutatsnoitcnuf)noitcudeResioN(RNehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFORN:0 NO1RN:1 NO2RN:2

teS

123456789 01

NR 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

NR ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

NR 1P;

130

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsnoitcnufhctoNotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOhctoNotuA:0 NOhctoNotuA:1

teS

123456789 01

NT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

NT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

NT 1P;

.noitamrofniycneuqerftesffOehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 00005fospetsni000059950~000000000 .)tigid-9(zHniycneuqerftesffO .0ebtsumstigiddesunU

teS

123456789 01

OF 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P;

daeR

123456789 01

OF ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

OF 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P;

.atadlennahcyromeMehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P )stigid11(zHniycneuqerfehtyficepS .”0“ebtsumstigidknalbehT2P ezispetsycneuqerF3P ycneuqerfTIX/TIR ±zHni99999

4P NOTIR:1,FFOTIR:0

5P NOTIX:1,FFOTIX:0 CMeeS.rebmunknablennahcehtyficepS:7P,6P .dnammoc 8P XT:1,XR:0

9P .sliatedrofsdnammocDMeeS.edomgnitarepO

01P .sdnammocTFdnaRFeeS11P .dnammocCSeeS.sutatsnacS21P .dnammocPSeeS.sutatsnoitarepotilpS31P SCD:3,SSCTC:2,ENOT:1,FFO:041P .dnammocNTeeS.ycneuqerfenoT51P .dnammocSOeeS.sutatstfihS

51Pdna2Peht,+IIdnammoCykSgnitarepoelihW htgnelretemarap2PehT.knalbemocebsretemarap 5semocebhtgnelretemarap3Pehtdnasetyb5otsegnahc .setyb

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

OI ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

OI 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P2P2P2P2P3P3P3P

12223242526272829203

3P3P3P4P5P6P7P7P8P9P

13233343536373839304

01P11P21P31P41P41P51P;

131

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsnoitcnuftesffoehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P xelpmiS:0 +:1 –:2 )sepyt-EllA(=:3

.FFOebtsumnoitcnufTILPS.edomMFniylnodilaV

teS

123456789 01

OS 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

OS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

OS 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufreifilpma-erpehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P )reviecsnartniam(FFOreifilpma-erP:0 )reviecsnartniam(NOreifilpma-erP:1 )ylnorewsnA(2P )reviecer-bus(NOreifilpma-erP:0 )reviecer-bus(FFOreifilpma-erP:1

reviecsnartniamehtrofdetcelessidnabycneuqerfemasfI roNOdenruterasreifilpma-erphtob,reviecer-busehtdna .emitemasehttaFFO

teS

123456789 01

PA 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PA ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PA 1P2P;

.sutatskcabyalpreyekcirtceleroA3-URDehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P evitcanI:0 1HCkcabyalP:1 2HCkcabyalP:2 3HCkcabyalP:3

teS

123456789 01

PB 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PB ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PB 1P;

.rewoptuptuoehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P )1fospetsni(001~500

mumixamdnamuminimehtrofsnoitacificepSehtotrefeR .edomdnadnabycneuqerfgnitarepohcaerofrewop

.desusilevelrewoptxeneht,ttaw1nahtsselsirewopehtfI 100=W5.0,300=W5.2:xe

teS

123456789 01

PC 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PC 1P1P1P;

.lennahcyromeMelbamargorPehtniserotS :sretemaraP1P )rebmunlennahcMP(5~1

teS

123456789 01

PI 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

132

21 APPENDIX

.atadretsulCtekcaPehtsdaeR :sretemaraP .dnammocIAehthtiwnitcnujnocnidesusidnammocsihT

1P )tigid-11(zHniycneuqerF

2P )tigid-21(ngisllaC

3P )tigid-02(stnemmoC

4P )tigid-5(emiT

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

PK 1P1P1P1P1P1P1P1P

11213141516171819102

1P1P1P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P

12223242526272829203

2P2P2P2P2P3P3P3P3P3P

13233343536373839304

3P3P3P3P3P3P3P3P3P3P

14243444546474849405

3P3P3P3P3P4P4P4P4P4P

15253545556575859506

;

.leveltuptuo/tupnirossecorPhceepSehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P :leveltupnI ).xam(001~).nim(000

2P :leveltuptuO ).xam(001~).nim(000

teS

123456789 01

PL 1P1P1P2P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

PL ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PL 1P1P1P2P2P2P;

.)yromeMelbammargorP(MPehtsllaceR :sretemaraP1P FFOMP:0 )rebmunlennahcMP(5~1

teS

123456789 01

PM 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PM ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PM 1P;

.FFO/NOnoitcnufrossecorPhceepSehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOrossecorPhceepS:0 NOrossecorPhceepS:1

teS

123456789 01

PR 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PR ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PR 1P;

133

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsFFO/NOrewoPehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P NOrewoP:0 FFOrewoP:1

teS

123456789 01

PS 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

PS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

PS 1P;

.edocSCDehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P yllaitneuqesderebmunerasedocSCD301elbaliavallA .301ot000morf )edocSCD(457:301•••)edocSCD(320:000:.xe

teS

123456789 01

QC 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

QC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

QC 1P1P1P;

.yromeMkciuQehtnisgnittesehterotS :sretemaraP enoN

teS

123456789 01

QI ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.atadlennahcyromeMkciuQehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOyromeMkciuQ:0 NOyromeMkciuQ:1

2P rebmunlennahcyromeMkciuQ:9~0

teS

123456789 01

QR 1P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

QR ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

QR 1P2P;

.sutatsnoitcnufrotaunettAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOTTA:00 NOTTA:99~10

reviecsnartniamehtrofdetcelessidnabycneuqerfemasfI FFOroNOdenruterasrotaunettahtob,reviecer-busehtdna .emitemasehtta

teS

123456789 01

RA 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RA ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RA 1P1P2P2P;

134

21 APPENDIX

.ycneuqerftesffoTIRehtsraelC :sretemaraP enoN

teS

123456789 01

RC ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.nwodycneuqerftesffoTIRehtevoM .edomnacSnideepsnacsehtnwodwolS :sretemaraP1P )zHniycneuqerftesffoeht(99999~00000

2P deepsnacS:9~1 :FFOsinacSnehW .pets1nwodseogycneuqerfeht,deificepssiretemaraponfI :NOsinacSnehW .deepsnacstnerrucehtdaerot;DR deepsnacsehtwolsot)rebmunynA=nnnnn(;nnnnnDR .pets1

teS

123456789 01

RD 1P1P1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RD ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RD 2P;

.sutatsniagFRehtdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P ).xam(552~).nim(000

teS

123456789 01

RG 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RG ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RG 1P1P1P;

.levelnoitcudeResioNehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 90~10,OTUA=00:NOsi1RNehtnehW fospetsni)sm02(90~)sm2(00:NOsi2RNehtnehW sm2

teS

123456789 01

RL 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RL ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RL 1P1P;

.noitcnufreteMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P elacsretemehtstceleS detcelesnU:0 RWS:1 PMOC:2 CLA:3

2P 0300~0000:stodnieulavreteM

teS

123456789 01

RM 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RM ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RM 1P2P2P2P2P;

135

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsnoitcnufTIRehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOnoitcnufTIR:0 NOnoitcnufTIR:1

teS

123456789 01

RT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RT 1P;

.puycneuqerftesffoTIRehtsevoM .edomnacSnideepsnacsehtpudeepS :sretemaraP1P )zHniycneuqerftesffoeht(99999~00000

2P deepsnacS:9~1 :FFOsinacSnehW .pupets1seogycneuqerfeht,deificepssiretemaraponfI :NOsinacSnehW .deepsnacstnerrucehtdaerot;UR deepsnacsehtdeepsot)rebmunynA=nnnnn(;nnnnnUR .pupets1

teS

123456789 01

RU 1P1P1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

RU ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

RU 2P;

.sutatsnoitcnufreviecerehtsteS :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM:0 reviecer-buS:1

teS

123456789 01

RX ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

RX 1P;

.sutatsedometilletaSehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOedometilletaS:0 NOedometilletaS:1

2P rebmunlennahCyromeMetilletaS:9~0

3P )knilnwod(reviecer-buS/)knilpu(reviecsnartniaM:0 )knilpu(reviecer-buS/)knilnwod(reviecsnartniaM:1

4P reviecsnartniamehtnosiLRTC:0 reviecer-busehtnosiLRTC:1

5P FFOECART:1,FFOECART:0

6P NOVERECART:1,FFO.VERECART:0

7P )edomOFV(lortnocHC/ITLUM:0 )lennahcyromeM(lortnocHC/ITLUM:1

8P )sretcarahc8(emanlennahCetilletaS

ehtegnahcotdnammoc)knilpu(BFro)knilnwod(AFehtesU .seicneuqerf

teS

123456789 01

SA 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P;

daeR

123456789 01

SA ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SA 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P

11213141516171819102

8P8P8P8P8P8P8P;

136

21 APPENDIX

.sutatsW-FT,BUSehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFO)W-FT(BUS:0 NO)W-FT(BUS:1

teS

123456789 01

SB 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SB ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SB 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufNACSehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOnacS:0 NOnacS:1 NOnacSzHM:2 NOnacSlausiV:3 NOnacSenoT:4 NOnacSSSCTC:5 NOnacSSCD:6

teS

123456789 01

SC 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SC 1P;

.yaledemitni-kaerbWCehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P )sm05fospetsni(sm0001~0000 )ni-kaerblluF(KBFsi0000

teS

123456789 01

SD 1P1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SD ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SD 1P1P1P1P;

.sgnittesretlifPSDehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 11~00 )zH(MF/BSS ,0042:50,0022:40,0002:30,0081:20,0061:10,0041:00 0005:11,0004:01,0043:90,0003:80,0082:70,0062:60 )zH(MA 0005:30,0004:20,0003:10,0052:00

,NOsi)A05.oNuneM(retliFtekcaPehtnehW KSP:30,0612:20,0391:10,zH071:00

teS

123456789 01

SH 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SH ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SH 1P1P;

.emanyromemetilletaSehtsretnE :sretemaraP1P )rebmunlennahC(9~0

2P emanlennahcyromemetilletaS )sretcarahc8fomumixamA(

teS

123456789 01

SI 1P2P2P2P2P2P2P2P

11213141516171819102

2P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

137

21 APPENDIX

.sgnittesretlifPSDehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 11~00 )zH(MF/BSS 005:60,004:50,003:40,002:30,001:20,05:10,)0(01:00 0001:11,009:01,008:90,007:80,006:70 )zH(MA 005:30,002:20,001:10,)0(01:00

,NOsi)A05.oNuneM(retliFtekcaPehtnehW RAN:10,EDIW:00

teS

123456789 01

SL 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SL ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SL 1P1P;

.sutatsretem-SehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM:0 reviecer-buS:1 levelretem-SreviecsnartniaM:2 levelretem-Sreviecer-buS:3

2P sgnidaerreteM )reviecsnartniaM(0300~0000 )reviecer-buS(5100~0000

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

SM 1P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SM 1P2P2P2P2P;

.levelhcleuqsehtsdaerdnasteS :sretemaraP1P reviecsnartniaM:0 reviecer-buS:1

2P levelhcleuqS 552~000

teS

123456789 01

SQ 1P2P2P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

SQ 1P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SQ 1P2P2P2P;

.reviecsnartehtsteseR :sretemaraP1P teserOFV:1 teserretsaM:2

teS

123456789 01

SR 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.ycneuqerfesuapnacSmargorPehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P devreseR:0 teS:1 raelcllA:2

roNDehtesu,992~092lennahcyromemgnitcelesnehW dnammocsihtesu,nehT.ycneuqerfehttesotdnammocPU .ycneuqerfesuapnacSmargorPehttesot .ycneuqerftnerrucehtdaernacuoy,dnammocFIehtgnisU

teS

123456789 01

SS 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

SS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SS 1P;

138

21 APPENDIX

.spetsycneuqerflortnocHC/ITLUMehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 30~00:edomKSF/WC/BSS zHk01:30,zHk5:20,zHk5.2:10,zHk1:00 90~00:edomMF/MA ,zHk5.21:30,zHk01:20,zHk52.6:10,zHk5:00 ,zHk03:70,zHk52:60,zHk02:50,zHk51:40 zHk001:90,zHk05:80

teS

123456789 01

ST 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

ST ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

ST 1P1P;

.ycneuqerfesuapnacSmargorPehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P puorgnacSmargorP:0 puorgnacSyromeM:1

2P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.0puorG3P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.1puorG4P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.2puorG5P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.3puorG6P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.4puorG7P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.5puorG8P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.6puorG9P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.7puorG 01P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.8puorG 11P detceleS:9~1,detcelesnU:0.9puorG

teS

123456789 01

SU 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P

11213141516171819102

9P01P11P;

daeR

123456789 01

SU 1P;

rewsnA

123456789 01

SU 1P2P3P4P5P6P7P8P

11213141516171819102

9P01P11P;

.noitcnufrefsnarTyromeMehtetucexE :sretemaraP retemarapoN

teS

123456789 01

SV ;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.edomCNTlanretniehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P desusi)ecaps(_

2P edomnoitacinummoctekcaP:0 edomdnammoclortnoCCP:1

.edomnoitacinummoctekcaPretneot”0CT“niyeK .edomdnammoclortnoCCPotnruterot”1CT“niyeK

teS

123456789 01

TC 1P2P;

daeR

123456789 01

TC ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TC 1P2P;

139

21 APPENDIX

.atadlennahcyromemFMTDehtsdneS :sretemaraP1P )rebmunlennahcyromemFMTD(90~00

.tnessiatadon,lennahcehtniderotssiatadonfI

teS

123456789 01

TD 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.sutatsDELCNTehtsdaeR :sretemaraP1P NOsiDELk6.9:1,FFOsiDELk6.9:0

2P NOsiDELATS:1,FFOsiDELATS:0

3P NOsiDELNOC:1,FFOsiDELNOC:0

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

TI ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TI 1P2P3P;

.ycneuqerfenot-busehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 93~10

.srebmunenotehtrof53egapotrefeR

teS

123456789 01

TN 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

TN ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TN 1P1P;

.FFO/NOnoitcnufENOTehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOENOT:0 NOENOT:1 )ylnoteS(NOENOTgnihctiwssetalumE:2 )ylnoteS(FFOENOTgnihctiwssetalumE:3

teS

123456789 01

TO 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

TO ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TO 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufTES-FTehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOTES-FT:0 NOTES-FT:1 .edomxelpmisnignitareposireviecsnartehtnehW

1P NOESREVER:0 FFOESREVER:1 .selggotnoitcnufESREVEReht;1STdnesuoyemityrevE

teS

123456789 01

TS 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

TS ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TS 1P;

140

21 APPENDIX

.edomXTnireviecsnartehtsteS :sretemaraP1P dnabycneuqerfs’reviecsnartniamehtnostimsnarT:0 dnabycneuqerfs’reviecer-busehtnostimsnarT:1

teS

123456789 01

TX 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

TX 1P;

.epyterawmifrossecorporcimehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P devreseR

2P epytsaesrevO:0 epytW001esenapaJ:1 epytW02esenapaJ:2

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

TY ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

TY 1P1P2P;

.sutatskcolnuLLPehtstceteD :sretemaraP1P kcoL:0 kcolnU:1

teS

123456789 01

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

UL 1P;

.yekPUenohporcimehtsetalumE :sretemaraP1P 99~00

deterpretnisidnammoceht,deificepssiretemarap1PonfI .pupets1sa sdnammoc,edomyromeMkciuQdnaedomyromeMnI pulennahcyromeMsadetaerterasretemaraptuohtiw ycneuqerfsadetaerterayeht,sretemaraphtiW.sdnammoc .sdnammocpu

teS

123456789 01

UP 1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.emityaledXOVehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P )051fospetsni(sm0003~0000

teS

123456789 01

VD 1P1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

VD ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

VD 1P1P1P1P;

141

21 APPENDIX

.NIAGXOVehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P 900~000

teS

123456789 01

VG 1P1P1P;

daeR

123456789 01

VG ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

VG 1P1P1P;

.yek2ECIOVro1ECIOVehtsetalumE :sretemaraP1P 1ECIOV:0 2ECIOV:1

teS

123456789 01

VR 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

rewsnA

123456789 01

.sutatsnoitcnufXOVehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOXOV:0 NOXOV:1

teS

123456789 01

VX 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

VX ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

VX 1P;

.sutatsnoitcnufTIXehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP1P FFOTIX:0 NOTIX:1

teS

123456789 01

XT 1P;

daeR

123456789 01

XT ;

rewsnA

123456789 01

XT 1P;

ADDENDUM

This supplement provides information not available at the time the instruction manual was printed and/or corrects erroneous

information appearing in the instruction manual.

Sub-audible tone functions (Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS) in Satellite mode:

FM sub-audible tone functions (Tone/ CTCSS/ DCS) can be enabled in Satellite mode and the Tone On/Off status can be stored in

each Satellite memory channel.

• Although the Tone On/Off status is stored in each Satellite memory channel, the sub-audible tone frequency/ code cannot be stored

due to limited memory capacity. The tone frequency/ code configuration from the normal VFO (VFO-A or VFO-B) is used instead.

• The tone frequency/ code search function cannot be operated in Satellite mode.

• Encoding and decoding is performed according to the data from the uplink frequency band.

TS-2000XE specifications:

For the frequency range of the transmitter (page 105) and receiver (page 106), refer to “E-type” under the TS-2000/ TS-B2000

column. Other specifications remain unchanged.

TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2, and TS-2000XE specifications:

The 7 MHz band frequency range of the transmitter (page 105) has been expanded to “7.0 MHz - 7.2 MHz”.

AI Commands:

The TS-2000/ TS-B2000 transceivers do not support the following old AI commands: "AI 1;" and "AI 3;". There may be

incompatibilities between the transceiver and your PC logging software; changes may not be reflected when using these commands.

.FFO/NOnoitcnuf)IA(noitamrofnIotuAehtsdaerrosteS :sretemaraP

FFOIA:0

NOsitamrofIAdednetxE:2

reviecsnarteht,detcelessitamrofIAdednetxeehtnehW

.sretemarapehtsdnesyllacitamotua

:etoN

nidetroppustonera)sdnammocIAdlo(”;3IA“dna”;1IA“

.0002B-ST/0002-STeht

teS

12345678901

A I 1P ;

daeR

12345678901

A I ;

rewsnA

12345678901

A I 1P ;

IF Commands and OI Commands:

SUPLEMENTO

Este suplemento contiene información no disponible en la fecha que se imprimió el manual de instrucciones y/o corrige información

errónea que aparecía en dicho manual.

Funciones de tono subaudible (Tono/ CTCSS/ DCS) en modo Satélite:

Las funciones de tono subaudible en FM (Tono/ CTCSS/ DCS) se pueden activar en el modo Satélite, y el estado de tono activado/

desactivado se puede guardar en cada canal de memoria Satélite.

• Aunque el estado de tono activado/desactivado se guarda en cada uno de los canales de memoria Satélite, el código/frecuencia

de tono subaudible no se puede guardar debido a la capacidad limitada de memoria. En su lugar, se utiliza la configuración de

código/ frecuencia de tono del VFO normal (VFO-A o VFO-B).

• La función de búsqueda de código/ frecuencia de tono no se puede utilizar en el modo Satélite.

• La codificación y decodificación se realiza con arreglo a los datos de la banda de frecuencia ascendente.

Especificaciones de TS-2000XE:

Para conocer el rango de frecuencias del transmisor (página 105) y del receptor (página 106), consulte el “Tipo E” en la columna del

TS-2000/ TS-B2000. Otras especificaciones permanecen invariables.

Especificaciones del TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2 y TS-2000XE:

El rango de frecuencias de la banda de 7 MHz del transmisor (página 105) se ha ampliado hasta “7,0 MHz – 7,2 MHz”.

Comandos AI:

Los transceptores TS-2000/TS-B2000 no soportan los siguientes comandos Al antiguos: "AI 1;" y "AI 3;". Puede haber

incompatibilidades entre el transceptor y el software de registro de su PC; no se producirán cambios cuando se utilicen estos

comandos.

nóicamrofnIednóicnufaledodatseleeeloavitcased/avitcA

.)IA(acitámotuA

:sortemáraP

odavitcasedlA:0

odavitcaátseodidnetxeIAotamrofleetnemaloS:2

aívnerotpecsnartle,odidnetxeIAotamrofleanoiccelesesodnauC

.etnemacitámotuasortemárapsol

:atoN

noson)sougitnaIAsodnamoc(”;3IA“y”;1IA“sodnamocsoL

.0002B-ST/0002-STleropsodatropos

-elbatsE

rec

12345678901

A I 1P ;

reeL

12345678901

A I ;

-nopseR

red

12345678901

A I 1P ;

B59-2409-10

.sutatsreviecsnartehtseveirteR :sretemaraP

21P

tilpS:1,xelpmiS:0

❈.degnahcsiecnetnessihT

noitamrofnIdnaBetisppO

❈.degnahcsiecnetnessihT

:sretemaraP

21P

tilpS:1,xelpmiS:0

❈.degnahcsiecnetnessihT

Comandos IF y Comandos OI:

.rotpecsnartledodatselearepuceR :sortemáraP

21P

adidiviD:1,xelpmíS:0

❈.aibmacesnóicaroatsE

adnabaledataeuponóicamrofnI

❈.aibmacesnóicaroatsE

:sortemáraP

21P

adidiviD:1,xelpmíS:0

❈.aibmacesnóicaroatsE

SUPPLÉMENT

Ce supplément contient des informations qui n’étaient pas disponibles au moment de l’impression du mode d’emploi

et/ou corrige des informations erronées contenues dans ce mode d’emploi.

Les fonctions des tonalités sub-audibles (Tonalité/ CTCSS/ DCS) en mode satellite :

Les fonctions de tonalité sub-audibles FM (Tonalité/ CTCSS/ DCS) peuvent être activées en mode satellite et l’état Tonalité

activé/désactivé peut être sauvegardé dans chaque canal de mémoire satellite.

• Bien que l’état de la tonalité activé/désactivé soit sauvegardé dans chaque canal de mémoire satellite, la tonalité de fréquence/

code sub-audible ne peut être enregistrée du fait de la capacité mémoire limitée. La tonalité de fréquence/configuration de code

du VFO normal (VFO-A ou VFO-B) est plutôt utilisée.

• La fonction de recherche de tonalité de fréquence/ code ne peut être effectuée en mode satellite.

• Le codage et le décodage sont effectués selon les données de la bande de fréquence de la liaison montante.

Caractéristiques du modèle TS-2000XE :

Pour la plage de fréquences de l’émetteur (page 105) et du récepteur (page 106), reportez-vous à “Type E” dans la colonne

TS-2000/ TS-B2000. Les autres caractéristiques restent inchangées.

Caractéristiques des modèles TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2 et TS-2000XE :

La plage de fréquences de la bande 7 MHz de l’émetteur (page 105) a été élargie à “7,0 MHz – 7,2 MHz”.

SUPPLEMENTO

Questo supplemento fornisce informazioni non disponibili quando è stato stampato il manuale di istruzioni e/o contiene

correzioni su informazioni errate pubblicate sul manduale di istruzioni.

Funzioni di tono sotto-udibile (Tono/ CTCSS/ DCS) in modalità satellite:

Le funzioni di tono sotto-udibile (Tono/ CTCSS/ DCS) possono essere abilitate in modalità satellite e lo stato di tono attivato/

disattivato può essere memorizzato in ciascun canale di memoria satellite.

• Anche se lo stato di tono attivato/disattivato è memorizzato in ogni canale di memoria satellite, la frequenza di tono sotto-udibile/

codice non può essere memorizzata a causa della capacità di memoria limitata. Viene invece utilizzata la configurazione di

frequenza tono/ codice da VFO (VFO-A o VFO-B) normale.

• La funzione di ricerca della frequenza di tono/ codice non può essere utilizzata in modalità satellite.

• La codifica e la decodifica viene eseguita secondo i dati dalla banda di frequenza superiore.

Specifiche TS-2000XE:

Per la gamma di frequenza del trasmettitore (pagina 105) e ricevitore (pagina 106), fare riferimento a “Tipo E” nella colonna TS-2000/

TS-B2000. Le altre specifiche restano invariate.

Specifiche TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2, e TS-2000XE:

La gamma di frequenza della banda a 7 MHz del trasmettitore (pagina 105) è stata ampliata a “7,0 MHz - 7,2 MHz”.

NACHRAG

Dieser Nachtrag enthält Informationen, die zum Zeitpunkt der Drucklegung der Bedienungsanleitung noch nicht

verfügbar waren, und/oder Korrekturen für fehlerhafte Informationen in der Bedienungsanleitung.

Sub-Ton-Funktionen (Ton/ CTCSS/ DCS) im Satellitenmodus:

FM-Sub-Ton-Funktionen (Ton/ CTCSS/ DCS) können im Satellitenmodus aktiviert werden; der Tone An/Aus -Status kann in

jedem Satellitenspeicherkanal festgehalten werden.

• Obwohl der Tone An/Aus -Status in jedem Satellitenspeicherkanal festgehalten wird, ist Sub-Ton-Frequenz/ Code-Speicherung

wegen begrenzter Speicherkapazität nicht möglich. Stattdessen wird die Ton-Frequenz/ Code-Konfiguration vom normalen VFO

(VFO-A oder VFO-B) verwendet.

• Die Ton-Frequenz/ Code-Suchfunktion kann im Satellitenmodus nicht eingesetzt werden.

• Codierung und Decodierung erfolgen gemäß Daten vom Uplink-Frequenzband.

Technische Daten des TS-2000XE:

Zum Frequenzbereich des Senders (Seite 105) und des Empfängers (Seite 106) siehe „E-Typ“ in der Spalte TS-2000/ TS-B2000.

Die übrigen technischen Daten bleiben unverändert.

Technische Daten des TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2 und TS-2000XE:

Der Frequenzbereich des Senders (Seite 105) im 7-MHz-Frequenzband wurde auf „7,0 MHz – 7,2 MHz“ erweitert.

TOEVOEGSEL

Deze bijlage bevat informatie die niet beschikbaar was ten tijde van de druk van de gebruiksaanwijzing en/of

gecorrigeerde informatie die foutief is opgenomen in dezelfde gebruiksaanwijzing.

Subaudio-toonfuncties (Toon/ CTCSS/ DCS) in Satelliet-modus:

U kunt FM subaudiotonen (Toon/ CTCSS/ DCS) inschakelen in Satelliet-modus en de Toon Aan/Uit status opslaan in ieder

Satelliet-geheugenkanaal.

• Hoewel de Toon Aan/Uit status is opgeslagen in ieder Satelliet-geheugenkanaal, kunt u de subaudiotoon-frequentie/code niet

opslaan wegens beperkte geheugencapaciteit. Hiervoor in de plaats gebruikt u de configuratie van de toonfrequentie/code van

de normale VFO (VFO-A of VFO-B).

• De zoekfunctie van de toonfrequentie/code kunt u niet gebruiken in Satelliet-modus.

• Codering en decodering gebeurt volgens de gegevens van de uplink-frequentieband.

Specificaties TS-2000XE:

Raadpleeg “E-type” voor het frequentiebereik van de zender (pagina 105) en de ontvanger (pagina 106) onder de kolom TS-2000/

TS-B2000. Andere specificaties blijven ongewijzigd.

Specificaties TS-2000E/ E2, TS-B2000E/ E2 en TS-2000XE:

Het frequentiebereik van de 7 MHz-band van de zender (pagina 105) is vergroot tot “7,0 MHz – 7,2 MHz”.

Kenwood Stereo Receiver Ts 2000 Users Manual 2000_2000X_B2000

TS-2000 to the manual f36a08b1-386c-4fa0-b38f-e83128ed087d

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation